ATLAS - Ti 8 Windows User Manual

ATLAS.
ti 8 Windows
User Manual
ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual - updated for program version 8.4
Please ensure your installation of ATLAS.ti is fully updated at all times ( WINDOWS START > SCIENTIFIC SOFTWARE > CHECK FOR UPDATES).
Copyright ©2020 by ATLAS.ti Scientific Software Development GmbH, Berlin. All rights reserved.
Document version: 782.20200326.
Author: Dr. Susanne Friese (QuaRC)

Production: hypertexxt.com/Dr. Thomas G. Ringmayr
Copying or duplicating this document or any part thereof is a violation of applicable law. No part of this manual may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including, but not limited to, photocopying, without written permission
from ATLAS.ti GmbH.
Trademarks: ATLAS.ti is a registered trademark of ATLAS.ti Scientific Software Development GmbH. Adobe Acrobat is a trademark of
Adobe Systems Incorporated; Microsoft, Windows, Excel, and other Microsoft products referenced herein are either trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or in other countries. Google Earth is a trademark of Google, Inc. All other product names and any
registered and unregistered trademarks mentioned in this document are used for identification purposes only and remain the exclusive
property of their respective owners.
CONTENTS 3
Contents
About this Manual................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
How to Use This Manual................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Manual Conventions ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Useful Resources For Getting Started.......................................................................................................................................... 9
Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
The VISE Principle........................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Areas of Application...................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Teamwork...................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
ATLAS.ti – The Knowledge Workbench................................................................................................................................................. 11

Software for Creative Analysis...................................................................................................................................................... 11
Some Basic Terms.......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
General Steps when Working with ATLAS.ti............................................................................................................................... 11
Main Concepts and Features.................................................................................................................................................................. 12

Documents .................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Document Groups (Data Attributes)............................................................................................................................................ 13
Quotations..................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Coding Objectives.......................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Auto Coding Tool........................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Memos............................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
Comments...................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Groups ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
Networks........................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
Navigation Area............................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Project Search................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Analysis........................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Team Tools..................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Export............................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
ATLAS.ti Mobile for iPad and Android......................................................................................................................................... 19
Main Steps in Working with ATLAS.ti.................................................................................................................................................. 20

Data And Project Management.................................................................................................................................................... 21
The Process.................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Starting ATLAS.ti.................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Selecting The Display Language .................................................................................................................................................. 21
Creating a New Project................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Importing An Existing Project ..................................................................................................................................................... 22
Importing an ATLAS.ti 7 Project.................................................................................................................................................. 23
Importing Copy Bundle Files (Versions 5, 6 Or 7)....................................................................................................................... 23
The ATLAS.ti Interface.......................................................................................................................................................................... 23

The ATLAS.ti Ribbon.................................................................................................................................................................... 24
The Backdrop................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
The Six Main Entity Types............................................................................................................................................................ 25
The Navigation Panel.................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Context Menus.............................................................................................................................................................................. 26
Browsers ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 27
Explorers ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
Working With Docked And Floated Windows............................................................................................................................ 27
Working With Tabs And Tab Groups .......................................................................................................................................... 28
User Interface Language.............................................................................................................................................................. 30
Entity Managers..................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Launching An Entity Manager..................................................................................................................................................... 30
The Document Manager............................................................................................................................................................... 33
Quotation Manager....................................................................................................................................................................... 35
Code Manager................................................................................................................................................................................ 37
Tools tab........................................................................................................................................................................................ 38
Memo Manager............................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Network Manager......................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Link Manager................................................................................................................................................................................ 42
Relation Manager......................................................................................................................................................................... 43
ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

CONTENTS 4
Supported File Formats......................................................................................................................................................................... 45

Textual Documents...................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Synchronized documents............................................................................................................................................................. 45
PDF files (Text And Graphic)........................................................................................................................................................ 45
Graphical Documents................................................................................................................................................................... 46
Audio- and Video Documents...................................................................................................................................................... 46
Geo Documents............................................................................................................................................................................. 46
Survey Data .................................................................................................................................................................................. 46
Reference Manager Data............................................................................................................................................................. 46
Evernote........................................................................................................................................................................................ 46
Twitter........................................................................................................................................................................................... 46
Size Restrictions........................................................................................................................................................................... 47
Adding Documents................................................................................................................................................................................. 47
How To Add Documents............................................................................................................................................................... 47
Sort Order Of Documents............................................................................................................................................................ 48
Renumbering All Documents...................................................................................................................................................... 48
Loading And Navigating Documents.......................................................................................................................................... 48
Importing Multimedia Transcripts.............................................................................................................................................. 48
Project Management............................................................................................................................................................................. 50
Renaming Documents.................................................................................................................................................................. 50
Deleting Project Documents........................................................................................................................................................ 50
Duplicating Documents................................................................................................................................................................ 50
Saving A Project............................................................................................................................................................................. 51
Password Protection..................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Creating Project Backups.............................................................................................................................................................. 51
Creating A Snapshot..................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Pin To Favorites............................................................................................................................................................................ 53
Hide/ Show Projects..................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Deleting A Project......................................................................................................................................................................... 53
User Accounts............................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Where Does ATLAS.ti Store Project Data?.......................................................................................................................................... 53

Working With ATLAS.ti Libraries................................................................................................................................................ 54
Working With Groups............................................................................................................................................................................. 56

Overview........................................................................................................................................................................................ 56
Creating Groups In A Manager..................................................................................................................................................... 56
Creating Groups In The Project Explorer..................................................................................................................................... 58
Creating Groups In A Group Manager......................................................................................................................................... 58
Creating Groups in Networks....................................................................................................................................................... 58
Creating Document Groups in the Query Tool............................................................................................................................ 58
Removing Group Members.......................................................................................................................................................... 58
Removing Items From A Group In A Manager........................................................................................................................... 59
Removing Items From A Group Using The Side Panel .............................................................................................................. 59
Deleting A Group........................................................................................................................................................................... 59
Deleting Multiple Groups............................................................................................................................................................. 60
Renaming A Group....................................................................................................................................................................... 60
Association Between List Items And Groups............................................................................................................................. 60
Setting A Local Filter.................................................................................................................................................................... 60
Filtering The List Based On Multiple Groups............................................................................................................................... 61
Importing and Exporting Document Groups............................................................................................................................... 61
Team Work.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 63
Overview Of Main Steps............................................................................................................................................................... 63
Important To Know...................................................................................................................................................................... 64
Setting Up A Team Project.................................................................................................................................................................... 64

1. Project Administrator............................................................................................................................................................... 64
2. All Team Members.................................................................................................................................................................... 67
3. Project Administrator............................................................................................................................................................... 69
4. All Team Members.................................................................................................................................................................... 71
What You Need To Know When Merging Projects............................................................................................................................... 71

Merge Strategy.............................................................................................................................................................................. 71
Exploring Data ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 73

CONTENTS 5
Creating Word Clouds And Word Lists........................................................................................................................................ 73

Type-Token Ratio.......................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Project Search................................................................................................................................................................................ 79
Working With Quotations .................................................................................................................................................................... 80

Selecting Text Segments............................................................................................................................................................. 80
Creating Free Quotations ............................................................................................................................................................ 80
Creating Graphical Quotations..................................................................................................................................................... 83
Creating PDF Quotations ............................................................................................................................................................ 84
Creating Multimedia Quotations ............................................................................................................................................... 84
Coding Data............................................................................................................................................................................................ 84
Working With Codes ..................................................................................................................................................................... 91
The Margin Area.................................................................................................................................................................................... 101

Margin Display Options............................................................................................................................................................... 102
Margin Drag & Drop..................................................................................................................................................................... 102
Auto Coding........................................................................................................................................................................................... 103

Opening The Auto Coding Tool.................................................................................................................................................. 104
The Auto-Coding Dialog............................................................................................................................................................. 104
Regular Expressions (GREP)....................................................................................................................................................... 107
Focus Group Coding.............................................................................................................................................................................. 108

Guidelines For Preparing Focus Group Data............................................................................................................................. 108
Coding Focus Group Data........................................................................................................................................................... 109
Finding Redundant Codings ................................................................................................................................................................. 112
Inter-Coder Agreement (ICA)................................................................................................................................................................ 114

Please Read This First!................................................................................................................................................................ 114
Why Call It Inter-Coder Agreement Rather Than Inter-Coder Reliability? .............................................................................. 114
Why Reliability Matters............................................................................................................................................................... 114
Reliability And Validity................................................................................................................................................................ 115
At What Phase In Your Project Should ICA Analysis Be Performed? ...................................................................................... 115
Requirements For Coding............................................................................................................................................................ 115
Measuring Inter-coder Agreement............................................................................................................................................. 118
Methods For Testing ICA............................................................................................................................................................. 119
Decision Rules............................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Setting Up A Project For Inter-coder Agreement Analysis...................................................................................................... 122
Merging Projects For ICA Analysis............................................................................................................................................. 123
Preparing For ICA analysis......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Calculating An ICA Coeffient....................................................................................................................................................... 127
Working With Multimedia Data ......................................................................................................................................................... 128

Linking Multimedia Data to A Project....................................................................................................................................... 128
Display Of Multimedia Documents............................................................................................................................................ 129
Multimedia Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................... 130
Keyboard Shortcuts For Working With Multimedia Documents............................................................................................. 131
Zooming the Time Line............................................................................................................................................................... 132
Multimedia View Options........................................................................................................................................................... 132
Navigation Using The Arrow Keys.............................................................................................................................................. 133
Creating Multimedia Quotations In the Margin Area ............................................................................................................... 133
Creating Multimedia Quotations While Listening / Watching ................................................................................................ 133
Reviewing A Multimedia Quotation.......................................................................................................................................... 134
Adjusting the Size of Multimedia Quotations.......................................................................................................................... 134
Display Of Multimedia Quotations............................................................................................................................................ 134
Renaming A Multimedia Quotation.......................................................................................................................................... 134
Activating And Playing Multimedia Quotations....................................................................................................................... 135
Creating Snapshot Images From Video Frames....................................................................................................................... 135
Coding Multimedia Documents.................................................................................................................................................. 135
Describing Multimedia Quotations To Improve Output ........................................................................................................... 136
Multimedia Preferences.............................................................................................................................................................. 137
Working With Geo Docs....................................................................................................................................................................... 138

Adding A Geo Document To A Project....................................................................................................................................... 138
Finding A Location...................................................................................................................................................................... 138
Creating Geo Quotations ............................................................................................................................................................ 139

CONTENTS 6
Coding Geo Quotations............................................................................................................................................................... 139

Creating A Snapshot................................................................................................................................................................... 140
Working With Survey Data................................................................................................................................................................... 141

Preparing Survey Data For Import............................................................................................................................................. 142
How To Import Survey Data....................................................................................................................................................... 143
Inspecting Imported Survey Data.............................................................................................................................................. 143
Working With Survey Data......................................................................................................................................................... 144
Working With Reference Manager Data............................................................................................................................................ 144

Mendeley...................................................................................................................................................................................... 145
Zotero........................................................................................................................................................................................... 145
Importing Documents................................................................................................................................................................. 145
Inspecting Imported Documents............................................................................................................................................... 146
Working With Twitter Data.................................................................................................................................................................. 147

Importing Twitter Data............................................................................................................................................................... 147
Inspecting Imported Twitter Data............................................................................................................................................. 148
Working With Hyperlinks..................................................................................................................................................................... 150

Representing the Rhetoric of Data............................................................................................................................................ 150
Benefits of Hypertext................................................................................................................................................................. 150
Graphical Hyperlink Maps........................................................................................................................................................... 150
Creating Hyperlinks...................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Working With Comments And Memos............................................................................................................................................... 159

Difference Between Memos And Codes.................................................................................................................................... 160
Writing Comments....................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Creating Memos.......................................................................................................................................................................... 162
The Memo Manager.................................................................................................................................................................... 162
Querying Data........................................................................................................................................................................................ 167

Overview Of Analysis Tools......................................................................................................................................................... 167
Available Operators For Querying Data ..................................................................................................................................... 167
Code Document Table.................................................................................................................................................................. 172
Code Co-Occurrence Tools........................................................................................................................................................... 177
The Query Tool............................................................................................................................................................................. 185
Working With Smart Codes ....................................................................................................................................................... 195
Working With Smart Groups...................................................................................................................................................... 199
Applying Global Filters For Data Analysis........................................................................................................................................... 199

Creating A Global Filter.............................................................................................................................................................. 200
Setting Global Filters................................................................................................................................................................. 200
Display Of Global Filters............................................................................................................................................................. 200
Examples...................................................................................................................................................................................... 201
Global Filters In The Code Co-occurrence Table....................................................................................................................... 204
Global Filters In The Code Document Table.............................................................................................................................. 205
Activating / Deactivating Global Filters................................................................................................................................... 205
Removing A Global Filter........................................................................................................................................................... 205
Working With Networks...................................................................................................................................................................... 206

Nodes And Links......................................................................................................................................................................... 207
Relations..................................................................................................................................................................................... 208
The Network Editor .................................................................................................................................................................... 210
View Options................................................................................................................................................................................ 213
Basic Network Procedures.......................................................................................................................................................... 215
Creating New Relations.............................................................................................................................................................. 223
Layout And Routing .................................................................................................................................................................. 224
Analytic Functions...................................................................................................................................................................... 226
Exporting Networks.................................................................................................................................................................... 228
Creating Reports.................................................................................................................................................................................. 228

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................... 228
Creating Word / PDF Reports.................................................................................................................................................... 228
Creating Excel Reports............................................................................................................................................................... 230
Creating A Codebook................................................................................................................................................................... 231
Creating A Report That Shows All Codes By Documents........................................................................................................ 232
Exporting Documents................................................................................................................................................................. 232

CONTENTS 7
Info Sheet for Excel Reports...................................................................................................................................................... 232
Data Export For Further Statistical Analysis..................................................................................................................................... 233

Scaled vs. Dichotomous Codes.................................................................................................................................................. 233
SPSS Syntax Export.................................................................................................................................................................... 234
Generic Export For Further Statistical Analysis....................................................................................................................... 236
QDPX – Universal Data Exchange....................................................................................................................................................... 238

What is QDPX.............................................................................................................................................................................. 238
Why is QDPX Great for You?...................................................................................................................................................... 239
Exporting A Project In QDPX Format ........................................................................................................................................ 239
Miscellaneous Goodies............................................................................................................................................................... 240
Appendix............................................................................................................................................................................................... 240
Language Settings..................................................................................................................................................................... 240
Useful Resources........................................................................................................................................................................ 240
Get In Touch................................................................................................................................................................................ 242
Service Packs & Patches – Live Update.................................................................................................................................... 243

ABOUT THIS MANUAL 8
About this Manual

This manual describes the concepts and functions of ATLAS.ti 8.
It is not required that you read the manual sequentially from first page to last. Feel free to skip sections that describe
concepts you are already familiar with, jump directly to sections that describe functions you are interested in, or simply use it
as a reference guide to look up information on certain key features.
For users with no prior knowledge of ATLAS.ti, we do, however, recommend that you especially read through the first part of this
manual in order to become familiar with the concepts used by ATLAS.ti and to gain an overview of the available functions. These
are the chapters: "The VISE Principle," "ATLAS.ti – The Knowledge Workbench," and "Main Steps in Working with ATLAS.ti."
Further, to set up a project, we recommended that you read:
• “Main Steps in Working with ATLAS.ti“
• "Starting ATLAS.ti"
• "The ATLAS.ti Interface"
• “Adding Documents“, and
• “Project Management“
For all basic-level work like creating quotations, coding, and writing memos, consult the chapters under the main heading: “Entity
Managers“, "Exploring Data ," "Working With Quotations ," "Coding Data" "Working With Comments And Memos," and "Working
With Groups."
Advanced functions are described under: "Working With Hyperlinks," "Querying Data," and "Working With Networks."
The sequence of the chapters follows the steps that are necessary to start and work on an ATLAS.ti project: First, the main
concepts that ATLAS.ti utilizes are explained; next, an overview of all available tools is provided. These introductory and more
theoretically-oriented parts are followed by more practically-oriented chapters providing step-by-step instructions. You will
learn how to manage your data and how to set up and start a project. Once a project is set up, the basic functions such as
coding, text search, auto-coding, writing memos, etc. become relevant. Conceptual-level functions such as the network
editor, the Query Tool, and Co-occurrence Explorer build on the data-level work (at least in most cases) and are therefore
described last.
The section "Useful Resources" offers some useful advice on how to get support and where to find further information on the
software.
How to Use This Manual

This manual is intended for:
• Those who have no prior knowledge of ATLAS.ti
• Those who have worked with a previous version, ATLAS.ti 5, 6 or 7.
Some general familiarity with concepts and procedures relating to the Windows operating system and computing in general
(e. g., files, folders, paths) is assumed.
This is largely a technical document. You should not expect any detailed discussion of methodological aspects of
qualitative research other than cursory statements from this manual.
To those seeking in-depth instruction on methodological aspects, the ATLAS.ti Training Center offers a full complement
of dedicated ATLAS.ti training events worldwide, both through online courses and face-to-face seminars in nearly all
parts of the world. Visit the Training Center at https://training.atlasti.com.
Manual Conventions
Notes
Margin notes:
This paragraph contains a general note that may be of interest or worth remembering.
Margin notes contain
important observations
of a general nature.
Tip/Recommendation
This paragraph contains a tip or recommendation, i. e., something we advise you to make a practice in your work.

ABOUT THIS MANUAL 9
Caution
This paragraph contains a warning or caution, i. e., something you should avoid doing or be aware of consequences
beyond the action itself.
Instruction
This paragraph contains an instruction, i. e., something you should follow along and/or execute in the program.
Additional Reading
This paragraph offers info on additional resources on- and offline.
Useful Resources For Getting Started

• System requirements and installation instructions can be found here.
• Download Whats' New in ATLAS.ti 8 Windows here.
• Video tutorials in English and Spanish can be found on our YouTube channel.
• Free introductory online webinars here.
Introduction
ATLAS.ti is a powerful workbench for the qualitative analysis of large bodies of textual, graphical, audio, and video data. It
offers a variety of tools for accomplishing the tasks associated with any systematic approach to unstructured data, i. e., data
that cannot be meaningfully analyzed by formal, statistical approaches. In the course of such a qualitative analysis, ATLAS.ti
helps you to explore the complex phenomena hidden in your data. For coping with the inherent complexity of the tasks and
the data, ATLAS.ti offers a powerful and intuitive environment that keeps you focused on the analyzed materials. It offers
tools to manage, extract, compare, explore, and reassemble meaningful pieces from large amounts of data in creative,
flexible, yet systematic ways.
The VISE Principle

The main principles of the ATLAS.ti philosophy are best encapsulated by the acronym VISE, which stands for Visualization,
Integration, Serendipity, and Exploration.
Vis ua li z a ti o n
The visualization component of the program means directly supports the way human beings (this includes researchers!)
think, plan, and approach solutions in creative, yet systematic ways.
Tools are available to visualize complex properties and relations between the objects accumulated during the process of
eliciting meaning and structure from the analyzed data.
The object-oriented design of ATLAS.ti seeks to keep the necessary operations close to the data to which they are applied.
The visual approach of the interface keeps you focused on the data, and quite often the functions you need are just a few
mouse clicks away.
Integra ti o n
Another fundamental design aspect of the software is to integrate all pieces that comprise a project, in order not to lose
sight of the whole when going into detail.
Therefore, all relevant entities are stored in a container, the so-called "Hermeneutic Unit (HU)." Like the spider in its web, the
HU keeps all data within reach. Loading a project with hundreds of files is merely a matter of opening a single HU.

INTRODUCTION 10
Serendi pi ty
Webster's Dictionary defines serendipity as "a seeming gift for making fortunate discoveries accidentally." Other meanings
are: Fortunate accidents, lucky discoveries. In the context of information systems, one should add: Finding something
without having actually searched for it.
The term "serendipity" can be equated with an intuitive approach to data. A typical operation that relies on the serendipity
effect is browsing. This information-seeking method is a genuinely human activity: When you spend a day in the local library
(or on the World Wide Web), you often start with searching for particular books (or key words). But after a short while, you
typically find yourself increasingly engaged in browsing through books that were not exactly what you originally had in mind.
Examples of tools and procedures ATLAS.ti offers for exploiting the concept of serendipity are the Object Managers, the HU
Explorer, the interactive margin area, full text search, and the hypertext functionality.
Expl o ra ti o n
Exploration is closely related to the above principles. Through an exploratory, yet systematic approach to your data (as
opposed to a mere "bureaucratic" handling), it is assumed that especially constructive activities like theory building will be of
great benefit. The entire program's concept, including the process of getting acquainted with its particular idiosyncrasies, is
particularly conducive to an exploratory, discovery-oriented approach.
Areas of Application
ATLAS.ti serves as a powerful utility for qualitative analysis, particularly of larger bodies of textual, graphical, audio, and
video data. The content or subject matter of these materials is in no way limited to any one particular field of scientific or
scholarly investigation.
Its emphasis is on qualitative, rather than quantitative, analysis, i. e., determining the elements that comprise the primary
data material and interpreting their meaning. A related term would be "knowledge management," which emphasizes the
transformation of data into useful knowledge.
ATLAS.ti can be of great help in any field where this kind of "soft data" analysis is carried out. While ATLAS.ti was originally
designed with the social scientist in mind, it is now being put to use in areas that we had not really anticipated. Such areas
include psychology, literature, medicine, software engineering, quality control, criminology, administration, text linguistics,
stylistics, knowledge elicitation, history, geography, theology, and law, to name just some of the more prominent.
Emerging daily are numerous new fields that can also take full advantage of the program's facilities for working with
graphical, audio, and video data. A few examples:
• Anthropology: Micro-gestures, mimics, maps, geographical locations, observations, field notes
• Architecture: Annotated floor plans
• Art / Art History: Detailed interpretative descriptions of paintings or educational explanations of style
• Business Administration: Analysis of interviews, reports, web pages
• Criminology: Analysis of letters, finger prints, photographs, surveillance data
• Geography and Cultural Geography: Analysis of maps, locations
• Graphology: Micro comments to handwriting features.
• Industrial Quality Assurance: Analyzing video taped user-system interaction
• Medicine and health care practice: Analysis of X-ray images, CAT scans, microscope samples, video data of patient care,
training of health personal using video data
• Media Studies: Analysis of films, TV shows, online communities
• Tourism: Maps, locations, visitor reviews
ATLAS.ti offers support Many more applications from a host of academic and professional fields are the reality. In fact, we encourage all users to let
to the researcher - us know about the specific use they are making of ATLAS.ti in their area or work. You can always reach us via the ATLAS.ti
without taking control of Support Center at https://support.atlasti.com.
the intellectual process. The fundamental design objective in creating ATLAS.ti was to develop a tool that effectively supports the human interpreter,
particularly in handling relatively large amounts of research material, notes, and associated theories.
Although ATLAS.ti facilitates many of the activities involved in qualitative data analysis and interpretation (particularly
selecting, indexing/coding, and annotating), its purpose is not to automate these processes. Automatic interpretation of
text cannot succeed in grasping the complexity, lack of explicitness, or "contextuality" of everyday or scientific knowledge. In
fact, ATLAS.ti was designed to be more than a single tool—think of it as a professional workbench that provides a broad
selection of effective tools for a variety of problems and tasks.
Teamwork
ATLAS.ti facilitates co-authoring, i. e., it allows two or more researchers or work groups to work on the same project, albeit
asynchronously. This means each person works on his or her own project file. Access to the same data source is possible. The
sub-projects are then merged into one comprehensive MASTER project. ATLAS.ti provides the tools that allow for the
transfer and conversion of research data while keeping the respective sources of ideas identifiable at all times.

ATLAS.TI – THE KNOWLEDGE WORKBENCH 11
ATLAS.ti – The Knowledge Workbench

The image of our software as a "knowledge workbench" is more than just a lively analogy. Analytical work involves tangible
elements: research material requires piecework, assembly, reworking, complex layouts, and some special "tooling." A well-
stocked workbench provides you with the necessary instruments to thoroughly analyze and evaluate, search and query your
data, to capture, visualize and share your findings.
Software for Creative Analysis

Your typical project deals with sifting through large sets of diverse documents, notes, and multi-media files, and examining
and comparing such sources regarding a specific line of inquiry.
While the technical side of selecting, and organizing useful portions of your data might seem manageable when dealing with
just a handful of source documents, it can tend to become overwhelming as the number of sources mount.
Enter a specialized software package like ATLAS.ti: It lets you extract, categorize, and interlink data segments from a large
variety and volume of source documents. Based on your analysis, the software supports you in discovering patterns and
testing hypotheses. With numerous output options and collaboration tools, your analysis is easily accessible to yourself and
others.
Some Basic Terms

To understand how ATLAS.ti handles data, visualize your entire project as an intelligent "container" that keeps track of all
your data. This container is your ATLAS.ti project.
The project keeps track of the paths to your source data and stores the codes, code groups, networks, etc. that you develop
during your work. Your source data files are copied and stored in a repository. The standard option is for ATLAS.ti to manage
the documents for you in its internal database. If you work with larger audio or video files, they can be linked "externally" to
your project to preserve disk space. All files that you assign to the project (except those externally linked) are copied, i.e., a
duplicate is made for ATLAS.ti's exclusive use. Your original files remain intact and untouched in their original location.
Your source data can consist of text documents (such as interviews, articles, reports); images (photos, screen shots,
diagrams), audio recordings (interviews, broadcasts, music), video clips (audiovisual material), PDF files (papers, brochures,
reports), and even geo data (locative data using Open Street Map).
Once your various documents are added or linked to an ATLAS.ti project, your real work can begin. Most commonly, early
project stages involve coding different data sources.
Coding is the basic activity you engage in when using ATLAS.ti and is the basis of everything else you will do. In practical
terms, coding refers to the process of assigning categories, concepts, or "codes" to segments of information that are of
interest to your research objectives. We have modeled this function to correspond with the time-honored practice of
marking (underlining or highlighting) and annotating text passages in a book or other documents.
In its central conceptual underpinnings, ATLAS.ti has drawn deliberately from what might be called the "paper and pencil
paradigm." The user interface is designed accordingly, and many of its processes are based on—and thus can be better
understood by—this analogy.
Because of this highly intuitive design principle, you will quickly come to appreciate the margin area as one of your most
central and preferred work space—even though ATLAS.ti almost always offers a variety of ways to accomplish any given task.
General Steps when Working with ATLAS.ti

The following sequence of steps is, of course, not mandatory, but describes a common "script:"
Create a project, an "idea container," meant to enclose your data, all your findings, codes, memos, and structures under a
single name. See "Creating a New Project."
Next, add documents, text, graphic, audio and video files, or geo documents to your ATLAS.ti project. See "Adding
Documents" .
Organize your documents. See "Working With Groups".
Read and select text passages or identify areas in an image or select segments on the time line of an audio or video file
that are of further interest, assign key words (codes), and write comments and memos (see “Working With Comments
And Memos“) that contain your thinking about the data. Build a coding system. See "Working With Codes ."

ATLAS.TI – THE KNOWLEDGE WORKBENCH 12
Figure 1: Coded document with margin area
Compare data segments based on the codes you have assigned; possibly add more data files to the project. See for
example "Retrieving Coded Data."
Query the data based on your research questions utilizing the different tools ATLAS.ti provides. The key words to look for
are: simple retrieval, complex code retrievals using the Query Tool, simple or complex retrievals in combination with
variables via the scope button, the Code Co-occurrence Tools (tree explorer and table), the Codes-Document Table, data
export for further statistical analysis (see "Querying Data" and "Data Export For Further Statistical Analysis."
Build semantic, prepositional or terminological networks from the codes you have created. These networks, together with
your codes and memos, form the framework for emerging theory. See "Working With Networks" and "Working With
Comments And Memos."
Finally, compile a written report based on the memos you have written throughout the various phases of your project and
the networks you have created. See "Exporting Networks" and "Creating Reports."
For additional reading about working with ATLAS.ti, see The ATLAS.ti Research Blog and The ATLAS.ti conference
proceedings.
Main Concepts and Features

The concepts of primary documents, quotations, codes, and memos are the overall foundation you need to be familiar with
when working with ATLAS.ti, complemented by a variety of special aspects such as groups, networks (=the main
visualization tool), and analytical/data querying tools. All of these come together in the overall "project container," the
ATLAS.ti project bundle file. Acquaint yourself with this general "container" concept and its implications. Once you
understand the concept, you understand almost everything that is necessary to work with ATLAS.ti.
Everything that is relevant to a particular project (e. g., a research topic) is part of your ATLAS.ti project and resides in the
digital domain. For instance, the data you are analyzing, the quotations, the codes, the conceptual linkages (groups,
networks), and comments and memos,are all part of it. One obvious advantage of this container concept is that as user you
only have to deal with and think of one entity. Activating the ATLAS.ti project is the straightforward selection of a single file;
all associated material is then activated automatically.

MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES 13
Figure 2: Possible linkages between ATLAS.ti entities
The most basic level of an ATLAS.ti project consists of the documents you are analyzing, followed closely by the "quotations"
(= selections from these document). On the next level, codes refer to quotations. And comments and memos - you meet
them everywhere. Your ATLAS.ti project can become a highly connected entity, a dense web of primary data, associated
memos and codes, and interrelations between the codes and the data. To find your way through this web, ATLAS.ti provides
powerful browsing, retrieval and editing tools.
In the following all entities of an ATLAS.ti project are explain in more detail.
Documents
Documents represent the data you have added to an ATLAS.ti project. These can be text, image, audio, video or geographic
materials that you wish to interpret.
Document Groups (Data Attributes)

Groups in ATLAS.ti are a group of entities (see the entry "Groups" below). Document groups fulfill a special function as they
can be regarded as quasi dichotomous variables. You can group all female interviewees into a document group named
"female," all male interviewees into a group named "male." You can do the same for different professions, marital status,
education levels, etc. The classification is a 0/1 classification: "1" meaning the document is part of a particular group; "0"
meaning it is not part of the group.
Document groups can later in the analysis be used to restrict code-based searches like: "Show me all data segments coded
with 'attitude towards the environment' but only for females who live in London as compared to females who live in the
country side."
You can also use document groups as a filter, for example to reduce other types of output, like a frequency count for codes
across a particular group of documents.
This is explained in more detail in sections "Code Document Table."
Quotations
A quotation is a segment from a document that is interesting or important to the user. In textual documents, a quotation is
an arbitrary sequence of characters ranging in length from a single character, to a word, a sentence, or a paragraph, even up
to the entire data file.
Free quotations resemble passages highlighted with a marker.

Usually, quotations are created manually by the researcher. However, if repetitive words or phrases are contained in the text,
the Auto-Coding feature can be used to automatically segment these quotations and assign a code to them.
When a quotation is created, ATLAS.ti automatically assigns an identifier to it. This identifier is built from the index of the
document to which it belongs plus the first 70 characters of the text segment, e. g., "1:7 But the warnings for prospective
parents are even more stark than ‘it'......" The identifier is displayed in list windows and reports. For graphic, audio, and video
segments, the original file name of the document is chosen as identifier.
Although the creation of quotations is almost always part of a broader task like coding or writing memos, "free"
quotations can be created that indicate interesting parts in the data for which a meaningful classification has not yet
been found. Each quotation name can be renamed. Thus an approach could also be to rename a quote instead of
attaching a code label that only describes a data segment and cannot be applied anywhere else because it is too specific.
Attaching code labels at this level of analysis can result in a very long and difficult to manage code list. Additional
Reading.
Quo ta ti o ns a s La yers
Quotations can be regarded like a transparent layer on top of a document. Technically speaking, a quotation consists of the
identifier (a number) and a pair of coordinates that specify the beginning and end of the quotation. The content of a
document file (the data source) is therefore not altered by the creation, deletion, or modification of quotations.
Quotations are stored inside the ATLAS.ti project file, independent of the document to which they belong.
Types of Q uo ta ti o ns
There are six different types of quotations corresponding with the six different types of data file formats ATLAS.ti accepts:
TEXT QUOTATIONS
Textual quotations represent (for the computer) a sequence of characters ("strings") and can be of arbitrary size. Sentences,
speech turns, or paragraphs are often the basis for the length of textual quotations. Only text offers enough "syntactical
clues" to allow for searches for the occurrence of specific evidence that may support a concept. Text also offers the option for
automatic segmentation as used by the Auto-Coding procedure.
See "Auto Coding Tool."
GRAPHIC QUOTATIONS
The creation, activation, and display of graphical quotations has similarities with, but also differs from, their textual
counterparts.
A graphical quotation is a rectangular region inside a graphical document. From its data structure, it is identical to textual
quotations, since their main attributes are also the document identifier and two coordinates that mark the beginning and
end, defining a rectangle through its upper left and lower right corner. Handling graphical quotations is largely analogous to
marking text passages in a textual document.
See "Creating Graphical Quotations."
PDF Q UOTATIONS
PDF quotations can be of a textual or of a graphical nature. The quotation references for textual quotations indicate the page
number and the start and end position on the basis of character counts. For example: (31:1537-31:1745) means that this
quotation is from page 31, starting at character 1537 and ending at character 1745. The reference for coded images indicates
the position of the quotation within the PDF file, like (@422-@618),
See "Creating PDF Quotations ."
A UDIO AND VIDEO QUOTATIONS

Audio and video quotations can be as short as a few milliseconds. The length of a quotation is selected on a time line.
Segment starting points and length are displayed in the following formats:
milliseconds / HH:MM:SS:ms / frames (for videos)
See "Working With Multimedia Data ."

GEO QUOTATIONS
When creating a Geo quotation, you see the ATLAS.ti icon on an Open Street map. It is linked to one location and thus is
different from all other types of quotations that present a range. The quotation ID shows the name of the document In
addition the geographic reference of the marked location is provided.
See "Working With Geo Docs."
More detail on how to work with quotation can be found in the section "Working With Quotations "
Coding Objectives
The term "code" is used in many different ways. First, we would like to define what that term means in qualitative research,
and then in ATLAS.ti.
From a methodological standpoint, codes serve a variety of purposes. They capture meaning in the data. They also serve as
handles for specific occurrences in the data that cannot be found by simple text-based search techniques.
Codes are used as classification devices at different levels of abstraction in order to create sets of related information units
for the purpose of comparison (e. g., a concept like "Coping Strategy").
Keep code names brief and succinct. Use the comment pane for longer elaborations.
From a "low level" tool perspective, codes are typically short pieces of text referencing other pieces of text, graphical, audio,
or video data. Their purpose is to classify an often large number of textual or other data units.
In the realm of information retrieval systems, the terms "index," "indexing," or "keyword" are often used for what we call
"code" or "coding."
The length of a code should be restricted and should not be too verbose. If textual annotations are what you want, you
should use quotation comments instead.
The technical aspects of coding are described in the section “Coding Data“ and “Working With Codes “.
Auto Coding Tool

If the primary text itself contains important key words, the Auto Coding Tool scans the text and automatically assigns a pre-
selected code to matching text passages. From simple string matching to sophisticated pattern match (GREP) and keyword
in context searches, all is available in the Auto Coding Tool. If so desired, the process can be controlled by manual
confirmation of each action.
The process is described in the section "Auto Coding."
Memos
Memos capture your thoughts regarding the text and are an important device for creating theory. A "memo" is similar to a
code, but usually contains longer passages of text.
A memo may "stand alone" or it may refer to quotations, codes, and other memos. They can be sorted by type (method,
theoretical, descriptive, etc.), which is helpful in organizing and sorting them, or by creating memo groups. Memos may also
be included in the analysis as data to be coded by converting them into a project document.
Comments
You can write comments for all entities in ATLAS.ti. Comments different from memos are always directly connected to the
entity you write them for. Writing comments is similar to scribbling notes in the margin of a paper, or attaching sticky notes
to things. Comments can be written for documents, quotations, codes, memos, networks, all types of groups, and for
relations.
See "Working With Comments And Memos" for further detail.

Groups
Groups are a way to form clusters of documents, codes, memos and networks to be used as filters. Document groups can be
regarded as attributes or variables (see Working With Groups). It is possible combine them using logical operators (AND, OR,
NOT), e.g. to retrieve and analyze not only female respondents, but female respondents from the Northern region – which is
an AND combination of the group: female and the group: Northern Region.
Networks
Networks are a bit more sophisticated than groups. They allow you to conceptualize the structure by connecting sets of
related elements together in a visual diagram. With the aid of Networks you can express relationships between codes,
quotations, and memos. documents, and groups. Also Networks themselves can be "nodes" in a network.
Figure 3: Example network (see sample project)
No des , Li nks a nd Rela ti o ns

A node is any object that is displayed in a Network . You can change their look and move them around in the network editor.
Relations are link prototypes used to create a link between two codes or between two quotations. An example is the "is-a"
(ISA) relation, which is frequently used to link concepts of different abstraction level (e. g., DOG <isa> MAMMAL).
N etwo rk Ma na ger
The Network Manager contains a list of all saved Network previously constructed by the user. It can be used to create new
Network, to access or delete existing ones, or to write and edit comments. See "Network Manager."
N etwo rk edi to r
The network editor displays and offers all editing capability to construct and refine semantic networks. In addition, it allows
the visual creation and traversal of hypertext structures.
Li nk M ana ger
The Link Managers provide an overview of all code-code links and of all hyperlinks you have created. See "Working With
Hyperlinks."
Rel a ti o n Ma na ger
Should the already built-in relations that are used to connect nodes in Networks prove not sufficient, you can edit them or
create new ones using the Relation Editor. See “Creating New Relations“.
Find more information on the network function under "Working With Networks."

Navigation Area
When you open ATLAS.ti, the navigation area is displayed on the left-hand side of your screen. The Project Explorer displays
all the elements of a project in a strictly hierarchical manner, even if the structures are non-hierarchical, or even cyclic. On the
first level it displays documents, codes, memos, networks, document groups, code groups, memo groups and network
groups. By opening up the various branches, you can see and also access all linked entities. When double-clicking one of the
main branches, the associated manager opens. See "Entity Managers."
In addition to the main Project Explorer, you can open a browser for each of the main entities: documents, quotations, codes,
memos and networks. They also include a search field. Further options are to display the Code Co-occurence Explorer and the
code tree. See "Code Co-Occurrence Tools."
Project Search
Use the project wide search to search for words, sentences, expressions in your entire project. The search can be restricted to
a particular author or to any of the entities like documents, codes, memo, comments, groups, etc. The reports show the
search term with surrounding context. In addition it is possible to access each hit within the context of the project. See
"Project Search."
Analysis
ATLAS.ti contains multiple powerful, dedicated analytical tool to help to make sense of your data.
Wo rd Cl o uds and Wo rd Li s ts
ATLAS.ti can count all words in all or selected documents, all or selected quotations, or quotations coded by one or more
selected codes. The result can be displayed in form of a word cloud, an internal report, or as Excel table. Stop and go lists in
various languages can be defined and applied. See "Creating Word Clouds And Word Lists."
Cros s -Tab ul a tio n of Co des (Co de Co -o ccurrence)

The Co-occurrence Explorer and Table show where you have applied codes in an overlapping manner. Rather than
determining the codes yourself, you can ask ATLAS.ti which codes overlap. The output can be viewed in form of a tree view or
a table. The table provides a frequency count of the number of cooccurences and a coefficient measuring the strength of the
relation. Since a coefficient is only appropriate for some type of data, its display can be activated or deactivated. It is also
possible to directly access the data of each cooccurence. See "Code Co-Occurrence Tools."
Figure 4: Code Co-occurence Table

Co de Do cumentTa b l e
The Code Document Table counts the frequency of codes across documents. Aggregated counts based on code and
document groups are also available. Optionally, the table cells can also contain the word counts for the quotations per code
across documents or document group. The table can be exported to Excel. See "Code Document Table."
Query To ol
For more complex search requests, the Query Tool is at your disposal. Here you can formulate search requests that are based
on combinations of codes using one or a combination of 14 different operators, Boolean, semantic and proximity operators
(see "The Query Tool").
Sma rt Co des
A Smart Code is a stored query, thus provides an answer to a question (in the best case) and typically consists of several
combined codes. See "Working With Smart Codes ."
Sma rt Gro ups

Smart groups are a combination of groups. For instance if want to compare answers of female respondents from rural areas
with female respondents from urban areas, you would create two smart groups that you either use directly in a Code-
Document Table, or as filter in a code query. Smart code groups can be used if you frequently need a combination of certain
codes. See "Working With Smart Codes ."
Team Tools
Team work is a normal scenario in data analysis, and ATLAS.ti is uniquely suited for collaborative work. A number of special
tools and features support efficient work in a team. For further information see the chapter on "Team Work."
Us er Admi ni s tra tio n

Manage the ATLAS.ti user database through the user administration tool. This is a prerequisite for collaborative work, but is
also useful to individual users through personalizing the log-in. User Management options can be found under the Tools &
Support tab ("User Accounts“).
Pro ject Merge

This tool merges different projects. You find this function under the File menu in the backdrop area. Further information is
provided in the section "What You Need To Know When Merging Projects." and “Merging Projects“.
Inter-Co der Agreement and Rel i ab i l i ty

ATLAS.ti allows for a qualitative and quantitative comparison of the codings of various coders. If you are interested in
calculating a coefficient, ATLAS.ti offers the following: percent agreement, Holsti, and various Krippendorff's alpha
coefficients. See “Inter-Coder Agreement (ICA)“.
Please note that synchronous work is no supported. Each team member work in his or her own project file and these files
need to be merged from time to time.
Export
Wo rd / PDF
There are output options for each of the main entities in ATLAS.ti: Documents, Quotations, Codes and Memos and within the
various tools. All reports are user configurable and you can decide which type of content to include. See "Creating Reports."
Pri nt Do cument Wi th M argi n

Currently only available in the Mac version.

QDPXE xpo rt Fo r Pro jects

The QDPX format is a QDA-XML standard for exchanging projects between different CAQDAS packages. The project
exchange format was launched March 18, 2019. You can see all participanting programs on the following website:
http://www.qdasoftware.org. To export a project in QDPX format, select FILE / EXPORT.
SPSS E xpo rt
You can export your coded data as SPSS syntax file. When executed in SPSS, your quotations become cases and your codes
and code groups variables. In addition, further identifying information in form of variables is provided like the document
number for each case, start and end position and creation date. These variables allow you to aggregate your data in SPSS if
needed ("SPSS Syntax Export").
If you need a less detailed output, see “Code Document Table" The table provides an output that is already aggregated by
documents or document groups.
Generi c Sta tis ti c E xpo rt fo r R, SAS, STATA, etc.

You can export your coded data as Excel file for further analysis in any statistical package. Quotations become cases and
codes and code groups variables. In addition, further identifying information in form of variables is provided like the
document number for each case, start and end position and creation date. See “Generic Export For Further Statistical
Analysis“.
Excel E xpo rt
You find an Excel Export option in each Manager and quotation list. In addition, the results of the Code Co-occurrence Table
and the Code-Document-Table can be exported as Excel file. See "Creating Reports“.
Gra phi c Fi l es
Networks can be saved in various graphic file formats (jpg, png, tiff, gif, bmp). See “Exporting Networks“. The code-
document table can be exported as pgn file.
ATLAS.ti Mobile for iPad and Android

ATLAS.ti, the powerful knowledge workbench, now has two companions−ATLAS.ti Mobile for iPad and Android devices. With
the app you can collect and analyze data wherever you are and can take your iPad or Android device along.
Perhaps you want a work on a document while on a long train, plane or boat ride. Email it to yourself so it is available on the
iPad/Android devise. Add it to an ATLAS.ti Mobile project, read it, write comments, and perform coding work.
Figure 5: ATLAS.ti iPad app in action
You can later merge the result with your existing ATLAS.ti desktop project. This is explained in section "What You Need To
Know When Merging Projects" and “Merging Projects“.

Figure 6: ATLAS.ti Android app in action
A complete documentation of the apps is available from https://ipad.atlasti.com / https://android.atlasti.com.

ATLAS.ti Mobile for iPad and Android are available FREE from the Apple app / Google Play stores.
Main Steps in Working with ATLAS.ti

The figure below illustrates the main steps of working with ATLAS.ti, starting with the creation of a project, adding
documents, identifying interesting things in the data and coding them. Memos and comments can be written at any stage of
the process, whereas there is possibly a shift from writing comments like adding meta information to your documents, first
code nodes that later turn in to code definitions, initial thoughts about specific data segments (the ATLAS.ti quotations) to
more extensive memo writing during the later stages of the analysis. Once your data is coded, it is ready to be queried using
the various analysis tools provided. The insights gained can then be visualized using the ATLAS.ti network function.
Some steps need to be taken in sequence--for instance, logic dictates that you cannot query anything or look for co-
occurences if your data has not yet been coded. But other than that there are no strict rules. networks, in addition to
presenting findings, also have an exploratory component and as such can help you to see your data from a different
perspective. This may provide further ideas for coding, querying or even further data collection.
Figure 7: Main work flow

MAIN STEPS IN WORKING WITH ATLAS.TI 21
Data And Project Management

A first important but often neglected aspect of a project is data and project management. The first step is data preparation.
You find more information on supported file formats in the section "Supported File Formats."
Apart from analyzing your data, you also manage digital content and it is important to know how the software does it. For
detailed information, see the section “Project Management“.
If you work in a team, please read the following section: "Team Work."
The Process
There are two principal modes of working with ATLAS.ti, the data level and the conceptual level. The data level includes
activities like segmentation of data files; coding text, image, audio, and video passages; and writing comments and memos.
The conceptual level focuses on querying data and model-building activities such as linking codes to networks, in addition to
writing some more comments and memos.
Da ta -Level Wo rk
Data-level research activities include exploring your data using word clouds and word lists, segmenting the data that you
have assigned to a project into quotations, adding comments to respective passages (note-making/annotating), linking data
segments to each other called hyperlinking in ATLAS.ti, and coding data segments and memos to facilitate their later
retrieval. The act of comparing noteworthy segments leads to a creative conceptualization phase that involves higher-level
interpretive work and theory-building.
ATLAS.ti assists you in all of these tasks and provides a comprehensive overview of your work as well as rapid search,
retrieval, and browsing functions.
Within ATLAS.ti, initial ideas often find expression through their assignment to a code or memo, to which similar ideas or
text selections also become assigned. ATLAS.ti provides the researcher with a highly effective means for quickly retrieving all
data selections and notes relevant to one idea.
Co nceptua l Level Wo rk
Beyond coding and simple data retrieval:
ATLAS.ti allows you to query your data in lots of different ways, combining complex code queries with variables, exploring
relationships between codes and to visualize your findings using the network tool.
ATLAS.ti allows you to visually "connect" selected passages, memos, and codes into diagrams that graphically outline
complex relations. This feature virtually transforms your text-based work space into a graphical "playground" where you can
construct concepts and theories based on relationships between codes, data segments, or memos.
This process sometimes uncovers other relations in the data that were not obvious before and still allows you the ability to
instantly revert to your notes or primary data selection. – For more detail, see "Querying Data" and "Working With
Networks."
Starting ATLAS.ti
In Windows 10, start ATLAS.ti by typing ATLAS.ti 8 into the Cortana search field, or ask the voice assistant Cortana to open it
for you.
In older Windows versions, go to START / P ROGRAMS and select S CIENTIFIC S OFTWARE / ATLAS.ti 8. Or double-click the
ATLAS.ti shortcut on your desktop if you selected this option during installation.
Selecting The Display Language

Currently three user interface languages are available: English, German and Spanish. ATLAS.ti recognized the language or
your Operating System and will set the language accordingly. The default language is English for all OS that are not German
or Spanish.
Figure 8:
Application
commands

STARTING ATLAS.TI 22
Figure 9: Setting the Display Language
To change the user interface language, select FILE / O PTIONS / APPLICATION P REFERENCES / DISPLAY OPTIONS.
Creating a New Project

If you just started ATLAS.ti click on the button: CREATE NEW PROJECT in the opening window. Enter a project name like "My
first project” and click on CREATE.
Figure 10: Create a new project
If a project is already open, click on FILE to open the backdrop. From there select the CREATE NEW P ROJECT button.
Importing An Existing Project

Open ATLAS.ti and select the IMPORT PROJECT button from the opening screen.
If ATLAS.ti is already open, select FILE / NEW , and from there the Import Project Bundle option. You have the option to
rename the project before importing. This is useful for team project work and if you do not want to overwrite an existing
version.
If the project that you are importing already exists in your library, you have the choice to either overwrite the existing project
with the version you are importing, or whether you want to rename the project that you are importing.

STARTING ATLAS.TI 23
Figure 11: Import Project Bundle Dialogue
Importing an ATLAS.ti 7 Project

We recommend that you create a transfer bundle file in version 7 that you import to version 8.
In version 7, select PROJECT / EXPORT / TRANSFER BUNDLE (FOR MAC & A8).
Open ATLAS.ti 8 and select the regular IMPORT P ROJECT option to open your version 7 project.
If ATLAS.ti is already open, select FILE / NEW , and from there the Import Project Bundle option.
Video Tutorial: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows-Transfer from ATLAS.ti 7 to ATLAS.ti 8
Importing Copy Bundle Files (Versions 5, 6 Or 7)

To import a copy bundle file, open ATLAS.ti 8 and also select the option IMPORT P ROJECT.
If ATLAS.ti is already open, select FILE / NEW , and from there the Import Project option.
The ATLAS.ti Interface

When you open a project, you see the ribbon on top, the project navigator on the left-hand side and the ATLAS.ti logo in the
middle of the working area. At the top of the screen, you see the title bar where the name of the current project is displayed.
It also includes the Save, Undo and Redo functions on the left-hand side. Below the title you see ribbon tabs.
Video Tutorial: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - Interface Overview

THE ATLAS.TI INTERFACE 24
Figure 12: ATLAS.ti 8 Interface
You are probably familiar with ribbons from other contemporary Windows software that you use. A ribbon is a graphical
control element in the form of a set of toolbars placed on several tabs. They are grouped by functionality rather than object
types, as was the case in older versions of ATLAS.ti. Ribbons, in comparison, use tabs to expose different sets of controls,
eliminating the need for numerous parallel toolbars. This highly improves the workflow and makes it easier for users to see
which functions are available for a given context.
The ATLAS.ti Ribbon

The five core tabs in ATLAS.ti are:
• Home
• Search Project
• Analyze
• Import / Export
Figure 13: Core tabs in ATLAS.ti 8 to access the various functions
• Tools & Support
Depending on the function you are using, additional contextual tabs will appear. These will be highlighted by a colored line at
the top of the ribbon.
The HOME tab is the starting point for most projects. You can start here to add documents to a project, create new codes,
memos and networks (NEW ENTITIES ), open various navigators to be displayed in the navigation area on the left-hand side of
the screen, write a comment for your project, open the various managers, and project explorers, or auto code your project.
The S EARCH P ROJECT tab allows to search through all entities of your project. Later in this tour there will be an exercise where
you practice its functionality.
The ANALYZE tab offers a number of advanced functions to analyze your data after coding. See “Querying Data“

Use the IMPORT & EXPORT tab to import Twitter data (“Working With Twitter Data“), to add data stored in Evernote, to import
data from reference managers like Endnotes, Medeley, etc. to support the analysis of literature (“Working With Reference
Manager Data“), to import survey data, especially responses to open-ended questions (“Error: Reference source not found“)
and already existing code lists. If you are interested in a mixed-method approach, you can generate a SPSS syntax file for
further quantitative analysis in SPSS of your qualitative coding, or export a generic version in form of an Excel file for import
in R, SAS or STATA (“Data Export For Further Statistical Analysis“). Further you can import and export code books in Excel
format, or in the QDPX format for exchange with other CAQDAS software. Another option is to import or export document
groups as, or on the basis of an Excel file. See “Importing and Exporting Document Groups“.
If you want to report a problem, send suggestions, create or manage user accounts, want to access the Quick Tour or other
resources, click on the T OOLS &S UPPORT tab. A further options is to clean up your project by finding and removing redundant
codings. See “Finding Redundant Codings ”.
The Backdrop
Under FILE you find all options that concern your project, like creating a new project, open existing projects, saving and
deleting projects, exporting and merging projects (see “Project Management“. For more information on merging projects, see
“What You Need To Know When Merging Projects“.
The Six Main Entity Types
Figure 15: Access the six main entity types via the Home tab
Figure 14:
Application
commands
The six main entity types in ATLAS.ti are: Documents, Quotations, Codes, Memos, Networks, and Links. All entity types have
their own manager (see "Entity Managers"). The Entity Managers allow access to the entities and provide several options
and functions.
To open a manager, double-click on the button in the ribbon.

Entity Managers are child or dependent window of the main editor. Child windows have some common properties:
• They are closely related to their parent window and changes in either the child or the parent window are usually
"broadcast" between them (like the selections of items).
• They can be resized and positioned independently of their parent window.
• They are minimized when the parent window is minimized and they are restored with their parent window.
• They are closed when the parent window is closed.
• However, child windows do NOT move with the parent window.
Figure 16: Project Explorer in the navigation panel

The Navigation Panel

On the left-hand side of the main editor you find the navigation panel:
When you open ATLAS.ti, the Project Explorer opens automatically. From the main branches you can access documents,
codes, memos, networks and all groups. If you are looking for something in particular, you can enter a search term into the
search field. If you open the branches of the various entities, they will only show you items that contain the seearch term.
To open a branch, click on the triangle in front of each entity, or right-click and select the EXPAND option from the context
menu.
Figure 17: Expand or collapse With a double-click on a main branch, the respective manager of the selected entity type is opened (see "Entity Managers."
branches
Under the main Documents branch, you see all documents. Below each document, you can access all quotations of a
document.
Under the main Codes branch, you see the list of all codes. On the next level, you see all linked codes. For further information
see "Linking Nodes."
Under the main Memo branch, you see the list of all memos. On the next level, you see all linked entities, which for memos
can be other memos, quotations and codes.
Under the main Networks branch, you see the list of all networks. On the next level, you see all entities that are contained in
the network. If you open the branches further, you see the entities that are linked to the respective items.
Under the Group branches, you see the list of all groups and below each group, the list of all members of the selected group.
Figure 18: Context menus in navigation panel
If an entity has a comment, indicated by the yellow post-it note, it is shown in the bottom pane. See Figure 18.
Context Menus
Each item in the navigation panel has a context menu, which means a context sensitive menu opens when you right-click. As
each of the options are explained elsewhere, in the following only one example is shown. Depending on the entity that you
click, each context-menu will be slightly different:
Common to all context menus is the Expand and Collapse option, and the option to open the Entity Manager.

Browsers
In addition to the Project Explorer that contains all project items, you can also open browsers that only contain one entity
type. Browsers are available for documents, quotations, memos and networks.
To open a Browser, click on the drop-down arrow of the Navigator button. The Documents and Quotations Browser can
also be launched directly from the Navigator Group.
Figure 19: Opening a Browser or

Explorer from the Navigator Group
Figure 20: Code Browser
The single entity Browsers open in tabs next to the Project Explorer. Different from the Explorers, all Browsers have a Search
field on top of the list of entities. This facilitates working with long lists. As shown in Figure 20, the list of codes only shows
codes that contain the word 'child' as entered in the search field.
Explorers
You can open three types of explorers in the navigation panel: the Project Explorer (see "The Navigation Panel"), the Code
Forest, and The Code Co-occurrence Explorer (see "Code Co-Occurrence Tools").
Cl os i ng Bro ws ers a nd E xpl o rers

To close either a browser or explorer, click on the X at the top right of the Navigation Panel.
To close all browsers/explorers, or all but one, right-click on the drop down arrow and select the appropriate option from
the context menu.
Open Bro ws er o r E xpl o rer i n a new ta b gro up, i n a spl i t na vi ga ti o n pa nel o r

Fl oa ted
Right-click on the drop down arrow and select the appropriate option from the context menu (see Figure 21).
Figure 21: Further options
in the navigation panel
Working With Docked And Floated Windows

When you first open a manager or other windows, they will be opened in floating mode. All windows can however also be
docked and depending on what you are currently doing, you may prefer a window to be docked or floated. Once you have
docked a window, ATLAS.ti will remember this as your preferred setting for the current session. Let's shortly practice how to
dock and undock windows.
Open the Code Manager by clicking the CODES button in the Home Tab.

Figure 22: Floated Code Manager
To dock this window, click on the icon shown in Figure 22. To float the window again, click on the drop down arrow as
shown in Figure 23 and select FLOAT .
Figure 23: Docked Code Manager
Al wa ys O n To p
A floating window disappears in the background if you click outside the window. If you prefer the window to stay on top of
other windows, right-click on the button at the top left of the window and select the option ALWAYS ON T OP (Figure 24).
Figure 24: Display options for

floated windows Working With Tabs And Tab Groups
In the following it is explained how to work with the various entities and features in the main work space. If you want to click
along, you may want to open the Children & Happiness sample stage 2 sample project. Download the project bundle file and
import it (see "Importing An Existing Project ").

Figure 25: Open documents from the navigation panel
To load a document, open the document tree in the navigation area on the left-hand side and double-click document, e.g.
D1 and D3:
The documents are loaded into two tabs in the main work space. The tab of the currently loaded document is colored in
yellow.
Figure 26: Documents loaded in tabs next to each other
If you want to see the documents side-by-side, you can move one of the documents into a different tab group, click on the
down arrow and select NEW TAB G ROUP / R IGHT .
Figure 27: Moving a document into a new tab group
You have the option to move it into a tab group to the right, left, below or above.

By the way, this can also be done with any other items you open, be it your list of codes, a memo, or a network. You can
individualize your work space as it suits your needs. An example is shown in Figure 28.
Figure 28: Individualize your work space so that it suits your needs
User Interface Language

Currently the interface is available in English, German, Spanish, Portugese and Simplified Chinese. In the future, a number of
further languages will become available. See “Selecting The Display Language “.
Entity Managers
There is a separate manager for each of the six entity types: Documents, Quotations, Codes, Memos, Networks, and Links.
The Entity Managers allow access to the entities and provide several options and functions. As there are differences among
the various entity types, each manager is described in more detail further below.
Launching An Entity Manager

To open the Document Manager, click on the D OCUMENTS button in the H OME TAB ; to open the Quotation Manager, click on
the Quotations button; to open the Code Manager click on the Codes button, and so on. See Figure 15.
An alternative way is to double-click on Documents, Codes, Memos, etc. in the Project Explorer in the navigation panel on
the left (see "The Navigation Panel").
The managers open as floating windows, but all windows can be docked as well (see arrow on the top right in Figure 29).
Each manager contains a list of the entities it manages and some detailed information about them. At the bottom of the
list, you find a comment field in each manager and in some managers, also a preview field. In the Document and Quotation

ENTITY MANAGERS 31
Manager you can preview the content of either the selected document or the selected quotation. In the Memo Manager, the
memo content is shown next to the comment field.
Figure 29: Document Manager
Another common element is the side panel on the left-hand side, which can be used to quickly access and filter the elements
listed in the managers via groups.
You can activate or deactivate the side panel by selecting the first option in the VIEW TAB, which is to show or hide entity
groups (see Figure 30).
The Spl i t Ba r
The relative size of the side panel, list, preview and comment pane can be modified by dragging the split bar between the
panes. The cursor changes when the mouse moves over the split bar. You can re-size the adjacent panes by dragging the split
bar to the desired position.
The Sta tus Ba r

The status bar shows the number of items listed in the manager. The Document Manager shown in Figure 29 for instance
contains 30 documents.
Sea rchi ng
On top of the side-panel and entity lists, you find a search field.
Use the search field to search for either documents, quotations, codes or memos in the respective managers.
If you enter a search term, all objects that include the term somewhere will be shown in the list. For example, if you enter the
term "children" in the code manager, all codes that include the word "children" somewhere in the code name will be shown
like children: unrelated to personal happiness, or source: children, or SQ: Reasons for having children.
Remember to delete the search term if you want to see all codes again.
Incrementa l Sea rch

This feature is available in the list pane of all Entity Managers. Select any item in the list and type in an arbitrary sequence of
characters to jump to a subsequent list entry matching this sequence.
Co ntext Menus
The list and text panes offer context sensitive pop-up menus. The list pane's context menu contains a portion of the
commands that you also find in the ribbon.

ENTITY MANAGERS 32
So rti ng and Fi l teri ng

The Entity Managers permit comfortable sorting and filtering. With a click on a column header all items are sorted in
ascending or descending order based on the entries in the selected column.
When creating entity groups, you can also use them to filter the list of items in a manager. When selecting a group, only the
members of the selected group are shown in the list (see ""Setting A Local Filter). When selecting multiple entities, you can
combine them with AND or OR. See "Simple AND And OR Queries In The Quotation Manager".
In all managers but the Links Manager you find both a View and a Search & Filter tab. In the Document and Code Manager,
there is an additional Tools tab.
Vi ew Opti o ns
In the View tab, you can activate or deactivate the side panel, the preview field (if available) or the comments. In addition you
can switch between Detail and Single Column view.
Figure 30: View
Sea rch & Fi l ter O pti o ns

The search allows you to search through the entire content of documents, quotations or memos, through entity names and
comments, or entities created or written by a selected author. The search term can contain regular expression. See “Regular
Expressions (GREP)“.
In case you wonder why there is a search option here in addition to the main Search tab, the difference is that the search
option in managers is restricted to the respective entity type. Thus, if you are for instance in the Quotation Manager and you
want to search quotation content, accessing the search option directly in the manager is more convenient.
Figure 31: Search & Filter optiond
An additional option is to set and remove global filters.
Sel ecti ng Items in E nti ty Ma na gers

Next to thinking, clicking will likely be one of the most frequent activities when working with ATLAS.ti.
Clicking is done in many different ways such as single- and double-clicking and clicking with the left or the right mouse
A single click selects an button. The "semantics" of a mouse-click are not perfectly straightforward, and a few variations must be learned.
object, a double-click
executes an associated A single click with the left mouse button selects and highlights an item in each of the Entity Managers.
action for the object. Double-clicking an item selects the entity and invokes a procedure depending on the type and state of the entity. The effect
of a double-clicking is described for each of the Managers below.
For multiple selections, you may use the standard Windows selection techniques using the Ctrl or Shift key.
For example, suppose a number of codes begin with "em" (e. g., "Emotions") and others with "ex" (e. g., "External
Reference"): typing "em" will jump to the first of the "EMotion …" codes, while entering "ex" will jump to "EXternal
reference." Every other character typed advances the focus to the next list entry unless a matching name cannot be found.
Avoid long delays between entering characters. After a certain system-defined timeout, the next character starts a new
forward search.

ENTITY MANAGERS 33
The Document Manager

The Document Manager helps you to organize your data, to group them or to filter them. Further you can access the auto
coding tool from here, if you only want to auto code selected documents. You can begin to explore your documents using
word clouds or word lists, create reports or view geo locations in Google Maps.
Figure 32: Document Manager
Double-click: Double-clicking a document loads the data source and displays its content in the main window. For each
document a new tab will be opened.
Multiple Selection: You can select more than one document at a time by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key. This can be
useful when running an analysis for multiple documents, when creating groups or reports.
Filter: Click on one or more document groups in the side panel to set a local filter. This means only the items in the manager
are filtered. If you set a global filter, all project items are effected (version 8.1 and higher). See "Applying Global Filters For
Data Analysis"
Status Bar: The Status Bar shows how many documents there are in the project.
Do cument Ma na ger Col umns

The information provided for each document consists of:
ID: The document ID is a consecutive number given to the document by ATLAS.ti when it is added to a project.
Name: The default name is the file name of the original source file that you added to your ATLAS.ti project. You can rename
each document if you prefer a different name.
Location: Here you see whether a document is stored in the ATLAS.ti library or whether ATLAS.ti opens it from the linked
location. For further information see "Adding Documents."
Groups: This column lists all groups a document belongs to.
Quotations: The number of quotations a document has.
Created By: The name of the user who added the document.
Modified By: The name of the user modifying a document, either by writing a comment or by editing it (editing will be
implemented in version 8.2).
Created / Modified: Date and time when a document was created (=added to the project) and modified (not yet possible
until text editing is implemented).

ENTITY MANAGERS 34
The Do cument Ma na ger Ri b b o n

Many of the options available in the ribbon are also available from the context menu of a document. It is a matter of
preference which way of selecting a function you are using.
Figure 33: Document Manager ribbon
From left to right:

Add Document(s): Add a new document to your project. See "Adding Documents."
New Document Group: Create a new document group,.See "Working With Groups."
New Smart Group: Smart Groups are a combination of existing document groups using Set operators. See "Working With
Smart Groups“for further detail.
Auto Coding: See "Auto Coding."
Focus Group Coding: See "Focus Group Coding."
Rename Document: See "Renaming Documents."
Delete Document: Remove selected document(s) from a project. See "Deleting Project Documents."
Browse Geo location: This is an option for snapshot of Geo documents. It opens Google Maps and you can view the location
in the various views provided by Google Maps. For more detail see "Working With Geo Docs."
Edit Comment: Open a full-fledged text editor for writing or editing a comment for a selected document. See "Working With
Comments And Memos"
Open Group Manager: See "Working With Groups."
Open Network; Open a network on the selected primary document(s). See "Working With Networks" , "Opening A Network
On One Or More Entities”, and "Comparing Cases."
Word Cloud: See "Creating Word Clouds And Word Lists."
Word List: See "Word Lists."
Report / Excel Export: See "Creating Reports."
Too l s Ta b
Figure 34: Utilities tab in the Document Manager
Renumber Documents: When adding documents to a project, they are numbered by ATLAS.ti in consecutive order. If you
remove one or more documents, this may result in gaps. To close these gaps and renumber all documents in consecutive
order, select the Renumber Documents option. You can also use this option to re-order documents the way you want them to
be ordered. To achieve this, rename the document that sorting by name results in the order you want. Sort the document by
name and then renumber. The numbers will then follow the alphabetical order.
Renumber Quotations: Selecting this option will close any gap in the numbering of quotations. Each quotation that you
create has an ID. The ID consists of the document number and a number indicating the chronological order when it was
created. For example, the ID 3:12 means that this is a quotation in document D3 and that it was the twelfth quotation that
was created. The ID 9:41 means that this quotation is in document D9 and it was the 41 st quotation that was created in the
document. If you delete quotations or modify them, the ID does not change. If you delete a quotation with the ID 3:11, this
does not mean that quotation 3:12 automatically becomes quotation 3:11. Such an automatism is not always desired. If you
for instance have already started the writing process and made reference to some quotations using their ID, you would not
want ATLAS.ti change the Ids all the time. If you do want all quotations to be numbered in sequential order, you need to
evoke it manually by selecting the Renumber Quotations option.
Import Transcript: This option is available after you have added a multimedia document (audio or video). If you have a
transcript with timestamps for this document, you can add it as transcript. The transcript and multimedia document are
synched via the timemarks. See “Importing Multimedia Transcripts“,

ENTITY MANAGERS 35
Document Export: This option allows you to export your documents as external data files. Text files are exported as Word
docx files, all PDF. image and multimedia files in their original fomat.
Repair Link: If you have linked an audio or video file to a project and the link is no longer valid, you can repair the link using
this option.
Remove Codings: You can use this option if you want to unlink all codes from all quotations. This means all quotations and
all codes remain in the document, but none of the quotation is coded. This is useful at times for team projects and inter-
coder agreement analysis.
Browse Geo Location; All geo documents are based on Open Street Map. If you want to see a geo location in Google Maps,
you can use this option. See “Working With Geo Docs“ on page 134.
Duplicate document(s): This allows you to create an exact copy of one or more documents with all quotations, codes, links,
ect. This can be useful if for instance you want to code a document based on different aspects. Once text editing becomes
available, this option will allow you to split a document, also when it is already coded. You duplicate it first, then (entering
edito mode) you delete the second part of one document and the first part in the other.
Quotation Manager
The Quotation Manager is very useful for interpretive approaches, discourse analysis, or any other approaches where you do
not want to code data immediately. It is also used for retrieving and reviewing data by codes, creating smart codes, writing
comments on the quotation level, creating reports, or opening networks. When working with multimedia and geo data, it is
useful to rename quotation names to use the as titles for audio- or video segments or for location names in case of geo data.
Figure 35: Quotation Manager
A single-click selects a quotation. If you have written a comment for the selected quotation, it is displayed in the text pane.
A double-click on a quotation loads its document (unless already loaded)n and displays its content in context.
Multiple Selection: You can select more than one quotation at a time, either to delete them, to attach codes, to open a
network on them, or to create output.
Drag & Drop: By dragging one or more quotations onto other quotations, you create hyperlinks. See "Working With
Hyperlinks" for further information.
Filter: Click on one or more codes in the side panel to view only quotations linked to the selected code(s). See "Activating and
Displaying Quotations" for further detail.
Status Bar: The Status Bar shows how many quotations there are in the project.
Quo ta ti o n Ma na ger Col umns

The information provided for each quotation consists of:
Id: The Id combines the document number and the quotation sequence number. The quotation Id 3:10 means that the
quotation is part of the third (3:) document, and it is the 10 th (:10) quotation that was created in this document. Quotations
are numbered in chronological and not in sequential order.

ENTITY MANAGERS 36
A tilde sign (~) indicates that a comment was written for this quotation; the brackets (< or >) indicate that the quotation is a
start anchor or target for a hyperlink.
Name: The first 60 characters of a quotation are used as the default list name. This name can be changed if desired. The
default name of a graphic, audio, or video quotation is the name of the data file name. The name for geo quotations is the
geographic reference.
Document: The name of the document it belongs to.
Density: Number of links to other quotations.
Codes: the codes linked to the quotation
Created By: The name of the user who created the quotation.
Modified By: The name of the user modifying a quotation, either changing the boundaries, renaming it or writing a
comment.
Created / Modified: Date and time when a quotation was created and modified.
Start / End / Extent: Start and end position of a quotation in the document, and the total length of a quotation. The
measure that is used is dependent on the media type. See below:
Start / End
• Text quotation: number of characters
• Text PDF: page number in ATLAS.ti plus number of characters on the page
• Graphic quotation: upper left coordinates / lower right coordinates
• Audio quotation: hours:minutes:seconds: milliseconds
• Video quotation: hours:minutes:seconds: milliseconds
• Geo quotation: n/a
Extent
• Text quotation: total number of characters
• Text PDF: n/a
• Graphic quotation: height in pixel of the quotation's rectangle.
• Audio quotation: hour:minutes:seconds:milliseconds
• Video quotation: hour:minutes:seconds:milliseconds
• Geo quotation: n/a
Quo ta ti o n Ma na ger Ri b b o n
Figure 36: Quotation Manager ribbon
From left to right:

Smart code: Based on the codes in the side panel of the Quotation Manager you can build smart codes. For further
information see "Working With Smart Codes ."
List Coding: Selecting one or more existing code from a list to code a selected data segment. See "Applying Existing Codes ."
Open Coding: Coding a selected data segment with a new code. See “Coding With A New Code “.
Quick Coding: Coding with the last used code. See "Applying Existing Codes ."
Rename Quotation: When creating a quotation, ATLAS.ti creates a default name for each quotation. See "Quotation
Manager Columns." This default name can be changed. See "Renaming Quotations ."
Delete Quotation(s): For further information see "Deleting Quotations ."
Edit Comment: Open a full-fledged text editor for writing or editing a comment for a selected quotation. See "Working With
Comments And Memos"
Merge Quotations: You can merge two or more quotations. The new quotation boundary can either be the boundary of a
Selected target quotation, or it can be expanded to include all selected quotations.
Renumber Quotations: This eliminates all gaps in quotation numbering due to deletion and renumbers all quotations in
sequential order as they occur in the document.
Link Source: Click to select the selected quotation as source in the process of creating a hyperlink. See "Working With
Hyperlinks" for more detail.
Link Target: Click to select the selected quotation as target in the process of creating a hyperlink. See "Working With
Hyperlinks" for more detail.

ENTITY MANAGERS 37
Open Network: Open a network on one or more selected quotations. See "Working With Networks" and "Opening A Network
On One Or More Entities”.
Code Manager
The Code Manager is frequently used to create and modify codes, to code data segments via drag & drop, to set code colors,
to retrieve coded data segments, to organize them in code groups, to merge and to split codes, to filter them, to review them
in networks, to review its content using word clouds and word lists, and to create reports.
Figure 37: Code Manager
A double-click on a code opens the list of linked quotations. You can browse through the list of quotations and view them
highlighted in the context of its document. If there is only one quotation linked to a code, it will immediately highlighted in
the context of its document. See "Activating and Displaying Quotations."
Single-click: Selects a code. If you have written a definition for the selected code, it is displayed in the comment pane below
the list. Once selected, the code can be used for drag & drop coding, or you can add it to a code group via drag & drop.
Multiple Selection: You can select more than one code at a time by holding down the Ctrl or Shift key to delete, code a data
segment with all of the selected codes, open a network, create reports, assign them to a code group or remove them, or to
create a code group containing the selected codes.
Drag & Drop: You can use the Code Manager as a convenient tool for coding by dragging codes onto a highlighted piece of
data. If you drag codes onto another code within the same list pane, code-links will be created. If you drag a code on top of
another code in the margin area, it will be replaced.
Colors: If you add code colors, a colored circle is displayed in front of the code icon and name. Code colors also have an effect
on the display of code nodes in networks. See "Working With Networks."
Filter: Click on one or more code groups in the side panel to set a local filter. This means only the items in the manager are
filtered. If you set a global filter, all project items are effected (version 8.1 and higher). See "Applying Global Filters For Data
Analysis."
Status Bar: The Status Bar shows how many codes there are in the project.
Co de Ma na ger Co l umns
The information provided for each code consists of:
Name: Code name.

ENTITY MANAGERS 38
Grounded: Code frequency or "groundedness." It shows how many quotations are linked to a code.
Density: Number of linkages to other codes. See "Linking Nodes."
Groups: This column lists all groups a document belongs to.
Created By: The name of the user who created the code.
Modified By: The name of the user modifying the code, either renaming it or writing a comment.
Created / Modified: Date and time when a code was created and modified (i.e. renaming it, writing a comment, merging or
splitting it).
Co de Ma na ger Ri bb o n
Figure 38: Code Manager ribbon
From left to right:

Free Code(s): Create one or more new codes.
New Group: Create a new code group based on the selection you have made.
Create Smart Group: Smart Groups are a combination of existing code groups using Set operators. For further information
see “Working With Smart Groups".
Smart code: If you select two or more codes in the Code Manager, you can created ORed smart codes i.e. a smart code that
combines all selected codes with the OR operator. For further information see "Working With Smart Codes ."
Create Snapshot: See "Working With Smart Codes " and "Creating Snapshot Codes."
Duplicate Code(s): Duplicate an existing code, e.g. in order to split it using the network editor. See "Duplicating A Code ”.
Rename Code: When building a code system it is often necessary to rename a code.
Delete Code(s): Delete selected code(s).
Edit Comment: Open a full-fledged text editor for writing or editing a comment for a selected code. See "Working With
Edit Smart Code: See "Working With Smart Codes " for more detail.
Open Group Manager: Open the Group Manager for Codes. See "Working With Groups" for more detail.
Change Color: Select a color for one or more selected codes.
Merge Codes: See "Merging Codes ."
Split Code: See "Splitting A Code."
Open Network: Open a network on the selected code. See "Opening A Network On One Or More Entities."
Code Tree: See the chapter on "Working With Networks."
Tools tab
Figure 39: Options in the tools tab of the Code Manager
Import Codebook: A codebook can be imported in two formats: Excel and the QDPX exchange format. See "Importing A List
Of Codes."
Export Codebook: A codebook can be exported in two formats: Excel and the QDPX exchange format. See "Exporting The
Codebook for Use In Another ATLAS.ti Project"

ENTITY MANAGERS 39
Merge Codings: See "Creating Word Clouds And Word Lists."

Find Redundant Codings: See "Finding Redundant Codings "
Memo Manager
The Memo Manager is used to keep track of your writing. You can create, read and review, comment, sort and organize, and
group your memos. Further options are to view a memo and its connection in a network, or to turn a memo into a document
for further analysis.
Figure 40: Memo Manager
Single-click selects a memo. The content and if available comment of the memo is displayed in the bottom pane of the
window.
Multiple Selection: You can select more than one memo at a time holding down the Ctrl or Shift-key for bulk deletion, to
attach all selected memos to a data segment, to open a network on them, to create a report, to assign them to a memo
group or remove them, or to create a memo group containing the selected memos.
Double-click opens the memo editor as floating window. This window can be docked into the currently active region.
Ctr + Double-click opens the list of linked quotations.
Drag & Drop: You can attach a memo to a data selection ("memoing") by dragging it into the document pane.
Filter: Click on one or more memo groups in the side panel to set a local filter. This means only the items in the manager are
filtered. If you set a global filter, all project items are effected (version 8.1 and higher). See "Applying Global Filters For Data
Analysis."
Status Bar: The Status Bar shows how many memos there are in the project.
Memo Ma na ger Co l umns

The information provided for each memo consists of:
Name: Memo title.
Type: Memo type selected for this memo.
Grounded: Number of quotations to which a memo is connected.
Density: Number of codes and other memos to which the memo is connected.
Groups: This column lists all groups a memo belongs to.
Size: Size of content based on number of characters.
Created By: The name of the user who created the memo.
Modified By: The name of the user modifying the memo.
Created / Modified: Date and time when a memo was created and modified (i.e. editing it, renaming it, or writing a
comment).

ENTITY MANAGERS 40
Memo Ma na ger Ri bb o n
Figure 41: Memo manager ribbon
From left to right:

Create Free Memo: Create a new memo.
New Group: Create a new memo group based on the selection you have made.
Create Smart Group: Smart Groups are a combination of existing groups using Set operators. For further information see "."
Duplicate Memo(s): Duplicate an existing memo. Maybe it became to long and you want to split it into two memos.
Convert to Document: If you want to code a memo, or create quotations to hyperlink selected passages from a memo to
other data segments, you can convert a memo into a project document.
Edit Memo: Open text pane for writing the contents of a memo in a full-fledged text editor.
Rename Memo: Change the name of a selected memo.
Delete Memo(s): Delete selected memo(s).
Edit Comment: Open a full-fledged text editor for writing or editing a comment for a selected memo. See "Working With
Set Type: The default memo type is "memo”. This can be changed to a user defined type. Memos types can be used to sort
and organize memos.
Open Group Manager: Open the Memo Group Manager. See "Working With Groups" for more detail.
Open Network: Open a network on the selected memo(s). See "Opening A Network On One Or More Entities."
Network Manager
The Network Manager is frequently used to create and open networks, to rename, comment and group them.
Figure 42: Network Manager
Single-click selects a network. The comment of the network is displayed in the pane at the bottom of the window.

ENTITY MANAGERS 41
Multiple Selection: You can select more than one network at a time holding down the Ctrl or Shift-key for bulk deletion, to
assign them to a network group, to create a network group containing the selected memos, or to remove them from a group.
Double-click opens the network editor as floating window. This window can be docked into the currently active region.
Drag & Drop: You can add a network as node to a network editor, or assign selected networks to a group via drag & drop.
Filter: Click on one or more network groups in the side panel to set a local filter. This means only the items in the manager
are filtered.
Status Bar: The Status Bar shows how many networks there are in the project.
N etwo rk Ma na ger Co l umns

The information provided for each network consists of:
Name: Name of the network.
Degree: Number of nodes in a network.
Groups: This column lists all groups a network belongs to.
Created By: The name of the user who created the network.
Modified By: The name of the user modifying the network.
Created / Modified: Date and time when a network was created and modified.
N etwo rk Ma na ger Rib b o n
Figure 43: Network Manager ribbon
From right to left:

Create Network: Create a new network.
New Group: Create a new network group based on the selection you have made.
New Smart Group: Smart Groups are a combination of existing network groups using Set operators. For further information
see "Working With Smart Codes ."
Duplicate: Duplicates the selected network.
Rename Network: Change the name of an existing network.
Delete Network(s): Delete selected network(s).
Edit Comment: Open a text pane for writing or editing a comment for a network in a full-fledged text editor. See "Working
With Comments And Memos."
Open Group Manager: Open the group manager for networks. See "Working With Groups" for more detail.
Excel Export: Exports the information displayed in the Network Manager.

ENTITY MANAGERS 42
Link Manager
The Links Manager lists all existing code-code links and all existing Hyperlinks (links between two quotations). It is frequently
used to review, modify or comment these links. You can switch to view the list of Code Code Links and the list of Hyperlinks.
Figure 44: Links Manager for Code Code Links
Li nks Ma na ger Col umns (Co de-Co de Li nks )

The information provided for each code code link consists of:
Source: The start position of a link. This is relevant for directed (asymmetric and transitive) links.
Relation: Relations can be used to name a link. This is possible for code-code links and for hyperlinks. See the section
on"Relations" for more detail.
Target: The end position of a link.
Created by: The name of the user who created the link.
Modified by: The name of the user modifying the link.
Created / Modified: Date and time when a link was created and modified.
In the side panel on the left-hand side you see the list of all available relations and how often they have been used (number
in parentheses). Click on one or more relations in the side panel filter the list of links.
Li nks Ma na ger Ri b b o n
Figure 45 Shows the ribbon for Code-Code links. They are the same for Hyperlinks.
Figure 45: Code Code Links Manager ribbon
From left to right:

Cut Link(s): Cutting the link between selected codes.
Flip Link(s): Change source and target code of selected links.

ENTITY MANAGERS 43
Change Relation: Change the relation of a selected link.

Edit Comment: Open a full-fledged text editor for writing or editing a comment for a selected link. See "Working With
Open Relation Manager; You can access the Relation Manager from here, if you want to create or modify a relation. See
“Creating New Relations“, and ”Editing Existing Relations“.
Filter: You can filter links by selecting a relation in the side panel. The Filter button in the ribbon offers some additional
options: you can invert the filter, or filter the links created today, created this week, created by yourself, or all links that have
a comment.
Open Network: Open a network on the selected link(s). See "Working With Networks."
Excel Export: You can export the information you see in the manager as Excel table.
Figure 46: Links Manager for Hyperlinks
Li nks Ma na ger Col umns (Hyperl i nks )

The information provided for each hyperlink consists of:
Source: The start position of a hyperlink. This is relevant for directed (asymmetric and transitive) links.
Relation: Relations can be used to name a hyperlink. See the section on"Relations" for more detail.
Target: The end position of a hyperlink.
Created By: The name of the user who created the hyperlink.
Modified By: The name of the user modifying the hyperlink.
Created / Modified: Date and time when a hyperlink was created and modified.
In the side panel on the left-hand side you see the list of all available relations for hyperlinks and how often they have been
used (number in parentheses). Click on one or more relations in the side panel filter the list of hyperlinks.
Relation Manager
The Relation Manager is used to review the properties of existing relations, to edit existing relations, or to create new
relations. In the Links Manager, you can switch between relations for code-code links and relations for hyperlinks. As the
column information and the ribbon options are the same for both, below you find only one description. For further
information see "Working With Networks" and "Relations."
Single-click: Selects a relation. Its properties and comment are displayed in the bottom pane of the window.

ENTITY MANAGERS 44
Figure 47: Relation Manager
Rel a ti o n Ma na ger Co l umns

The information provided for each relation consists of:
Name: Full name of the relation.
Usage: Number of times it is used in the project.
Style: Preview of line: direction, color, width and property (directed, non-directed)
Width: Actual width of the line.
Layout: Automatic layout direction if you open a network on an entity.
Short: Short name as an alternative to the full name. You can either display full names, short names or the symbolic name
for all relations in a network.
Symbol: Symbolic name as an alternative to the full name. You can either display full names, short names or the symbolic
name for all relations in a network.
Type: The formal property of a relation: symmetric, asymmetric, or transitive. See "Relations."
Created By: Name of the user who created the relation.
Modified By: Name of the user who modified the relation.
Created / Modified: Date and time when a relation was created and modified (i.e. editing it, renaming it, or writing a
comment).
Rel a ti o n Ma na ger Rib b o n
Figure 48: Relation Manager ribbon
From left to right:

New Relation: Select to create a new relation.
Duplicate Relation(s): Duplicate a relation, e.g. if you want to create a new relation based on an already existing relation
with a few modifications.

ENTITY MANAGERS 45
Rename Relation: Select a relation and rename it.

Delete Relation(s): Select on or more relations that you want to delete.
Line Color: Select the line color.
Line Width: Select the line width.
Line Style: Select a the line style.
Layout Direction: Select the layout direction. If you open an ad-hoc network, the layout directions are used to position the
nodes in the network.
Formal Property: Select the “Formal Properties“ (transitive, symmetric or assymetric).
Filter: You can filter relations based on the following options: created today, created this week, created by yourself, or all
relations that have a comment. An additional option is to invert the filter.
Excel Export: You can export the information you see in the manager as Excel table.
Supported File Formats

In principle, most textual, graphical, and multimedia formats are supported by ATLAS.ti. For some formats, their suitability
depends on the state of your Windows system, particularly in regard to what other software is already installed. Before
deciding to use an exotic data format, you should check if this format is available and if it is sufficiently supported by your
Windows system.
Textual Documents
The following file formats are supported:
MS Word .doc; .docx; .rtf

Open Office .odt
HyperText Markup Language .htm; .html
Plain text .txt
other .ooxml
Synchronized documents
If you have a transcript with time marks linked to an audio or a video file, you can add the two documents to your ATLAS.ti
project and view the transcript in sync with the associated audio or video file. You can then also add new time marks and edit
existing ones. Once full text editing for primary documents is implemented you will also be able also prepare your own
transcripts directly in ATLAS.ti. - Imported transcripts can be text, rtf or doc(x) files. The format for the time stamps must
be [00:00:00].
PDF files (Text And Graphic)

PDF files are perfect if you need the original layout. When PDF was invented, its goal was to preserve the same layout for
onscreen display and in print.
If the PDF file has annotations, they are displayed in ATLAS.ti. However, they cannot be edited.
When preparing PDFs, you need to pay attention that you prepare a text PDF file and not a graphic PDF. If you do the latter,
then ATLAS.ti treats it as a graphic file and you cannot search it or retrieve text.
When scanning a text from paper, you need to use character recognition software (OCR, frequently provided with your
scanner) in order to create a text PDF file. Another option is to apply character recognition in your PDF reader/writer
software.
When you retrieve text from a coded PDF segment the output will be in rich text. Thus, you may loose the original layout.
This is due to the nature of PDF as mentioned above. It is a layout format and not really meant for text processing.

SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS 46
Graphical Documents
Supported graphic file formats are: bmp, gif, jpeg, jpg, png, tif and tiff.
Si z e recommenda ti o ns
Digital cameras and scanners often create images with a resolution that significantly exceeds the screen's resolution. When
preparing a graphic file for use with ATLAS.ti, use image-processing software to reduce the size so that the graphics are
comfortably displayed on your computer's screen. If an image does not fit into the primary pane, you can use the zoom
function available via the mouse wheel or the zoom button when displaying the image using ATLAS.ti.
Audio- and Video Documents

Supported audio file formats are: aac, m4a, mp3, mp4, wav.
Supported video file formats are; 3g2, 3gp, 3gp2, 3gpp, asf, avi, m4v, mov, mp4, wmv
For audio files, our recommendation is to use *.mp3 files with AAC audio, and for video files *.mp4 file with AAC audio and
H.264 video. These can be played both in the Windows and in the Mac version. More information available here.
As video files can be quite sizable, we recommend to link video files to an ATLAS.ti projects rather than to import the via the
Add Documents option (see "Adding Documents").
Geo Documents
When you want to work with Geo data, you only need to add a new Geo Document to your ATLAS.ti project. This opens an
Open Street world map. When you click on the option: Query Address, you can navigate to a specific region or location on the
map. For more information, see “Working With Geo Docs“.
Survey Data
The survey import option allows you to import data via an Excel spreadsheet (.xls or .xlsx files). Its main purpose is to support
the analysis of open-ended questions. In addition to the answers to open-ended questions, data attributes can also be
imported. These will be turned into document groups in ATLAS.ti. The survey import option can also be used for other case-
based data that can easily be prepared as Excel table. For further detail on how to prepare survey data, see "Error: Reference
source not found."
Reference Manager Data

In order to support a literature review, you can import collected articles from reference managers. The requirement is that
you can export the data as Endnote XML file. Most reference manages offer this option in addition to RIS or RDF. For more
information see "Working With Reference Manager Data."
Evernote
If you collect and store you data using Evernote, You can directly import files and folders from Evernote. See “Bring out the
best in Evernote with ATLAS.ti 8 Windows”.
Supported formats are:
Evernote 2.x database .enb
Evernote exported XML data .enex
Evernote database .exb
Evernote data .reco
Evernote handwritten notes and sketches .top
Evernote for Google Androide note file .enml
Twitter
You can collect data from Twitter searching for keywords, hashtags, users, etc. ATLAS.ti can collect tweets that are not older
than one week. In order to use this option, you need to sign in with your own twitter account. See “Working With Twitter
Data“,

SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS 47
Size Restrictions
Theoretically, size restrictions do not play a major role due to the way ATLAS.ti handles documents. However, you should
bear in mind that your computer's processing speed and storage capacity affect the performance. Excessively large
documents can be uncomfortable to work with, even when you have an excellently equipped computer. The crucial issue is
not always the file size, but rather, in the case of multimedia files, the length of playing time. For textual documents, the
number and size of embedded objects may cause extraordinarily long load times. There is a high likelihood that if a textual
document loads slowly in ATLAS.ti, it would also load slowly in WORD or WordPad.
For very long texts or multimedia files, navigation can be severely handicapped, e. g., scrolling to exact positions.
Make your data sources
as small as possible but We recommend making data sources as small as possible but as large as necessary without breaking passages that belong
as large as necessary. together. Even with many smaller documents, ATLAS.ti supports unified processing and fast navigation.
A Word about "Big Data:" Please keep in mind that the purpose of ATLAS.ti is to support qualitative data analysis. Big
data is a buzz word nowadays, and a lot of big data often comes as text or images, hence could be considered
qualitative. ATLAS.ti, however, is not suited for true big data analysis, which is not the same as qualitative data
analysis. As point of orientation, coding can be supported using the auto coding feature. However, you still need to read
and correct the coding and most coding in ATLAS.ti is done while the researcher reads the data and creates or selects
and applies a code that fits. A project is too large if you have so much data that you no longer can handle this part of the
work and have to to rely on a machine to do all the coding for you. If this is the case, ATLAS.ti is not the right tool for the
job.
Adding Documents
When you add documents to a project, they are stamped with a unique ID. This ID allows ATLAS.ti to detect if documents are
the same when merging different projects.
When you work in a team and want to work on the same documents, it is important that one person is setting up the
project and adds all documents that should be shared. The consequence of not doing is that documents of the same
content are duplicated or multiplied during the process of merging projects, and you cannot bring them together. If this
happens, please contact the help desk. One of our developers may be able to rescue the situation.
All documents that you add to a project are copied, and the copies become internal ATLAS.ti files. This means, strictly
speaking, that ATLAS.ti no longer needs the original files. However, we strongly recommend that you keep a backup
copy of your original source files.
As audio and video files can be quite sizable, you have the option to link them to a project instead of adding them. This
Figure 49: Add documents to a means they remain at their original location and are accessed from there. Preferably, these files should not be moved to a
project different location. If the files need to be moved, you need to re-link the files to your project. ATLAS.ti will alert you, if there is
an issue and a file can no longer be accessed. You find a Repair Link option in the Document Manager under the "Tools Tab."
How To Add Documents

To add documents to a project, click on the ADD DOCUMENTS button in the H OME tab, or click on the dialog box launcher
Figure 50: Add documents (drop-down arrow), or drag- and-drop them from the File Manager either onto the document display area or the ribbon.
Video Tutorial: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows-Adding Documents to the Project
If you click on "Add Documents” you can select individual files. If you want to add entire folders or link larger multimedia files
(audio / video) to your project, click on the dialog box launcher and select the appropriate option.
All added or linked documents are numbered consecutively starting with D1, D2, D3 and so on.

ADDING DOCUMENTS 48
Sort Order Of Documents

The number of a document is determined by its position in the list of documents. The default sort order is by name. Currently
it is not possible to manually move the position of a document.
Renumbering All Documents

This option becomes useful after you removed one or more documents from a project. This results in gaps in the sequence of
document numbers. You may remove these gaps by renumbering all documents using the Renumber Documents option.
Open the Document Manager.
Select the U TILITIES tab and from there: R ENUMBER DOCUMENTS.
Another use case is if the documents are not listed in the order you want them to be listed as by default they are sorted in
alphabetical order. You can impose your own sort order by renaming the documents, then click on the NAME column in the
Document Manager and as described above select the Renumber Documents option.
It is not necessary to renumber documents for ATLAS.ti. But doing so can give reports a cleaner appearance.
Loading And Navigating Documents
Lo a di ng Do cuments
Whenever the content of a document needs to be displayed, printed, or searched, it accesses its data source and loads the
content. This request is often triggered indirectly, e. g., by displaying (or printing) a quotation. The following lists a few
procedures that directly or indirectly load the content of a document:
• Activating it in the Project Explorer or the Document Manager.
• Activating a quotation in a navigator or the Quotation Manager.
• Selecting a quotation for an activated code or memo.
• Activating a hyperlink in the margin area.
• Using the Show in Document option when double-clicking on a quotation node in a network editor.
TO LOAD A DOCUMENT FROM THE PROJECT EXPLORER

Select a document and double-click (or press Enter). It will be loaded in the next available tab of the currently active tab
group.
TO LOAD A DOCUMENT FROM THE DOCUMENT MANAGER

Open the Document Manager by either double-clicking on the main document branch in the Project Explorer. Or click on
the Documents button in the Home tab.
Double-click an entry in the Document Manager to load and display it.
Importing Multimedia Transcripts

For those users who are familiar with version 6 or 7, this option is similar to the previous A-Docs function but implemented
in a different way. Currently it only has limited functionality to be extended in later versions. Basically, what you can do is to
import a transcript with time stamps for an already imported audio or video file. The two documents can be opened side-by-
side and when you play the audio or video file and the synchronized text in the transcript is highlighted.
Different to the previous implementation, you do not have to prepare the transcript in a specific software. Currently you can
use the following format for the timestamps: #00:00:00-0# or [00:00:00].
The first step is to add a multimedia file to your project (audio or video).
Load the multimedia document and select from the Tools tab of the contextual Documents ribbon, the option IMPORT
T RANSCRIPT.

ADDING DOCUMENTS 49
Figure 51: Import a transcript for a multimedia file
Select the transcript. It will be imported into the project. You will see a new entry in the Project Explorer under the
Multimedia Transcripts tree (see left).
If you double-click on either the transcript or the multimedia file in the Project Explorer, the documents will be opened
side-by-side.
To play the document and view the transcript at the same time, activate SYNCHRONIZED SCROLLING in the Tools tab and play
the multimedia file.
You can also move the playhead to a different position and start to play the document from there.
Figure 52: audio file and transcript in synchronized mode
Currently time stamps are not visible. This will change as soon as text editing becomes available. The Mac version offers
some more advanced functionality like being able to see the time stamps, using them to navigate through the
document and being able to edit existing time stamps or create new ones.
To remove a document from a project that is linked to either a multimedia file or a transcript, delete the association first
. You can delete an association in the Multimedia Transcript section of the Project Explorer. Right-click and select DELETE .
This will only remove the association, not the document from your project.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT 50
Project Management
Renaming Documents
Select a document and either select the RENAME button in the ribbon, or right-click and select the Rename option from the
context menu, or press F2. In-place rename is not yet implemented.
Renaming a document in ATLAS.ti does not change the name of the original source file. As described above under "Adding
Documents" documents are copied into the ATLAS.ti library when adding them to an ATLAS.ti project, and ATLAS.ti no
longer needs the original source files.
Deleting Project Documents

If you accidentally have added documents or want to remove them from your project for other reasons, you can remove
them.
Deleti ng A Si ngl e Do cument

Select a document in the Project Explorer or the Document Manager, right click and select the DELETE or the DELETES
DOCUMENT (S) option from the context menu.
Deleti ng Mul ti pl e Do cuments

Select multiple documents in the Project Explorer or the Document Manager and select the D ELETES DOCUMENT (S) option
Figure 53: Deleting project from the context menu, or the ribbon in the Document Manager.
documents
Figure 54: Deleting multiple documents in the Document Manager
If you delete a document by mistake, you can always use the U NDO option in the Quick Access tool bar.
After deleting documents, the consecutive numbering may be off. To renumber documents in consecutive order again,
select the U TILITIES tab in the Document Manager and the R ENUMBER DOCUMENTS option (see "Renumbering All
Documents").
Duplicating Documents
If you need a document for different purposes, e.g. you want to view it from different angels and want to code different
aspects; or if you want to associate it with different transcripts, you can duplicate a document. All work that you have done
so far in the document, like the document comment you have written, all quotations and their comments, all hyperlinks, all
linked codes and memos will be duplicated as well,
Open the Document Manager and select one or more documents that you want to duplicate.
Click on the T OOLS tab and select DUPLICATE DOCUMENT(S)

Figure 55: Duplicate documents
The duplicated document(s) will be added at the end of the list of documents. They have the same name as the original
document(s) plus a consecutive number in parentheses.
In terms of project size, the file(s) in the library are not duplicated. The duplicated document uses the same source file as the
original document.
Saving A Project
To save a project, click on the Save icon in the Quick Access tool bar (see left), or select FILE / SAVE .
The project is saved as internal ATLAS.ti file in the Windows application folder called AppData roaming on your computer. For
further information, see “Where Does ATLAS.ti Store Project Data?“.
Password Protection
Figure 56: Quick access tool
bar
To set a password for your project, you need to load it first.
Select FILE / INFO.
Click on on the S ET P ASSWORD button and follow the instruction on the screen.
Figure 57: Setting a password
Please note that ATLAS.ti Scientific Software GmbH does not save your passwords. We cannot access, read or recover
your password. If you cannot remember your password, you can no longer access your project!
Creating Project Backups

To create a backup of your project, select FILE / EXPORT .
This creates a project bundle file which contains all documents that you have added or linked to a project and the project file
that contains all of your coding, the codes, all memos,comments, networks and links. Therefore, a project bundle file serves
as external backup of your project independent of the ATLAS.ti installation on your computer.
In addition, project bundle files are used to transfer projects between computers. They can be read by both ATLAS.ti 8.1 and
higher for Mac and Windows.

Please export your projects on a regular basis and store the bundle files in a safe location. In case something happens to
your computer, you still have a copy of your project to fall back on!
Figure 58: Project export
Click on the P ROJECT BUNDLE button. This opens the Windows File Manager. Select a location for storing the project bundle
file. The default name for the bundle will be the project name plus the name of the currently logged in user and the date:
"project name (user name YYYY-MM-DD).
The default name of the bundle is the project name. You can rename the bundle file at this stage. However, please note
– renaming the bundle does not automatically change the name of your project. Think of the project bundle file like a box
that contains your project. Putting a different label on the outside of the box does not change anything that is inside,
which is your project with all your coded segments, comments, memos, networks, etc. and all of the documents that
have been added to it.
The project bundle file can be used as project backup and to transfer your project to a different computer. It can be read by
both ATLAS.ti 8 Windows and ATLAS.ti Mac.
Please note: ATLAS.ti 8 and ATLAS.ti for Mac projects cannot be used in ATLAS.ti 7.
Video Tutorials:
• ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - Exporting the Project
• ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - Transfer from ATLAS.ti 7 to ATLAS.ti 8
Creating A Snapshot
You may want to create a snapshot:
• to preserve certain stages of your project to review them later.
• as backup of your project file.
• as fall-back version before a merge, in case something turns out differently than you expected and you have already
saved the merged project.
• as a copy of your project that you want to use as template for another project.
When creating a snapshot, ATLAS.ti automatically adds the following to the project name: (Snapshot YYYY-MM-DD
hh:min:sec). You can, however, also enter any other name.
To create a snapshot, select FILE / S NAPSHOT.
Figure 59: Default name for a project snapshot

Accept the default name or enter another unique name, and click CREATE SNAPSHOT.
Just like ATLAS.ti project files, snapshots are saved internally in the ATLAS.ti environment. A snapshot has the same ID as
the project from which it is created.
Pin To Favorites
We recommend that you pin all projects on which you are currently working to the Favorites list:
Right-click on a project in the opening screen and select PIN TO FAVORITES (see Figure 67).
Or move with the mouse over a project name in the side panel on the left and click on the pin icon (see Figure 65).
Figure 60: Pin project to

favorite list
Hide/ Show Projects
If you accumulate many projects over time and if it becomes difficult to find the projects you are currently working on, you
can hide all projects that you do not need at the moment.
Right-click on a project in the opening screen and select H IDE PROJECT .
Figure 61: Hiding projects
All hidden projects display an icon on the top left of the project button.
If at some point you want to see all projects again, activate the option SHOW ALL PROJECTS that you find above your list of
projects
In this view you can change the project status "hidden" back to "show":
Figure 62: Show all projects
option
Figure 63: Make hidden projects visible again
Deleting A Project
You can delete projects from the opening screen, either when you start ATLAS.ti or when closing all projects.
To delete a project, select it in the opening screen, right click and select the option D ELETE PROJECT .
You will be asked to confirm the deletion as this is a permanent action that cannot be undone.
User Accounts
ATLAS.ti automatically creates a user account based on the name that you use on your computer.
If you want to check under which name you are working, select the TOOLS & SUPPORT tab.

To create a new user account, select M ANAGE U SERS. Next, click on the button NEW U SER at the left-hand side in the
ribbon.
After creating a new account, select S WITCH U SER to log in using a different user name.
Figure 64: User Management tab in ATLAS.ti 8 Windows
A reason for creating a new user account is for instance if two persons on a team have the same name. When merging
projects that come from different computers and that use the same user name, the user name will be duplicated (e.g. Tom
and Tom (2). This means you can still distinguish the two users. However, it may be a bit cumbersome to always remember
who is who.
Where Does ATLAS.ti Store Project Data?

ATLAS.ti projects and all documents that you add to a project are stored in the application folder on your computer. The
Windows application folder is called: AppData and can be found under your user account's home folder. Within the sub folder
Roaming, you find folders from a number of different applications, also for ATLAS.ti. The AppData\Roaming folder is a
hidden folder and can either be accessed by entering the full path name or by typing %appdata% into the Windows 10 search
field. If the user name is "Mary." the full path would be: c:\Users\Mary\Appdata\Roaming\Scientific
Software\ATLASti.8
This default location for storing ATLAS.ti data can be changed. See below.
The ATLAS.ti library is a system folder and not meant for user access. Files in this folder cannot be used outside
ATLAS.ti.
Working With ATLAS.ti Libraries

As explained above, the default location for ATLAS.ti project files is on the C drive. As it is not possible for all users to work
on the C drive, either because there are institutional restrictions, tor the C drive is already full and there is not sufficient
space, there is the possibility to create a user-defined location where all of your ATLAS.ti data is stored.
For all users familiar with ATLAS.ti 7: This is NOT the same as in version 7 where you could create project-specific
libraries that could be shared.
In ATLAS.ti 8, each user works within her or his own ATLAS.ti environment. Users can define where this ATLAS.ti
environment is located (version 8.1 and higher). This location can be within another folder on the C: drive, any other drive on
your computer, a server, or an external drive.
It is not possible, however, to use a cloud sharing service like Dropbox because the specific way in which such systems
work can jeopardize the integrity of your ATLAS.ti library.
It is possible to work with multiple libraries. Theoretically, you could create a new empty library every time you start a new
project. This, however, requires careful data management on your part as you need to keep track on your own where all of
these different libraries are located.

WHERE DOES ATLAS.TI STORE PROJECT DATA? 55
We strongly recommend that you create project backups on a regular basis by exporting your projects (see "Creating
Project Backups").
When you start ATLAS.ti, select OPTIONS at the bottom left of your screen. If a project is already open, you need to close it.
You cannot change the location of the library, if a project is currently open.
Figure 65: Start the Switch Library process
The last option under Application Preferences lets you change the library location or select a different library (S WITCH
L IBRARY).
A wizard opens that guides you through the process. The next choice you need to make is whether you want to open an
existing library, move the library to a different location, or create a new empty library.
Figure 66: Different options for library switching
Open an existing library: Chose this option if you work with multiple libraries and you want to gain access to an already
existing library at a different location.
Moving the library to a different location

Move the library to a different location: Chose this option if you want or need to move your current library to a different
location, e.g. because you do no longer want to work on the C drive. It is possible to keep a copy of the library at the old
location.
Note that the ATLAS.ti 8 library contains all of your documents plus your "project file." This is different from version 7,
where only the project documents were stored in the library and the user saved the project file (HU) independently of it.
In version 8, ATLAS.ti handles and manages ALL of your project-related data in the library.

WHERE DOES ATLAS.TI STORE PROJECT DATA? 56
Creating a new library

Create a new empty library: This option allows you to create a new library at a location of your choice. If you already have
projects, none of these will be moved over into the new library. To fill this library, you either create new projects from scratch,
or you import project bundle files that you previously exported from other libraries.
After you made your choice, click NEXT .
If you selected to open an existing library, select the location for this library:
Figure 67: Select the location of the existing library
If you selected to move the library, select the location where you want this library to be. You can keep a copy of the actual
state of the library at the current location. Just keep in mind that this copy is not updated if you continue your work using
the library at the new location.
Figure 68: Select where you want this library to be stored
If you selected to create a new empty library, select where this new library shall be created. After confirming the new
location, your opening screen will be empty and you can begin to fill it with new projects.
Figure 69: Select a location where you want your new library to be stored
A note from the HelpDesk: We know that your project data is very valuable to you and that you do not want to lose it.
Therefore, please select a sensible location for the ATLAS.ti library. For instance: Do not store it on the desktop. You
probably have a folder within your document system for the project you are currently working on where you store all
project related data. If you cannot or do not want to use the ATLAS.ti default location, we recommend that you create a
sub-folder for your ATLAS.ti related work within your project folder, and within this sub-folder, a dedicated folder for
your library. Make sure that your project folder is included in any automated back-up routine of your computer!
Working With Groups
Overview
Often data come from different sources, locations, respondents with various demographic backgrounds etc. To facilitate the
handling of the different types of data, they can be organized into document groups. Document groups allow quick access to
subsets of your data. They can be used for analytic comparisons in later stages of the analysis, or for administrative purposes
in team projects by for instance creating a group that contains all documents for coder 1, another group that contains the
documents for coder 2 and so on.

WORKING WITH GROUPS 57
Depending on your data, you may want to include a comparison of different groups based on categories such as gender,
profession, age, income, location, as well as data types and sources. In ATLAS.ti a single document can be a member of
multiple groups. For instance: "Gender:: female" / "Profession:: teacher" / "Age group:: 31 - 40," and so on. When querying
data, you can combine the various groups as needed.
Groups can be created in two ways – you can create them in the side panel of the Document Manager, or in the Document
Group Manager. Both options are explained below.
Video Tutorial: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows-Grouping the Project Documents
The side panels in document, quotation, code and memo managers allow much more immediate access to fundamental
activities like selecting codes, groups, creating groups and smart groups, and setting local and global filters (8.1 and higher).
This allows a much more effective integration into the work flow and saves a lot of mouse movements and clicks. It is also
possible to run simple AND and OR queries.
You can activate or deactivate the side panel by selecting the VIEW TAB in a Manager. Click on the first button for groups to
activate or deactivate the side panel.
As the mouse-clicks are the same for all actions related to the various types of groups (documents, codes, memos and
networks), the description below applies to all groups.
Creating Groups In A Manager

Open the Document Manager with a click on the D OCUMENTS button in the H OME tab.
Select several documents and drag-and-drop them into the side panel on the left. Use the common Windows selection
technique (hold down the Ctrl- or Shift key).
Figure 70: Creating document groups in the Document Manager
Enter a name for the group and click CREATE .

The document groups can be used to easily access sub sets of your data. If you click on a group, only the entities that are
contained in the selected group are shown in the list on the right.
Figure 71: Filtering by document group
Once a group has been set as filter, a yellow bar appears above the entity list, here: the documents. To reset the filter to see
all entities again, click the X on the top right-hand side of the yellow bar.

You can also select a number of entities in a Manager, right-click and select the option NEW GROUP from the context menu.
Figure 72: Creating groups using the context menu option
Creating Groups In The Project Explorer

Select a number of entities in a branch of the Project Explorer, right-click and select the option NEW GROUP from the
context menu.
Creating Groups In A Group Manager

To open A Group Manager, select the H OME tab. Click on the drop-down for documents, codes, memos or networks and
select respective G ROUP M ANAGER .
In the Group Manager, select the button New Group and enter a name.
Next select on ore more items (here: documents) on the right-hand side in the pane: 'Documents / Codes / Memos /
Networks not in group' and move them to the left-hand side 'Documents / Codes / Memos / Networks in group' by
clicking on the button with the left arrow (<). You can also double-click each item that you want to move.

Figure 73: Adding members to a document group
Creating Groups in Networks

See “Creating Groups in Networks“.
Creating Document Groups in the Query Tool

You can create groups based on queries – thus based on information that you first need to code. How this works is
explainedin the section “Creating Document Groups From Results “
Removing Group Members

Removing members works the opposite way as shown above:
Select a group. In the pane 'Documents / Codes / Memos / Networks in group' select those items that you want to
remove from the group and click on the button with the right arrow (>), or double-click on each item to remove it.
Removing Items From A Group In A Manager.

Select the group where the item should be removed from in the side panel.
Righ-click on one or more items that you want to remove and select REMOVE FROM G ROUP in the context menu.

Figure 74: Remove an item from a group in a manager
Removing Items From A Group Using The Side Panel

If you want to remove items using the side panel context menu, proceed as follows:
Select a group in the side panel.
Select the items that you want to remove from this group in the list of items on the right. Use the Ctrl- or Shift-key to
select multiple items (see Figure 73).
Right-click on the group in the side-panel and select the option R EMOVE DOCUMENTS / CODE / M EMO / NETWORK ( S) FROM
GROUP .
Figure 75: Removing items from a group using the side panels
Deleting A Group
Select a group in the group manager and click on the Delete button in the ribbon. In the side panel of manager, right-click
and select the Delete Group(s) option.
Deleting Multiple Groups

Deleting multiple groups needs to be done in the side panel of a manager. Select multiple groups by holding down either the
SHIFT or the Ctrl-key, right-click and select the Delete Group(s) option.

Renaming A Group
Select an entry in the side panel or the group manager, right-click and select the Rename option. Or select the Rename
button in the ribbon.
Association Between List Items And Groups

If you select an item that is part of a group, the group name is highlighted. Figure 71 For example, we can see for example see
that the document 'case 4' is a survey respondent. The respondent has a high-school education, has children, is male, and so
on.
Figure 76: Association between list items and side panel
Setting A Local Filter

Click on a group in the side panel, to activate a local filter.
The list to the right only shows the items of the selected group. A yellow bar appears on the top of the list, displaying the
name of the selected group that is set as filter.
Figure 77: Activating a local filter
To reset the filter, click on the X on the right-hand side of the yellow bar.
Filtering The List Based On Multiple Groups

You can make a selection combining the members of multiple groups via AND or OR.

Figure 78: Combining two document groups (all criteria must apply)
To change the operator, you can either open the drop down menu as shown in Figure 70, or right click inside the side panel
and select the option CHANGE OPERATOR from the context menu.
If you select multiple groups in the side panel and ANY is selected, any item of all selected groups are shown (think 'plus').
If ALL is selected, only the common items of the selected groups are shown (all criteria must apply).
Importing and Exporting Document Groups

You can export and import document groups based to and from Excel. Exporting the data gives you an overview of all your
document groups and their members. It can also be used as a starting point to prepare an Excel file for import.
The Excel table below shows a result of exporting already existing document groups.
Figure 79: Exported document groups in Excel
Content Of A Document Group Table

First column: document name. If you want to prepare a table for import, the easiest way is to export a table first. If you have
not created document groups yet, the table will only show the first column with the document names.
Second and subsequent columns: document attribues
Prefix #: attributes with two or more values
• document groups are created based on the header name plus the cell value as in eductation::highschool, or
gender::male.
• if there is no entry in a cell, the document is not assigned to the group.
• If there are multiple entries, separated by a comma, the document is assigned to two groups of the same
attribute.

No prefix: a document group is created for all documents with a cell value of 1. See 'survey question: bring fulfillment &
purpose' as an example.
After importing this table, the groups and assignments to document groups are as follows:
Figure 80: Document Manager after importing document groups from Excel
Expo rti ng Do cument Gro ups To E xcel

Select the Import & Export tab and from there the button for exporting DOCUMENT GROUPS.
Figure 81: Options for importing and exporting document groups
Impo rti ng Do cument Gro ups Fro m Excel

In order to generate the first column with the document names, the recommendation is to export a Document Group table
first, even if it does not yet contain documents. If it contains documents, you can leave them in the table. ATLAS.ti will
recognize existing groups.
After exporting the table, add document attributes in the required format. See “Content Of A Document Group Table“ and
Figure 79.
Save the Excel file and close it.
Go to ATLAS.ti, select Import & Export and the DOCUMENT GROUPS import option.
Team Work
In the following we describe how you set up a team project when using ATLAS.ti 8 Windows exclusively. On our website, you
find a document that only describes team work. It includes everything that is important to know in relation to teamwork.

TEAM WORK 64
If your team uses the Mac version, or you work in a mixed Windows-Mac team, please check our website for the
instructions that fit your situation.
Each team member needs to works on his or her copy of the project. The location where the project data for each user is
stored can be selected. However, this is always a personal, not a shared space (see “Where Does ATLAS.ti Store Project
Data?“.
The kind of team work supported is shared coding and analyzing. This means if you have a lot of data you can spread the
coding work across different team members. Each team member codes parts of the data and the work of all coders is put
together via merging the various sub projects.
When you first opened ATLAS.ti, you were asked to add a user name. This name will be used to "stamp" all project
entries. If you want to check your user name or want to change it, see “User Accounts“.
Overview Of Main Steps
1. The project administrator sets up the projects. Let's call the project administrator "Mary," and the project "Master Project."
2. Mary adds documents to the project and possibly a list of codes.
PLEASE NOTE: When you work in a team with shared document and codes, you need to start with a MASTER project
that contains all documents and codes that you want to share with the team. If all team members start independently,
you end up with duplicate documents and codes after merging the projects.
Figure 82: Steps 1 and 2: Creating and distributing the Master project
3. She saves the project and exports it. This means creating a project bundle file (see Figure 82).
4. All team members import the project bundle file and begin their work.
5. To combine the work of all team members, each team member creates a project bundle file and sends it to Mary.
6. Mary merges all sub projects and creates a new Master file.
7. Mary exports the new Master file and distributes it to all team members (see Figure 83).
8. The team members continue their work.

TEAM WORK 65
Figure 83: Steps 3 and 4: Combining the work of all team members and distributing it again
This cycle continues. If new documents need to be added to the project, this needs to be done by Mary. A good time for doing
this is after merging and before creating the new Master file.
Important To Know
• If all team members should work on the same documents, it is essential that only one person (the project administrator)
is setting up the project adding all documents. Otherwise the documents are duplicated or multiplied during the process
of merging. See “Adding Documents“.
• The location of where ATLAS.ti stores project related data can be determined by each user. See "Working With ATLAS.ti
Libraries."
• Document libraries CANNOT be shared. Each person always works with her/his own copy of the data set within
her/his own environment of ATLAS.ti.
Our support team will reject any repair requests that are caused by attempts to share libraries.
The kind of team work supported is shared coding and analyzing. This means if you have a lot of data you can spread the
coding work across different team members. Each team member codes parts of the data and the work of all coders is put
together via merging the various sub-projects.
Each team member works within her or his own library folder. Each team member can set the library independently of
any other team member. The library location is not set or determined by the project administratior.
Setting Up A Team Project

The instructions are organized by the various tasks involved when working as a team. Below you find operating instructions
for team members as well as for the project administrator.
1. Project Administrator
Crea ti ng A Pro ject

If you open ATLAS.ti, select CREATE NEW PROJECT from the start window.
If a project is already open, select FILE and then P ROJECT / NEW. Next, click on the option: CREATE NEW P ROJECT. Enter a project
name and click CREATE.

SETTING UP A TEAM PROJECT 66
Addi ng Do cuments
The standard procedure is that documents are imported. This means a copy of the document is created, converted into an
ATLAS.ti compatible format and stored in an internal library
For audio and video files you have the option to link them to your project. This avoids file duplication and saves hard disk
space, as especially video files can be quite sizable. When you link a file to a project, it is not copied and imported into the
project. It remains at its source location and ATLAS.ti opens it from there when needed.
This means that the file should remain at this location. You should not rename or move it to a different folder. If this
happens, the file can no longer be displayed in the project and you need to redirect ATLAS.ti to its new location. You will be
prompted to do so if this happens.
Figure 84: Adding documents To add documents, click on the ADD DOCUMENTS button in the H OME tab, or click on the dialog box launcher (drop-down
arrow).
If you click on "Add Documents" you can select individual files. If you want to add entire folders, click on the dialog box
launcher. All documents that you add to a project are copied and become internal ATLAS.ti files.
If you want to analyze larger-size audio or video files, us the ADD LINKED VIDEO /AUDIO option.
Linked files are currently automatically added to the project bundle file when exporting a project. This could mean that
your exported projects are quite sizable. With future updates you will have the option to exclude video files when
creating a project bundle file.
Addi ng Do cument Gro ups

You may also want to consider to group documents at this stage. The groups might reflect sample characteristics like
demographic variables, locations, or time of data collection. They can also be used to support team work. In the latter case,
you may want to create a document group for each team member and assign the documents they are supposed to code.
To add document groups, open the Document Manager with a click on the DOCUMENTS button, or via the main document
menu.
Figure 85: Example for the use of document groups in team projects
Select the items you want to group by holding down the Ctrl or Shift key. Drag and drop the selected items into the side
panel to the left, or right-click and select NEW G ROUP. See “Creating Groups In A Manager“.
Addi ng Co des And Co de Gro ups

If a common set of codes and code groups is to be used, they also must be added to the project at this stage. If each team
member were to add codes and code groups individually to each sub-project, all codes and groups would be multiplied during
the merge process because they would have different IDs . See "Merging Projects“,
IMPORTING A L IST OF CODES

You can prepare a list of codes including code descriptions, code groups and colors in Excel and import the Excel file. This is
how you need to prepare the Excel file:
You can enter headings like Code, Code Definition, Code Group 1, Code Group 2, but you do not have to. If you do not enter
headings, the columns are interpreted in the following order:
• column 1: code name
• column 2: code description (comment)
• column 3: code group
• all subsequent columns: further code groups
See also “Importing A List Of Codes.“

Figure 86: This is how you should prepare your code list in Excel
If you color the code names, this color is used in ATLAS.ti as code color.
To import the Excel file, select the IMPORT & EXPORT tab and next the Import Codes button (the one with the down arrow).
A DDING C ODES MANUALLY

To add codes, click on the NEW ENTITIES button in the H OME tab and select NEW CODES from the drop-down menu.
To add code definitions or coding rules, open the Code Manager with a click on the Codes button in the Home tab.
Figure 87: Add new

codes
Figure 88: Adding code descriptions or coding rules
Select a code and write a description or coding rule in the comment field below.
See also “Coding Data“,
C REATING CODE G ROUPS MANUALLY

To add groups, open the Code Manager with a click on the CODES button in the H OME tab.
Select the items you want to group by holding down the Shift or Ctrl-key. Drag and drop the selected items into the side
panel to the left.
Enter a name for the group.

Figure 89: Creating a group in a manager
Sa vi ng The Pro ject

To save a project, click on the Save icon in the Quick Access tool bar (see left), or select FILE / SAVE . The project is saved as
internal ATLAS.ti file in the application folder on your computer. See "Where Does ATLAS.ti Store Project Data?."
It is possible to change the default location where ATLAS.ti stores project data. For more information see "Working With
Figure 90: Quick Access ATLAS.ti Libraries."
toolbar
Expo rti ng The Pro ject Fo r Di s tri b uti o n
Figure 91: Creating and distributing the Master project
To export the project for distribution to all team member, select FILE / EXPORT .
Figure 92: Exporting a project
Click on the P ROJECT BUNDLE button. This opens the Windows File Manager. Select a location for storing the project bundle.
The default project bundle name consists of the project name plus the author and date in parentheses behind it, e.g.,
"Project X (Mary 2017-09-27)."
Distribute the project bundle file to all team members, e.g. via email, a folder on a server that everyone can access, or also
via a cloud link or cloud folder.
The project bundle file has the file extension ".atlproj" and can be read by both ATLAS.ti 8.1 and higher for Windows and Mac.
Project bundle files can be shared via a cloud services like Dropbox, OneDrive, GoogleDrive, etc. - Another option is to
upload the project bundle file to a server of your choice and send a link to all team members so that they can download
the file.

The default name of the bundle is the project name + author and date. Renaming the bundle does not change the name
of the project contained within the bundle. Think of the project bundle file as a box that contains your ATLAS.ti project
plus all documents that you want to analyze. Putting a different label on the outside of the box will not change the
name of the project file, which is contained inside the box.
2. All Team Members

It is recommend that all team members save a copy of the project bundle file on their computer, or their personal space on a
server.
Impo rti ng The Ma s ter Pro ject And Rena mi ng It

Open ATLAS.ti and select the IMPORT PROJECT button. If another project is currently open, select FILE / NEW and then the
Import Project Bundle option.
During the process of importing the project, he name of the project can be changed:
Figure 93: Renaming a project file during the process of importing a

project bundle
Rename the project by adding your name or initials to the project name. This is important for the project administrator
later when he or she merges the projects of all team members (see Figure 84).
Click IMPORT.
RENAMING P ROJECTS ON THE OPENING S CREEN

If you want to rename a project after it is imported, you can either do it on the opening screen when starting ATLAS.ti. If the
project is already open, you need to close it to return to the opening screen.
On the opening screen, right click on the project that you want to rename and select R ENAME P ROJECT.

Figure 94: Renaming a project on the opening screen
Expo rti ng Sub -Pro jects Fo r The Pro ject Admi ni s tra to r
After an agreed period of time, i. e., when everyone has done some work on the project, team members create their own
project bundle file and send it to the project administrator.
To export the project, select FILE / EXPORT. See "Exporting The Project For Distribution." The name of the exported bundle
file will include the name of the currently logged in user and the date, e.g. Project X_coder 2 (Tom 2017-09-30).
3. Project Administrator
Mergi ng Pro jects

The Merge Tool reunites projects that were originally divided for analytical or economical reasons. It brings together the
contributions of different members of a research team. Please read the section on "What You Need To Know When Merging
Projects" before following the step-by-step instructions below.
Figure 95: Steps 3 and 4: Combining the work of all team members and distributing it again
Before you merge, the recommendation is that you import all project bundle files first and take a look at the projects. If a
conflict arises during the process of merging, you need to decide whether to keep all changes in the Master project or
whether to override them. If you do not know what is contained in the projects to be imported, you cannot make an informed
decision. Principally, it is possible to merge project bundle files without importing them prior to merging.
To begin the merge process, open the Master project.
Select FILE / M ERGE .
You have the option to select either a project or a project bundle file. If you have previously imported the bundle files of all
team members, select MERGE P ROJECT, otherwise M ERGE P ROJECT BUNDLE.
Select a project from the list offered by ATLAS.ti, or load a project bundle file.
If you have a long list of projects, just enter the first few letters of the project name into the Search field.
In both cases, you have the option to create a snapshot of the current project before merging. There may be times, when you
want or need to go back to an older version of your project. The default name for snapshot project is: project name
(Snapshot–date-time).

Figure 96: Select either a project file or a project bundle to merge
After selecting a project or project bundle, click on the M ERGE button.

ATLAS.ti checks the two projects for identical and different items. All identical items will be merged, all different items will
be added. See "Merge Strategy" on page 73 for further detail. After this process is completed, you see a Pre-Merge Summary:
Figure 97: Check the pre-merge summary for conflicts
If there are no conflicts, you can proceed with merging the two projects by clicking MERGE .
If there are conflicts between the Master project and the project that you import, you can solve the conflict in two ways (see
"Examples" on page 73).
Keep means, the Master project "wins" and the changes made in the project that you import will be ignored.
Override means, that all changes made in the project to be imported "win" and the entries in the Master project are
overridden.
You currently cannot chose for each conflict how to solve it. All conflicts need to be solved by either selecting the
strategy 'keep' or the strategy 'override'.
After merging, check the final merge report and the merged project for plausibility. If you are satisfied with the results,
save the project. If not, you can always select U NDO.
If applicable, continue with merging the next sub-project or project bundle file.
If all team members have been coding different documents, merge conflicts are unlikely to occur. A conflict could arise,
for instance, if someone has modified a document or code group, or modified a comment. As project administrator, you
will have to decide whether to accept this change or not.

Ho us ekeepi ng
After merging all projects, the project administrator may need to perform some housekeeping work, such cleaning up the
code list, adding or modifying code groups, adding a memo with information for the team, or adding new documents and
document groups.
MERGING DUPLICATE C ODES

You need to do some housekeeping if you find duplicate codes in the merged project. This can happen, for instance, if team
members independently have added codes that have the same name. As these codes have been created in different projects,
they have different IDs and therefore they are added, not merged. The naming convention for duplicate codes is as follows:
• code A
• code A (2)
Duplicate codes can be merged as follows:
Open the Code Manager. Highlight the codes that you want to merge, right click and select the MERGE CODES option from
the context menu, or click on the "Merge Codes" button in the ribbon.
Dis tri b uti ng The N ew M as ter Fi l e To Tea m Memb ers

After all house keeping work is done, save the Master project and export it for distribution to team members (FILE / EXPORT).
As before, the name of the project administrator and the current date is added to the bundle file. See "Exporting The Project
For Distribution" on page 68.
4. All Team Members
Impo rti ng The Upda ted M as ter Pro ject

Team members import the updated Master project and as before rename the project file adding their name or initials.
As this is the second time round, the project name with the added coder name or initials already exists. ATLAS.ti will
recognize this and will offer the following two choices:
• Keep current project as a snapshot
• Overwrite existing project
Figure 98: Importing project bundle and renaming project file when the
name already exist
As you previously exported your project to send it to the project administrator, you already have a backup of your project.
Therefore it will be OK in most cases to overwrite the existing project.
Make the appropriate choice and click IMPORT .
Continue the cycle of project exchange and merging between project administrator and team members as needed.

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW WHEN MERGING PROJECTS 73
What You Need To Know When Merging Projects

The Master project is the project into which another project, called the "Import project" is merged. The Master project has to
be loaded first before invoking the Merge Project option.
Merge Strategy
The default option is to unify all objects that are identical and to add all objects that do not yet exist in the Master project.
Identi ca l E nti ti es E xpla i ned

When an entity is created in ATLAS.ti—regardless if it is a document, a code, a quotation, a memo, a network,a group or a
comment--this entity receives a unique ID, comparable to a fingerprint. When merging projects, ATLAS.ti compares the IDs
of the various entities. If they have the same ID, they are unified. If the ID is not the same, they are added. Thus, the name of
an entity is not the decisive factor. If Tom has created a code with the name "sunshine" and Anne also has created a code
with the same name in her project, these two codes are not identical as they have different IDs. If you merge Tom"s and
Anne"s project, the merged project will contain two codes: sunshine and sunshine (2). If the meaning of both codes is the
same and you want to keep one sunshine code only, you can merge the two codes manually (see "Merging Duplicate Codes ").
Identical entities are unified, all others are added.
Exa mpl es
Groups are additive: Group B with documents {1, 2, 3} in the Master project merged with Group B' with documents {3, 4} in
the Import project will result in Group B= {1, 2, 3, 4}) in the merged project.
Figure 99: Merge example 1: Added elements to groups
Entities with and without comments: If there is a code C in the Master project that has no comment, and a code C in the
Import project that has a comment, the merged procedure will add this comment to the merged project.
Figure 100: Merge example 2: Entities with comments, no conflict
In the case of an unsolvable conflict—code C in the Master project has a comment, and code C in the Import project also has a
comment—the user can define which of the two conflicting entities will win. If the comment of the Master project should be

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW WHEN MERGING PROJECTS 74
kept, you need to select the option "Keep." If the comment of the Import project should be kept, you need to select the
option "Override," as shown in Figure 99.
Figure 101: Merge example 3: Entities with conflicting comments
The decision which changes to keep can currently be taken only for all entities.
Figure 102: Example 4: Merging always adds entities, never subtracts
How deleted entities are handled: It is not possible to "subtract" entities. If one team member has deleted a code or some
codings, and these entities still exist in another project, the merged project will contain those codes or codings again.
If you want to clean up a project, this is best done in a "fresh" Master project after merging and before distributing the
new Master file to all team members.
Exploring Data
Creating Word Clouds And Word Lists
In the following the focus is on exploring document content using the word cloud and word list tools. However, these
tools can also be applied to quotations and codes. See "Exploring Coded Data."

EXPLORING DATA 75
A quick way to get a feeling for the content of a text document is by creating a word cloud or list.
Figure 103: Creating a word cloud or word list from

documents
To create a word cloud or list for documents, select one or more documents e.g. in the Project Explorer or Document
Manager,right-click and select the option W ORD CLOUD or WORD L IST. Another option is to load the document and select
the WORD CLOUD OR WORD L IST button in the ribbon.
Figure 104: Creating a word cloud or list from the Document Manager
The word cloud or list opens in the main editor and shows the scope in the side panel:

EXPLORING DATA 76
Figure 105: Word cloud
Setti ng The Sco pe

If you created a word cloud for a document, the scope will list the documents and the selected document(s) will be checked.
You can check more documents or change the scope to document groups, codes or code groups:
Figure 106: Changing the scope for word clouds or word lists
Wo rl d Cl o ud Ri b bo n
The Word Cloud ribbon provides several options:
Figure 107: The word cloud ribbon
Show Scope: You can activate or deactive the side panel that allows you to select the scope.
Spiral: Display of the words in a spiral as shown in Figure 103.
Typewriter: Display of words from left to right. You can select whether to list the words in alphabetic order, by frequency of
occurrence of by word length in either ascending or descending order.
Sorting: The word cloud can be sorted in alphabetical order, by frequency or word length.
Threshold: My moving the slider from left to right, you can determine that for instance only words with a frequency of at
least 10 should be displayed. The number of the left-hand side shows the lowest, the number on the right-hand side the
highest occurring frequency.

EXPLORING DATA 77
Exclude: You can exclude single character words, numbers, hyphens and underscores. These options are activated by default.
Stop / Go Lists: To exlude particular words, you can select stop lists. If only certain words should be displayed, you can
create a Go List. See Stop And Go Lists,
Export: You can save a word cloud as graphic file (.jpg).
Stemming is the process of reducing inflected (or sometimes derived) words to their word stem, base or root form—
generally a written word form. The stem need not be identical to the morphological root of the word; it is usually
sufficient that related words map to the same stem, even if this stem is not in itself a valid root. (Source)
Filter Tab: In this section you can enter special characters that you do not want to be counted and displayed in the word
cloud. Another option is to reduce the words to their stem. For this to work, it is necessary to select a language. Currently,
German, English and Italian are supported.
Figure 108: Word cloud filter tab
Sto p And Go Lis ts

Stop words are words which are filtered out when processing natural language data (text). You can find commonly used stop
lists for various languages here: https://www.ranks.nl/stopwords. ATLAS.ti includes the stop word list for English, German,
French, Portugese, Spanish and Chinese.
In contrast, if you set a word list as Go List, then only the words that are included in the list are counted.
In addition to importing already existing lists, you can also create and build your own stop and go word lists.
C REATING WORD LISTS

Click on the EDIT button next to the 'Exclude' or 'Only' field.
Click on the button NEW WORD L IST.
Enter a name for the list and select as list type: Stop or Go List. You can always change it later. In the comment field, you
Figure 109: Selecting stop or go lists can write a description for the list. Click on the button CREATE .
Figure 110: Creating a new stop list
To add words to the newly created list, click on the New Word button a few times. Every time you click a new field is
added where you can enter a word.
Enter words or expressions that you do not want to be included in the word cloud. If you enter a regular expression, you
need to tick the Regex box. Optionally you can write a comment that explains the regular expression.

EXPLORING DATA 78
IMPORTING A ND E XPORTING EXISTING W ORD LIST

Importing a user defined list is currently not directly supported. A work around is to export an existing list and to open it in
Excel. In Excel, change the name of the list, leave all the header information and replace the words. Save the list under a new
name and import it.
Exporting a word list also allows you to share it with other users, or you can import it into another of your own projects.
Other options are to duplicate and delete word lists.

You can also turn a stop list into a go list by changing the Word List Type:
Figure 111: Changing word list type
W ORD CLOUD / W ORD LIST OPTIONS

You can remove words from the currrent view, or exclude them permanently by adding them to a stop list. In order to do the
latter, you first need to select a stop list:
Select a stop word list in the ribbon (Figure 110).
Right-click on a word in either the cloud or the word list and select ADD TO STOP LIST .
Figure 112: Context menu for word clouds and word lists
The COPY TO CLIPBOARD option is useful, if you want to run the auto coding tool based on some words in the word cloud. See
"Auto Coding."
Search in Context opens the Project Search and shows the selected word in its context:
Figure 113: Word in context display
Video Tutorial: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows-Word Clouds

EXPLORING DATA 79
Wo rd Li s ts
This feature offers word "crunching" capabilities for a simple quantitative content analysis. It creates a list of word frequency
counts for the selected or all or selected textual documents, codes or quotations. A stop and go word list and a list of
'ignorable' characters can be used to control the analysis.
To create a word list for one or more entities:
Select one or more documents / codes / quotations in the Project Explorer or the managers and click the WORD LIST button
in the ribbon, or select the option from the context menu.
Figure 114: Word List example based on two selected codes
As in word clouds, you can set the scope on the left-hand side of the window. The context menu for word lists is the same as
for word clouds (see Figure 112).
You can sort the table by any of the column headers by double-clicking on it. The above table is sorted by word frequency
count.
W ORD LIST R IBBON

Show Scope: You can activate or deactive the side panel that allows you to select the scope.
Show Details: Display of the word counts of each document if you have selected multiple documents.
Show Percent: Display the relative frequency of each word (word count relative to the total number of words in the
document / all selected documents)
Threshold: My moving the slider from left to right, you can determine that for instance only words with a frequency of at
least 10 should be displayed. The number of the left-hand side shows the lowest, the number on the right-hand side the
highest occurring frequency.
Exclude: You can exclude single character words, numbers, hyphens and underscores. These options are activated by default.
Stop / Go Lists: To exlude particular words, you can select stop lists. If only certain words should be displayed, you can
create a Go List. See Stop And Go Lists,
Excel: You can export the results of the word list as Excel table.
There are limits in terms of how much data can be meaningfully processed, or moreover handled by and displayed in
Excel. Assuming there are 2000 unique words in a document and you process 100 documents, this results in an Excel
table consisting of 200.000 cells.
Filter Tab: In this section you can enter special characters that you do not want to be counted, or reduce the words to their
stem. Another option is to educe the words to their stem. For this to work, it is necessary to select a language. Currently,
German, English and Italian are supported. See Figure 108.

EXPLORING DATA 80
Type-Token Ratio
The type-toke ration (TTR) is the relationship between the number of words that occurr in a text and their frequencies. The
number of words in a text is often referred to as the number of tokens. Several of these tokens are repeated. As we can for
instance see in Figure 114, the word kids occurs 19 times.
The type-token ratio can vary between 0 and 1. The more types there are in comparison to the number of tokens (the higher
the value), the more varied is the vocabulary. This means there is greater lexical variety in the text.
The type-token ration is calculated as follows:
Type-Token Ratio = (number of types/number of tokens) * 100
In word lists and word clouds, you find the type-token ratio in the blue status bar:
Figure 115: Type-token ratio
Project Search
Use the Project Search tool to search for text and patterns in all elements of your project, not only in the documents that you
added. The search can be restricted to certain fields, like name, author, date, comments, and content. Search terms can
contain regular expressions (GREP). See “Regular Expressions (GREP)“.
The results of the search are listed in an interactive list, where you can click on a specific hit and you will be able to see the
term within its larger context. See Figure 116.
All entities that do not include the search term are grayed out.
If you only want to search for instance the comments for codes, click on Show None and then activate the entity type and
elements you are interested in, e.g. code and comment.
Another option is to only display the first hit per entity in the result window.
Figure 116: Project search: Display hits in context
Ref i ni ng A Sea rch

If you want to refine an existing search, click on the S EARCH tab in the Text Search Result window and enter a modified
search and press Enter, or the Search icon.

EXPLORING DATA 81
Figure 117: Ribbon for text search results
Working With Quotations

The quotation level in ATLAS.ti is a unique feature, which not only facilitates interpretive approaches much better than other
programs, but also adds functionality that is interesting for a broad range of analytical approaches like working with
hyperlinks.
In the majority of cases, creating quotations is part of a higher-level procedure like coding or writing memos. However, you
can also create and work with quotations without having to apply codes.
Before a quotation can be created, an appropriate selection must exist.
Selecting Text Segments

In addition to the usual selection techniques known from text editors and word processors, ATLAS.ti offers an extended
"semi-automatic" double-click selection technique for textual primary documents. Here is how it works:
Double-click selection sequence:
Double-click to select the word (assuming it is not yet selected).
Double-click on the selection to expand it to the sentence embedding the current selection.
Figure 118: Text segmenting Double-click on the selection to expand it to the full paragraph surrounding the selection.
options
Double-click again to select the complete text.
Double-click once more to deselect the selected area.
Creating Free Quotations

Highlight a passage that you find interesting—just like marking something with a highlighter when you read a journal
article.
After highlighting something in the document, several buttons in the ribbon have become active. Select the first option:
CREATE FREE QUOTATION . Or right-click and select this option from the context menu, or use the short-cut Ctrl+H.
If you accidentally select a section for which a quotation already exists, the Create Free Quotation command will be
grayed out in the ribbon, and it is not included in the context menu.
If you open the Quotation Manager, you will now see a first entry. In the Project Explorer in the navigation panel, you can see
the quotation if you open the branch of the document you are currently working on.

WORKING WITH QUOTATIONS 82
Figure 119: Quotation Manager with preview area and comment field
If you click on the quotation in the Quotation Manager, you can preview the content in the Preview area. Next to this area,
you see a comment field. Write some text into the comment field.
Please note on your screen, as soon as you work inside the Quotation Manager, the active tab in the ribbon changes to
Q UOTATIONS . See also "Quotation Manager Ribbon."
Figure 120: Quotation Manager ribbon when selecting a quotation
Quotation ID: Each quotation has an ID which consists of the document number and a number that indicates the
chronological order when a quotation was created, For example, quotation 1:4 in Figure 121 was created after quotation 1:3,
and quotation 1:3 after quotation 1:2 and so on. Further towards the right, you find two columns with the start and stop
position for each quotation indicating the sequential order of the quotation in the document.
If you want to close gaps or reorder all of your quotations in sequential order, click RENUMBER QUOTATIONS .
Figure 121: Commented and renamed quotations
Quotation Name: By default, the quotation name consists of the first 60 characters of textual quotations (document name
for all other document types).
Density: The density is still 0 for all quotations as 'Density” indicates the number of codes linked to a quotation.

Search: When the list of quotation gets longer and longer and you are looking for a particular quotation—a fully coded project
may have hundreds, if not thousands of quotations—you can use the search field on top of the quotation list.
Search & Filter Tab
Figure 122: Search & Filter options in the Quotation Manager
If you want to create a more elaborated search term or want to specify where you want to search (quotation name, content
or comment), you find further options u nder the Search & Filter tab. Here is is possible to use regular expresions in your
search term (Grep), or set it to case-sensitive. Further you can filter by author (created by), or other criteria like “today”, “this
week”, “only mine”, “commented”, or “hyperlinked” quotations.
If a global filter was set, you can remove it; or – if you select one or more codes in the side panel of the Quotation Manager,
you can set these codes as global filter.
View Tab
Several view options are available: If for instance you want to save screen space and you are not yet coding your data, you
can hide the 'Codes' column in the Quotation Manager: Select V IEW and deactivate CODES .
Figure 123: Setting view and filter options in the Quotation

Manager
Video Tutorial: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows-Creating Quotations
Acti va ti ng and Di s pla yi ng Q uo ta ti o ns

Quotations can be activated and displayed in context by double-clicking on an entry in the Quotation Manager, by clicking on
the quotation bar in the margin area, or by double-clicking on the quotation in the sub branch of Documents in the Project
Explorer:
Figure 124: Retrieving a quotation from the Project Explorer
If you select a quotation in the Quotation Manager, you see a preview of the quotation in the panel below the quotation list
as shown in Figure 121. Previews are currently available for text, PDF and image quotations. Audio and video previews will
follow.
Once you have coded data, quotations can also be retrieved via their codes (see “ Retrieving Coded Data“). Quotations can
also be activated when included in networks (see "Working With Networks"), or from the result list of a project search (see
"Project Search").

Figure 125: Modifying the length of a quotation
Mo di f yi ng Quo ta tio n Bo unda ri es

Modifying the length of a quotation is easy. Select the quotation by clicking on the quotation bar or code in the margin area
and move the "handle” in form of a little orange circles to the right, to the left, or up or down, depending on whether you
want to shorten or lengthen the quotation. This applies to all media types.
Rena mi ng Q uo ta ti o ns
You can rename quotations, either by clicking on the R ENAME QUOTATION option in the ribbon of the Quotation Manager, or
by right-clicking and selecting the Rename option from the context menu.
Deleti ng Quo ta ti o ns
To delete a single quotation, right-click on a quotation and select the DELETE option from the context menu.
Figure 126: Deleting a quotation
This option is available in all browsers, windows and lists where you see quotations, i.e. the Project Explorer, the Quotations
Browser, the Quotation Manager, in a network, or the margin area. You can also right-click on a highlighted quotation in
context of the data to delete a quotation, to rename it or to activate other options:
Creating Graphical Quotations

Selecting graphical segments differs from the operations required for selecting segments within textual documents.
However, the overall look and feel is sufficiently similar.
Move the mouse pointer to the upper left corner of the rectangular section that you are going to create.
Drag (holding down the left mouse button) the mouse to the lower right corner of the rectangle. Release the mouse
button. You have now created a selection and the rectangle will be highlighted.

Figure 127: Creating graphical quotations
You can preview graphical quotations in the Quotation Manager; they can be inserted into networks, and they are included as
graphical snippets in reports.
To modify an image quotation, just re-size the rectangle.
Creating PDF Quotations

A text PDF file can contain images as well, like picture, graphs or tables. In ATLAS.ti you can select and code both text and
images within the same document without having to change the coding mode.
Text selection: Select the text just like you do in a Word file. The double-click selection sequence as was explained for text
files ("Selecting Text Segments" ) can only be used for a word (first double-click) and the line (second double-click). In
technical terms, there are no computer-recognizable paragraphs in PDF documents. This also has an effect on the auto
coding function. A match cannot be extended to a paragraph or chapter because of this limitation. See "Auto Coding."
Selecting a graphical element: Like selecting an area in a graphic file, draw a rectangular area with your mouse ("Creating
Graphical Quotations").
PDF files can be text or image files. Sometimes users accidentally add an image PDF and wonder why they cannot select
or retreive text. If this happens, you need to re-create the PDF file, e.g. by letting an OCR scanner running over your PDF
image file. In a lot of PDF creators these days this is an option in the software, no additional physical scan is needed.
Creating Multimedia Quotations

See "Working With Multimedia Data ."
Coding Data
Co di ng Wi th A N ew Co de
Open a document and highlight a selected piece of text, a rectangular area in a graphic document, a section on the audio
wave of a video or audio document, or a location in a geo document.
See "Working With Multimedia Data " and "Working With Geo Docs" for more information on working with these
formats.

CODING DATA 86
Figure 128: Open Coding dialogue
Next, click on the OPEN CODING button in the Document ribbon. Enter a name and click CREATE CODES . It is also possible to
code a selection with multiple codes. You can enter as many codes as apply (see Figure 128).
An alternative is to right-click on the highlighted section and to choose OPEN CODING from the context menu (see Figure 129),
or to use the short-cut Ctrl+J.
Figure 129: Coding with a new code via the context menu
Please note that the name of the ATLAS.ti coding option for creating a new code is unrelated to the open coding process
in Grounded Theory. For a translation of ATLAS.ti functions and features for use in a Grounded Theory approach, see
Friese, Susanne (2016): CAQDAS and Grounded Theory Analysis.
Co de In Vi vo
Use in-vivo coding when the text itself contains a useful and meaningful name for a code.
In-vivo coding creates a quotation from the selected text AND uses the selected text - trimmed to 40 characters - as the
code name. If the selected text's boundaries are not exactly what you want for the quotation, modifying the quotation's
"spread" is often the next step after creating the in-vivo code. See "Modifying The Length of A Coded Segment."
Select a segment in a text document. Click on the button CODE IN VIVO in the ribbons, or right-click and select the Code in
Vivo option from the context menu.
In-Vivo coding can only be applied to textual primary documents.
Dis pl a y Of Co ded Da ta Segments In The Ma rgi n Area

The coded segment is displayed in the margin area. A bar marks the size of the coded segment (= quotation) and the code
name appears next to it. When coding data in this way, a new quotation is created automatically and the code is linked to
this quotation.

CODING DATA 87
Figure 130: Display of codes and quotations in the margin area
Dis pl a y Of Co ded Da ta Segments In The Pro ject Expl o rer

Figure 131 below shows the Project Explorer in the navigation panel. The branches for Documents and Codes are expanded.
Under the main Documents branch, quotations are displayed on the first level and if coded, the codes are displayed
underneath. The number in parentheses behind the quotations 3:1 and 3:2 indicate their start and stop position in the
document by number of characters, e.g. (46:92) or (94:362).
Under the main Codes branch, all codes are listed.
Figure 131: Project Explorer after some codes have been created and
linked
The number behind the codes (1-0) means that the code has been applied 1 time (grounded = 1) and that it has not yet been
linked to other codes (density = 0). The density remains 0 until the researcher manually links codes to other codes, mostly in
later stages of the analysis if relationships between codes become apparent. The density is not a value that is calculated by
the software. It goes up, when the researcher begins to link codes to each other. See "Working With Networks."
Video Tutorial: Coding text documents
Appl yi ng Exi s ti ng Co des

Existing codes can be applied in a number of different ways. As shown in Figure 132 you can either drag & drop a code from
the Project Explorer or the Code Browser onto a highlighted data segment, or from the Code Manager. Both the Code Browser
and the Code Manager allow drag & drop multiple codes. Other options are quick coding or code by list.
D RAG-AND-DROP C ODING
If you want to code from the navigation panel, the recommended option is to use the Code Browser as it has a search field. If
your list of codes gets longer, it is easier to enter the first letters of a code into the search field rather than to scroll the list
up and down.
The advantage of using the Code Manager for drag-and-drop coding is that a) you also see the code comments (=code
definitions), and b) you can quickly access codes using code groups or the search field. When using smaller screens, it is
recommended to dock the Code Manager and to move it into a separate tab group. See "Working With Docked And Floated
Windows" and "Working With Tabs And Tab Groups ."
To use drag-and-drop coding highlight a data segment, select one or more codes in the above mentioned lists or windows
and drag the code onto the highlighted data segment.

CODING DATA 88
Figure 132: Drag & Drop coding to apply existing codes
MORE D RAG-A ND-D ROP OPTIONS

• You can link one or more selected quotations from the list of quotations in the Quotation Manager to a code in the side-
panel in the Quotation Manager.
• You can link one or more selected quotations from the list of quotations in the Quotation Manager to a code in Code
Manager.
• You can link one or more selected quotations from the list of quotations in the Quotation Manager to a code in Code
Manager.
• You can link one or more codes to a quotation in the Quotation Manager.
• You can link one or more codes to a quotation in the Quotation Browser.
• You can link one or more selected quotations from the Quotation Browser to a code in Code Manager.
• You can link one or more selected quotations from the Quotation Browser to a code in side panel of the Quotation
Manager.
C ODE-B Y-LIST
Click the List coding button. A window opens that shows all existing codes. Enter a word or a few letters that occur
somewhere in an already existing code. The list will be shortened and only shows the codes that contain the search term.
Select one or more codes from the list and click the OK button.

CODING DATA 89
Figure 133: List Coding window: enter a search term to quickly find the code
you are looking for
QUICK CODING
Quick Coding assigns the last used code to the current data segment. This is an efficient method for the consecutive coding
of segments using the most recently used code.
Select a data segment.
Right click and select QUICK CODING from the context menu, or use the short-cut: Ctrl+L. Another option is to click on the
Quick Coding button in the toolbar, but this is (admittedly) less quick.
Crea ti ng N ew Co des Wi tho ut Co di ng

You can create codes that have not (yet) been used for coding. Such codes are called "free" codes. This can for example be
useful when ideas for codes come to mind during normal coding work and that cannot be applied to the current segment but
will be useful later. Sometimes you also need free codes for expression conceptual connections in networks. This is how you
do it:
In the Home tab, open the drop down menu for NEW ENTITIES and select the option New Code(s).
Figure 134: Creating new codes
If the Code Manager is open, you can also create new codes there. Click on the Free Code(s) button in the ribbon of the
Code Manager:
Figure 135: Creating a new code in the Code Manager

CODING DATA 90
If you already have a list of codes, possibly including code descriptions and groupings elsewhere, you can use the option;
"Importing A List Of Codes."
Keyb oa rd Sho rtcuts Fo r Co di ng
Coding
Create Free Code Ctrl+K
Open Coding Ctrl+J
Quick Coding Ctrl+L
Importing A List Of Codes

Importing an already existing codebook can be useful for a number of reasons:
• To prepare a stock of predefined codes in the framework of a given theory. This is especially useful in the context of team
work when creating a base project.
• To code in a "top-down" (or deductive) way with all necessary concepts already at hand. This complements the "bottom-
up" (or inductive) open coding stage in which concepts emerge from the data.
You can prepare a codebook including code descriptions, code groups and colors in Excel and import the Excel file. This is how
you need to prepare the Excel file:
You can enter headings like Code, Code Definition, Code Group 1, Code Group 2, but you do not have to. If you do not enter
headings, the columns are interpreted in the following order:
• column 1: code name
• column 2: code description (comment)
• all subsequent columns: further code groups
Figure 136: This is how you should prepare your code list in Excel
If you color the code names, this color is used in ATLAS.ti as code color.
To import the Excel file, select the IMPORT & EXPORT tab and next the Import Codebook button (the one with the down
arrow). Select IMPORT FROM EXCEL.
Select a file and activate / deactivate the option”My data contains headers”.
If your project already has codes, you need to decide what ATLAS.ti should do if the list of codes in the Excel table contains
codes that are already in your project. You can overwrite the existing codes, or ignore the duplicate codes, so that they are
not imported again.

CODING DATA 91
Figure 137: Import codebook dialogue
You also find the export / import code list options in the Tools tab of the Code Manager.
Expo rti ng The Co deb oo k fo r Us e In Ano ther ATLAS.ti Pro ject

To export all codes with comments and groups, select the IMPORT & EXPORT tab and next the Export Codebook button (the
one with the up arrow). Select the option EXPORT TO EXCEL.
Decide whether the Excel file should contain headers for codes, comments and groups, and whether to open the list in
Excel immediately.
Figure 138: Export codebook dialogue
You need to use this export option if you want to use the code list with comments and groups into another ATLAS.ti project.
For purposes of creating a codebook for a report or appendix, we recommend to use the Export option offered in the
Code Manager. This export is already formatted. See “Creating A Codebook“.
Working With Codes
Mo di f yi ng The Length o f A Co ded Segment

Modifying the length of a quotation is easy. Select the quotation by clicking on the quotation bar or code in the margin area
and move the "handle” in form of a little orange circles to the right, to the left, or up or down, depending on whether you
want to shorten or lengthen the quotation:

CODING DATA 92
Figure 139: Modifying the length of a coded segment
Repla ci ng A Co de
If you want to replace a code that is linked to a data segment, you can simply drag and drop another code from either the
Project Explorer, Code Browser, or the Code Manager on top of it.
Addi ng, Cha ngi ng And Remo vi ng Co de Col o r

To change the code color, select one or multiple codes in the Code Manager and click on the CHANGE COLOR button in the
Code tab. Select one of the offered colors.
Similar, when removing code color, select one or multiple codes in the Code Manager, click on the CHANGE COLOR button in the
Code tab and click on R EMOVE COLOR.
Figure 140: Code color Code color can also be modified in a network. See "Setting Code Node Colors”
palette
Mergi ng Co des
You may begin your coding very close to the data generating lots of codes. In order not to drown in a long list of codes, you
need to aggregate those codes from time to time, which means merging and renaming them to reflect the higher abstract
level. Another reason for merging is that you realize that two codes have the same meaning but you have used two different
labels.
Currently code comments cannot be merged. The workaround is to copy all comments of the codes that you want to
merge to the comment field of the code you merge all other codes into.
Figure 141: Starting the code merge procedure

CODING DATA 93
Select two or more codes in the Code Manager and click on the MERGE button (or right-click and select the Merge option
from the context menu).
Next, select which code should be kept, in other words the target into which all other codes should be merged, and click on
the Merge Codes button.
Figure 142: Merging codes
It is also possible to use the network editor for merging codes. This provides a visual space where you can arrange your codes,
review, sort and order them and decide which once to merge. See "Merging Codes In Networks ."
Spl i tti ng A Co de
Splitting a code is necessary if you have been lumping together many quotations under a broad theme. This is a suitable
approach for a first run through to get an idea about your data. At some point, however, those codes must be split up into
smaller sub codes. Think of a basket full of fruit. At first it is OK to collect all kinds of fruits, but then the basket gets very full
and you realize that it might be a good idea to use separate baskets for citrus fruits, apples and bananas.
Select a code that you want to split in the Code Manager and click on the SPLIT CODE button in the ribbon, or select the
option from the context menu.
In the Split Code tool, you see the list of the quotations coded with the code.
Figure 143: Split Code tool
Click on the button NEW CODES.
Enter as many sub codes as you need. Then click CREATE .

ATLAS.ti automatically creates a prefix that consists of the name of the code you split followed by a colon (:). See Figure 144.

CODING DATA 94
Figure 144: Enter sub codes
After you created the subcodes, you can assign the quotations to one or more subcodes. When you select a quotation, its
content is shown below the list of quotation.
Assign the quotations by clicking on the checkbox of any of the subcodes that apply. The quotation is automatically
unlinked from the main code that you are splitting.
If you do not want to allow that a quotation is coded with two of the subcodes, activate the option MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE . This is
a requirement for some content analysis approaches and for calculating inter-coder agreement (see “Requirements For
Coding).
It is recommended not to double-code with the main and the subcode as it unneccessarily takes up space in the margin.
Instead, create a code group of all codes that share the same prefix. This way, you can access all data of this category on
the aggreate level if required.
Figure 145: Split Code dialog
After you have distributed some or all of the quotations into subcodes, click on the button SPLIT CODE . Now the subcodes
are created and the quotations assigned accordingly.
It is not required that you assign all quotations to subcodes. If you are not sure what to do with a quotation, you can leave it
coded with the main code and split it later. In case you are familiar with the first version of the Split Code tool, multiple
rounds of splitting are now supported. You can also split quotations in already existing codes.

CODING DATA 95
Figure 146: Result of code splitting
Figure 146 shows an example of a split code. If you are developing categories and subcategories, you may want to
differentiate these different levels of coding by writing the category label in capital letters.
OPTIONS
Copy Comments: Select if you want all sub codes to have the same comment as the code you split.
Copy links: Select if you want all sub codes to inherit existing links to other codes or memos.
Mutually exclusive: If activated, you can assign a quotation to only one subcode. This is a requirement for some content
analysis approaches and for calculating inter-coder agreement (see “Requirements For Coding).
Dupl i ca ti ng A Co de
It is also possible to duplicate a codes with all its linkages. The duplicated code is a perfect clone of the original code including
color, comment, code-quotation links, code memo links and code-code links. Instead of using the splitting tool, you can
duplicate a code, open it in a network ("Opening A Network On One Or More Entities"), import all neighbors or only the
quotation neighbors ("Add Node Neighbors"), and cut quotations from each code, the original and the duplicate ("Cutting
Links").
To duplicate a code, open the Code Manager, select one or more codes, right-click and select the D UPLICATE CODE (S) option
from the context menu, or select the Duplicate Code(s) button in the ribbon.
Rena mi ng a nd Del eti ng a Co de

Renaming and deleting codes are procedures that seem trivial, but understanding the "scope" of these operations can be a
Renaming or deleting a problem for new users. For both operations you must understand, that there is only ONE code object, e. g., "Happiness" in a
code has global effects. given project, even if you applied this code many times. With the margin area switched on, you may see the code appear
many times while scrolling through your document. In fact you are seeing "links" between a quotation represented by a bar
and the code, represented by its name and icon,
Renaming or removing a code in the margin besides a text on real paper using an eraser and a pencil affects only one specific
occurrence of a code; all other occurrences of the same code are untouched. The effect of the operation is local.
With ATLAS.ti you can do the same by cutting the link between the code and the quotation. However, you can do additional
things that are not possible using traditional paper and pencil techniques.
By renaming or removing a code from an project, you are affecting every occurrence of the code throughout the entire project.
The effect is global. Renaming the code will instantly change all the code "links" in the margin to reflect the new name.
Deleting it will remove all occurrences in the margin (and from all other contexts in which it was engaged, like network,
groups, etc.).
RENAMING A C ODE
In the Project Explorer, the Code Browser, or Code Manager, right-click on a code and select the RENAME option. In the Code
Manager, you can also click the Rename button in the ribbon. In-place rename is currently not available.
D ELETING ONE OR M ULTIPLE CODE( S)

In the Project Explorer, the Code Browser, or Code Manager, right-click on a code and select the DELETE option. In the Code
Manager, you can also click on the Delete button in the ribbon.
To delete multiple codes, you need to make your selection in either the Code Browser or the Code Manager.
Unl i nki ng A Co de
This option is the reverse function of coding. It removes the links between codes and quotations. Unlike the delete function,
neither codes nor quotations are removed; only the association between the code and the quotation is removed. This is done
in the margin area.

CODING DATA 96
Figure 147: Cutting a link between a code and a quotation
To cut the link between a code and a quotation, select it in the margin area, right-click and select the UNLINK option from
the context menu.
Wri ti ng Co de Co mments
Code comments can be used for various types of purposes. The most common usage is to use them for a code definition. If
you work in teams, you may also want to add a coding rule or an example quote. If you work inductively, you can use them to
write down first ideas of how you want to apply this code. You can also use it to write up summaries of all segments coded
with this code and your interpretation about it. There are several ways to write a code comment.
Figure 148: Edit comments
If the Code Manager is open, you can use the comment field at the bottom of the window.
In the margin area or the navigator, you can right-click on a code and select the EDIT COMMENT option (Figure 149). Another
option is to click on the Edit Comment button in the ribbon of the contextual Code tab.
In the margin area, you can double-click on a code to write or edit a comment. In addition you can access all quotations
that you have coded with the code from there.
Figure 149: Places where you can access the code comment option
All codes that have a comment display a tilde (~) at the end of the code name and the code icon shows a little yellow
flag.

CODING DATA 97
Wo rki ng Wi th Co de Gro ups

Code groups help in organizing codes, they make it easy to access specific codes from a long list of codes, and they allow you
to create any kind of filter you need to query your data.
Code groups can be created in two ways – you can create them in the Code Group Manage, or in the side panel of the Code
Manager.
Figure 150: Create code groups in the navigator
To create a group in the Code Manager, click on the H OME tab and open the Code Manager by clicking on the CODES button.
Select a few codes and drag them into the side panel on the left-hand side.
After dropping the codes, enter a name for the code group and click on the button CREATE .
When you click on the newly created code group, only the codes from this group will show up in the list on the right-hand
side. This allows you to quickly access codes in your list without having to scroll the list all the time.
To show all codes again, close the yellow pane that shows up on top of the code list when selecting a group.
For more information on how to work with groups, see "Working With Groups."
If you are interested in learning about the differences between codes, code groups and smart codes, please view this
video.
Retri evi ng Co ded Da ta

There are several options to retrieve quotations. In the following you will learn how to retrieve quotations of a single code.
More complex retrievals are explained in the section "Querying Data." You can retrieve quotations of a single code in the Code
Manager and in the Quotation Manager. First let's explore the Code Manager option:
S IMPLE RETRIEVAL USING THE CODE M ANAGER OR N AVIGATOR

Open the Code Manager.
Next double-click a code. A list of quotations coded with the selected code opens. If you click on the “Eye” button, you get
a preview for all quotations.
If you want a report, click on the Export button. See Figure 151.

CODING DATA 98
Figure 151: Retreived quotation in preview mode
Figure 152: Docked quotation list with view in context
If you dock the quotation list, it is comfortably stored away on the right or left-hand side of your screen and you can view or
read through them there:
Doublelick on a quotation to view it in context.
S IMPLE RETRIEVAL IN THE M ARGIN A REA

If you double-click on a code in the margin area, the comment field opens. From there you can access the quotations coded
Figure 153: Simple retrieval of coded quotations in the margin area
with the code:
S IMPLE AND AND OR QUERIES I N THE QUOTATION M ANAGER

Open the Quotation Manager.
Select a code in the side panel. The list of quotations only shows the quotations of the selected code. If you click on a
quotation, it will be shown in the preview area. If you double-click, the quotation will be shown in the context of the
document.

CODING DATA 99
Figure 154: Retrieving quotations of a single code in the Quotation Manager
The yellow bar on top shows the code you have selected. In technical terms, it functions as a filter. When selecting two or
more codes, this filter can be extended and you can formulate simple AND (all codes must apply) and OR (any of the codes
apply) queries:
AND: Show quotations where ALL the selected codes apply.

OR: Show all quotations linked to ANY of the selected codes.
Figure 155: Simple OR query in the Quotation Manager
Figure 155 shows an OR query for two selected codes. With a click on the down arrow next to any, you can change the
operator to 'all.'
Figure 156: Changing operators from ANY to ALL.
ALL means that two or more codes have been applied to the exact same quotation. It is a very restrictive operator. For
other query option see "Querying Data".

CODING DATA 100
It is of course also possible to create a report of the retrieved quotations.
You findthe report options in the contextual Quotations ribbon. You can create a Text or an Excel report
For creating a text report you have the following options:
Figure 157: Creating a report for quotations
Find more detail in the section "Creating Reports".
Expl o ri ng Co ded Da ta
To explore the words that have been used in the quotations linked to one or more codes, you can create a word list or word
cloud. Word lists and word clouds have been described in detail in the section "Exploring Data ."
C REATING A WORD C LOUD OR WORD LIST F OR SELECTED C ODE

Open the Code Manager and select one or more codes. If you select a code group in the side panel, you can easily select the
codes that belong to one group. Click the Word Cloud or Word List button in the Code Manager ribbon.
C REATING A WORD C LOUD OR WORD LIST F OR SELECTED QUOTATIONS

Open the Quotation Manager and select one or more quotations. If you select one or more codes in the side panel, you can
easily select all quotations coded with theses codes. Click the W ORD CLOUD or WORD L IST button in the Quotation Manager
ribbon.
Creating A Codebook
To create a Code Book, open the Code Manager and click on the Report button
Select to export all items.
Depending on how you have set up your code system, you may want to group the output by code groups. If you have
written comments for your code groups, include those as well.
Select to include code comments.

THE MARGIN AREA 101
Figure 158: Creating a codebook
The Margin Area

The margin area in ATLAS.ti is an important working space. It is not only used to display entities linked to your data like
codes, memos, hyperlinks, groups or networks; it is also a space where you can interact with your data, write and review
comments, link and un-link codes, move codes around, replace codes, traverse hyperlinks, and the like.
Depending on the current activity, you can set various display options.
Figure 159: Margin

display options
Figure 160: Interactive margin area
Margin Display Options

To set the display options, right-click on a white space in the margin area and make your selection:
Figure 159 shows the default settings. If you only want to see an aggregated view of your coding, you may want to activate
code groups rather than codes.
If you select networks, the name of the network is displayed next to quotations that are either contained in the network or if
the networks contain codes or memos that are linked to the quotation.
Margin Drag & Drop

All objects populating the margin area (i. e., "margin entities") support drag & drop. The bar visualize quotations segmenting
the document, and - depending on the context - the objects attached to the bars represent themselves or the link with the
quotation.
The effect of a drag & drop operation depends on the entities that are involved as drag sources (those that are dragged) and
targets (those onto which entities are dropped).
A large variety of entities from the margin area can be dropped into the margin area. Furthermore, entities can also be
dragged from other entity managers and browsers. Entities can be dragged from the margin into other windows, browsers or

THE MARGIN AREA 102
even other applications like Word. In the latter case, the ATLAS.ti entity lose their ATLAS.ti specific "objectiveness" but at
least they render into something useful, e. g., a formatted title and rich text comment.
Mo ve Li nked Ob jects
When an entity (e. g., a code, memo, or hyperlink) is dropped on a quotation bar, a new link is created between the entity and
the quotation represented by the bar. In the figure below, the code ‘historic context' is cut from its original quotation and
linked to the quotation of the target bar, coded with 'class system'.
Figure 161: Moving linked entities
Repla ce Li nked Enti ti e s

Replacing a code: In the
margin drag a code from When a margin entity is dropped onto another margin entity it is replaced. It combines the operation described above with
one quotation onto the replacement of the dropped-on entity. Three operations are accomplished at the same time: the entity is removed from
another code and the its original quotation, it is linked to the target quotation, and it replaces the entity it was dropped on (the latter is cut from
target code is replaced. its quotation).
Co py Li nked Ob jects
To copy linked objects:
hold down the Ctrl key To keep the entity from being cut from its original place, hold down the CTRL-key when dropping. This resembles dragging
and drag a margin object entities from managers and browsers into the margin area, which does not change existing links.
(e. g., a code) onto
another quotation bar.
Figure 162: Copying and moving linked entities
Li nki ng Q uo ta ti o ns
Dragging a quotation bar onto another quotation bar creates a new hyperlink between the two (see "Creating Hyperlinks In
The Margin Area").

AUTO CODING 103
Figure 163: Creating a hyperlink
Auto Coding
The Auto-Coding tool finds text passages, selects a specified amount of text (e. g., the exact match, or spread to the
Auto-Coding = Text surrounding word, sentence, or paragraph), and codes the passages with a previously selected code.
Search + Automatic
Segmentation + Coding Auto-coding allows you to quickly collect ideas that belong to a certain concept on the basis of words or patterns found in the
text. It is also is useful when coding structural information like speaker turns in group interviews, or other sections that can
easily be identified by a text search.
The Auto-Coding tool combines the Text Search tool with an automatic segmentation and code assignment mechanism.
Opening The Auto Coding Tool

The Auto Coding Tool can be opened from the Document Manager ribbon, or via the context menu of selected documents in
the Document Manager or the Project Explorer. Depending on from where you open it, you set the scope of what should be
auto coded.
Auto -Co di ng One Sel ected Do cument

Load the document into the editor and select the Auto Coding button from the Documents ribbon.
Figure 164: Auto coding a document in the main editor area
Auto -Co di ng One O R Mul ti pl e Sel ected Do cument

Select two or more documents in the Project Explorer or the Document Manager, right-click and select AUTO CODING from
the context menu.

AUTO CODING 104
The New Code button in

the ribbon allows you to
create codes on the fly.
Figure 165: Selecting a group of documents for auto coding
The Auto-Coding Dialog

In the first section, enter a word or term that you want to search for. In the second section, select how you want to code each
hit.
Secti o n 1
Search for: Enter a search term, consisting of either a string of characters, a word or multiple words, or a search term
including regular expressions (GREP).
Ignore case: Deactivate this option, if you do characters to match the searched text exactly. When deactivated, you will not
find "Love" when you search for "love."
Strategy:
Select TEXT if you want to find a word that contains the characters you have entered in the 'Search for' field, e.g. child. In
addition to these five letters, ATLAS.ti will also find children, childhood, childless, childish, etc.
Select WORD, if you are want to find the word exactly as entered.
Select EXPRESSION , if you want to find a sentence or paragraph that contains two words that are however not adjacent to each
other, like family and love, select the option Expression. As search term you need to enter 'family love'.
The last used search terms (up to 10) are stored. If you need a search term again, you can select it from a drop-down list.

AUTO CODING 105
Figure 166: Auto Coding dialog
Selecting REGULAR EXPRESSION allows you to build search terms using regular expressions. An example would be to search for
the words 'kid|children|youngster|minor'. The pipe | as regular expression means OR. Given the above search time, ATLAS.ti
will search for any occurrences of the words in the term.
You can use all common regular expressions as supported by the Microsoft .net framework. You find an overview here. In
the section Regular Expressions (GREP) a few examples are provided.
Context: Here you can define the context in which an expression should occur. For example, if you only want to code a
paragraph if it contains the two words 'family' and 'love', select paragraph.
Note that this option only applies if you have selected 'Expression' or 'Regular Expression.'
• Word: This is useful if you look for occurrences of numbers or single letters within a word.
• Sentence: Select if the two words entered as search expression, e.g. 'family' and 'love', should occur within the same
sentence. Sentence is defined as a section until the next period (.).
• Paragraph: Select if the two words entered as search expression, e.g. 'family' and 'love', should occur within the same
paragraph. A paragraph is defined as a section ending with a paragraph mark.
• Chapter: Select if the two words entered as search expression, e.g. 'family' and 'love', should occur within the same
chapter. A chapter is defined as lines of text until the next empty line (at least 2 paragraph marks).
• Document: Select if the two words entered as search expression, e.g. 'family' and 'love', should occur within the same
document.
Figure 167: Options for expanding
Section 2: Code
Select Code: Select an existing code, or create a new one by clicking on the button 'New Code'.
Expand to: When a matched string is found, the size of the segment to be coded can be specified as follows:
• The Exact Match only

• The Word surrounding the matched string
• Sentence surrounding the matched string
• The Paragraph surrounding the matched string
• The Chapter (lines of text until the next empty line) surrounding the matched string

AUTO CODING 106
• the Document
Please note that ATLAS.ti cannot detect chapters in PDF documents due to the non-tagged internal structure of PDF
documents. If you select to expand the match 'chapter', the entire page is coded.
Confirm matches: As it is not always desirable to let the program decide whether or not to code a given text passage, you
can control the process by checking "Confirm matches." You will then be asked to confirm each match before it is coded.
Exa mpl e
An example for the usage of semi-automatic coding would be to code for the concept "distress." Indications that a person
might be distressed could be words like nervousness, tension, unease, edginess, etc. In order to capture this, you would do
the following:
Open the Auto Coding tool.
Enter a search expression, like: nervousness|tension|unease|edginess. The pipe symbol | means that ATLAS.ti will look for
nervousness OR tension OR unease OR edginess.
As strategy select: R EGULAR EXPRESSION .
Select DOCUMENTS as context.
Create a new code with the name 'distress'.
Expand each match to: SENTENCE .
Check CONFIRM MATCHES and click on the S TART button.
Every time the program finds a piece of text that matches your search expression, it stops the search and highlights the
text it has found. You can then read the surrounding context and decide whether the text passage really has something to
do with distress. If it does, click CODE IT , otherwise click S KIP IT. The program continues to search for the next match.
You can deactivate the CONFIRM MATCHES box at any time and let ATLAS.ti scan through the rest of your texts without
prompting for further confirmation.
Brus hi ng- Up Res ul ts af ter Auto -Co di ng

Since no automatic search can guarantee 100% meaningful results, the quotations created and assigned to the selected code
during auto-coding should be screened and modified if needed. The recommendation is to always use a new code for auto
coding. If you realize that the auto coding process did not result in anything useful, you can either undo the auto coding or
delete the code.
GREP searches are very Regular Expressions (GREP)

flexible.
GREP is a well-known search tool in the UNIX world. The original GREP tool printed each line containing the search pattern,
hence the acronym GREP ("Globally look for Regular Expression and Print).
In ATLAS.ti, the results of a GREP search are not printed line-by-line; rather, the text matching the search pattern is
highlighted on the screen, or you can automatically code the results including some surrounding context.
Regular Expressions The core of a GREP search is the inclusion of special characters in the search string that control the matching process. GREP
efficiently exploit the finds instances in your data that match certain patterns.
syntactical properties of
the technical device called
"text."
GRE P Exa mpl es
GREP Expression Description

^ Matches an empty string at the beginning of a line.
$ Matches an empty string at the end of a line.
. Matches any character except a new line.
+ Matches at least one occurrence of the preceding expression or character.
* Matches the preceding element zero or more times. For example, ab*c matches "ac," "abc,"
"abbbc," etc.
? Matches the preceding element zero or one time. For example, ba? matches "b" or "ba."
[] Matches a range or set of characters: [a-z] or [0-9] or [aeiou]. For example: [0-9] finds all numeric
characters, while [^0-9] finds all non-numeric character
\b Matches an empty string at a word boundary
\B Matches an empty string not a word boundary
\< Matches an empty string at the beginning of a word
\> Matches an empty string at the end of a word

AUTO CODING 107
\ The escape character disables the special GREP functionality of the following character. For example: \[
matches an opening bracket.
| OR. Enclose ORed expressions with parentheses if OR should be restricted to certain sequences of
characters or expressions
The expression man|woman matches "man" and "woman."

The search expression
:d:d[7-9] finds all 3-digit You could also use (|wo)man to the same effect. H(a|e)llo matches "Hello" and "Hallo." H(a|e)+llo matches
numbers with the last "Haaaaaallo" as well as "Heeeeeaaaaeaeaeaeaello."
digit being a 7, 8, or 9. And how about the (angry|lazy|stupid) (man|woman) (walk|runn|play|fight)ing with the gr(a|e)y dog
This can be a useful – get the idea?
search to find certain
social security numbers
GREP Expression Description
or other personal
identification numbers.
\d Matches any digit (equivalent to [0-9])
\D Matches anything but a digit
\s Matches a white-space character
\S Matches anything but a white-space character
\w Matches any word constituent character
\W any character but a word constituent
These escapes are also allowed in character classes: [\w+-] means "any character that is either a word constituent, or a plus,
or a minus."
\<\w+\> matches any whole word
\<[[:alpha:]]+\> matches whole words containing only alphanumeric characters.
Character classes can also include the following elements:
[:alnum:] Any alphanumeric, i.e., a word constituent, character

[:alpha:] Any alphabetic character
[:cntrl:] Any control character. In this version, it means any character whose ASCII code is < 32.
[:digit:] Any decimal digit
[:graph:] Any graphical character. In this version, this mean any character with the code >= 32.
[:lower:] Any lowercase character
[:punct:] any punctuation character
[:space:] Any white-space character
[:upper:] Any uppercase character
[:xdigit:] Any hexadecimal character
Note that these elements are components of the character classes, i. e. they have to be enclosed in an extra set of
square brackets to form a valid regular expression. A non-empty string of digits or arbitrary length would be represented
as [[:digit:]]+
Exa mpl es o f GRE P Sea rches

In the following, a few search examples are presented showing the matching GREP expression in the column on the right.
Examples GREP expression

Find text (of arbitrary length) enclosed within brackets. Note that the brackets have to be \[.*\]
escaped with "\" as they are themselves control characters
Find all years between 2001 and 2004: 200[1-4]
Find all numbers with 2 digits at the end of a line or paragraph: \d\d$
Find all "Meyer"s - spelled in four different ways: M[ae][iy]er
Find all lines (paragraphs) starting with one arbitrary letter followed by a colon. If you search ^.[:]
for a "d" following the colon you will have to use the Escape character: ^.\:d Otherwise, the
letter "d" would be interpreted as a digit.
You can test and debug any regular expression you formulate on this web site: https://regex101.com/

FOCUS GROUP CODING 108
Focus Group Coding

If you work with focus group data, you cannot work with document groups when it comes to the individual speakers in each
focus group. Often a focus group has a mix of male and female participants, the participants might be in different age
groups and have different educational levels. Thus, often it is not possible to add an entire focus group file to a document
group gender: male, or gender: female. Focus Group data need to be treated differently. Each speaker unit needs to be
identified and coded. If you prepare your focus groups transcripts in a way that each speaker can easily be identified, speaker
units and speaker attributes can be coded automatically by ATLAS.ti. See “Guidelines For Preparing Focus Group Data“.
This will allow for later comparisons of statements by the different speakers or speaker attributes like gender or educational
level. The analysis tool that you need for such comparison is the “Code Co-Occurrence Table “.
Comparing statements of different groups depending on data type:

• If you have interview data, you will use the “Code Document Table“ to compare statements of different respondent
groups.
• If you have focus group data, you need the “Code Co-Occurrence Table “ to compare statements of different
respondent groups.
Guidelines For Preparing Focus Group Data

Requirements
There is only one requirement when preparing focus group data: Each speaker or other identifying information needs to have
a unique identifier and if possible should be applied consistently throughout the entire transcript. ATLAS.ti offers two
default identifiers:
Pattern 1:
<speaker name:> It could also be any other identifier. It does not have to be a name.
Pattern 2:
<@speaker name:> It could also be any other identifier. It does not have to be a name.
An example transcript following pattern 1 might look like this:
Alex: I don't know, I'm the sort, I don't really struggle making friends cos everyone
tells me I've got a big mouth and I don't stop talking [laughs] …
Tom: So is that how, is that how you met just, just through you striking up a
conversation?
Deb: I'm trying to think exactly [laughs] I think that's what it was, we were both in
the same research methods class …
or like this:
Alex:
I don't know, I'm the sort, I don't really struggle making friends cos everyone tells
me I've got a big mouth and I don't stop talking [laughs] …
Tom:
So is that how, is that how you met just, just through you striking up a conversation?
Deb:
I'm trying to think exactly [laughs] I think that's what it was, we were both in the
same research methods class
It is also possible to add further information to each speaker like their gender, age group, educational level etc. This way, also
this information will be automatically coded. An Example might look like this:
Alex: gender male: age group 1: education level high school:
I don't know, I'm the sort, I don't really struggle making friends cos everyone tells
me I've got a big mouth and I don't stop talking [laughs] …
Tom: gender male: age group 1: education level some college:

So is that how, is that how you met just, just through you striking up a conversation?
Deb: gender female: age group 1: education level high school:

I'm trying to think exactly [laughs] I think that's what it was, we were both in the
same research methods class …
The speaker unit of Alex will then be coded with Alex, gender male, age group 1 and education level high school. Before the
data is coded, you can modify the code labels or add further codes.
An example transcript following pattern 2 might look like this:

@Alex: I don't know, I'm the sort, I don't really struggle making friends cos
everyone tells me I've got a big mouth and I don't stop talking [laughs] …
@Tom: So is that how, is that how you met just, just through you striking up a
conversation?
@Deb: I'm trying to think exactly [laughs] I think that's what it was, we were both in
If your data is not transcribed yet, we recommend using pattern 2 as it is unlikekly that this pattern will find sections
that are not speaker units.
Custom Pattern
You can also define your own pattern, or use GREP expressions in case there are typos or an inconsistent use of speaker or
other identifiers. For instance, the regular expression: To +(m|n) matches "Toom," "Ton," or “Toon” to find different spellings
of the name 'Tom'. For more information on GREP, see “Regular Expressions (GREP)“.
Recommendation
For readability you may want to consider to start each speaker unit on a new line. Additionally, you may want to enter an
empty line between speaker units. Both is not required. When a pattern is recognized the chosen code(s) are applied from
the first letter of the pattern to the start of the next recognized pattern. Therefore it does not matter whether a new unit
starts on a new line or whether there is an empty line in between.
Coding Focus Group Data

Select a focus group transcript in the Document Manager and select FOCUS G ROUP CODING from the Documents ribbon.
Another option is to right-click on a document in the Project Explorer and to select this option from the context menu.
Select a pattern for recognizing speaker units:
Figure 168: Focus Group Coding dialog
If your transcript looks as follows, select Pattern 1:

Alex: I don't know, I'm the sort, I don't really struggle making friends cos everyone
tells me I've got a big mouth and I don't stop talking [laughs]…
Tom: So is that how, is that how you met just, just through you striking up a
conversation?
Deb: I'm trying to think exactly [laughs] I think that's what it was, we were both in
the same research methods class…
If your transcript looks as follows, select Pattern 2:

@Alex: I don't know, I'm the sort, I don't really struggle making friends cos
everyone tells me I've got a big mouth and I don't stop talking [laughs] …
@Tom: So is that how, is that how you met just, just through you striking up a
conversation?

@Deb: I'm trying to think exactly [laughs] I think that's what it was, we were both in
Custom Pattern
If you have used a different way to indicate a speaker, enter your own pattern. You can also use this function to auto code
any data that has a specific structure. So it does not necessarily have to be a speaker. It could be a date, a number, or any
other type of identifier. As mentioned above, regular expressions can also be used as custom pattern. For instance:
([A-Z]+): only recognizes identifiers consisting of letters from A to Z.
([A-Z]+[0-9]+): recognizes identifiers that consist of a combination of letters and numbers
See “Regular Expressions (GREP)“ for further information.
After selecting a pattern, click NEXT .

ATLAS.ti lists all speakers or identifiers that fit the selected pattern and adds the name(s) as code. These might also include
Figure 169: Select identifiers and add codes
items that you would not classify as speakers or identifiers but fit the pattern. If so, you can deselect them.
Select all speakers or identifiers that you want to code.
Check the suggested codes and add additional ones, if you want to code the speaker unit or section with multiple codes. If
you enter multiple codes, they need to be separated by a semicolon.
Figure 170: Add all codes that apply
As described in the section “Guidelines For Preparing Focus Group Data,“ you could also add information that describe the
speakers like age, gender, educational level, etc. into the transcript. Those would be picked up as identifiers and codes , and
there would be no need to add attribute codes to each speaker. The Choose Coding window might then look like this:

Figure 171: Choose Coding window if attribute codes have already been entered in the transcript
If you enter codes that already exist in your code list, they will not be duplicated. In a future update, you will be able to select
existing codes from a list.
Click on the button CODE .

ATLAS.ti codes all speaker unit or identified sections. Once it is done, you see the summary screen:
Figure 172: Summary report after focus group coding is finished
Double-check the results in context and take a look at the Code Manager. ATLAS.ti creates a code group from all codes
that have been entered in the previous step in the Coding window called 'Focus Group Coding'.
Finding Redundant Codings
Redundant codings are overlapping or embedded quotations that are associated with the same code. Such codings can result
from normal coding but may occur unnoticed during a merge procedure when working in teams. The Codings Analyzer finds
all redundant codings and offers appropriate procedures to correct it. An example of a redundant coding is shown below.
Figure 173: An example of a redundant coding

FINDING REDUNDANT CODINGS 112
To find all redundant codings, select FIND R EDUNDANT CODINGS under the T OOLS & S UPPORT tab, or open the Code Manager
and select the options from the Tools tab there.
Figure 174: Redundant Codings tool
The upper pane lists all codes for which redundant codings were found. The Redundancy column displays the number of pairs
of redundant quotations found for the codes. If you select one of the codes, the redundant quotations are listed in pairs in
the middle pane. If you select a pair, you see a preview of the quotation in the bottom pane. Double-clicking on a listed
quotation displays it in context.
You can correct the redundancy in the following ways:

U NLINK FROM LEFT QUOTATION removes he selected code from the quotation shown on the left-hand side.
MERGE QUOTATIONS melts the two quotations shown on the right- and left-hand side. All references to and from the merged
quotation are "inherited" by the other. If the two quotations overlap, the resulting quotation includes all data from both
quotations.
U NLINK FROM RIGHT QUOTATION removes he selected code from the quotation shown on the right-hand side.
If you hover over a quotation you see some information about the “Connectivity” of the quotation: number of connections to
codes (=codings), number of connections to other quotations (=hyperlinks), and number of connections to memos (=memo
links). The connectivity information provides an additional clue about the best action how to resolve the redundancy.
Figure 175: Hover over a quoation to see which other items are linked to it
If you see a quotation listed more than once, it means that three or more quotations are involved in a redundant coding. You
will notice, that merging one pair of quotations may have the effect that other pairs are removed from the list as well, as the
redundancy assertion does not hold any longer for the remaining pairs of quotations for this code.

INTER-CODER AGREEMENT (ICA) 113
Inter-Coder Agreement (ICA)
Please Read This First!

Previous versions of ATLAS.ti allowed to calculate inter-coder agreement (ICA) in combination with the online tool CAT. This
required a special way of merging projects and the creation of a specific text-only output. Both are no longer available in
ATLAS.ti 8. Therefore, CAT can no longer be used in combination with ATLAS.ti.
Instead, we decided to develop our own inter-coder agreement tool that would be both easy to use and produce results of
outstanding accuracy. To this end, we worked closely with Prof. Klaus Krippendorff, one of the leading experts in this field
and the namesake of important "measurement units" in this area. ATLAS.ti's Inter-coder Agreement tool lets you assess the
accuracy of how multiple coders analyze a given body of data, and thus permits you to underscore the validity of your
analysis.
The need for such a tool as an integrated element in ATLAS.ti has long been evident and has been frequently requested by
users. When we set out to to tackle the task of designing it, it was also clear that would have to be more than the one-
dimensional and sometimes crassly simplifying attempts we found elsewhere. Rather, the ATLAS.ti inter-coder Agreement
tool was supposed to be equally flexible, accurate, and able to handle the inherent complexity of the subject matter.
This also means that by necessity it requires at least a minimal willingness for the user to delve into some of the basic
theoretical foundations of what inter-coder agreement is, what it does and can do, and also what it cannot do. We tried to
make the tool as easy to use as possible and require only a small degree of preparation, but by its nature, it could not and
cannot be a magic "just click a button and hope for the best" solution.
That said, you are probably aware of the expression, "garbage in, garbage out." If you randomly click on any of the choices
that ATLAS.ti offers to calculate an inter-coder agreement coefficient, ATLAS.ti will calculate something. Whether the
number you receive will be meaningful and useful depends on how you have set up your project and your coding. ATLAS.ti
can only provide the technical functionality. You as the user are responsible for applying it in a meaningful and sensible way,
especially if you intend to report an inter-coder agreement coefficient in a publication. Hence, we would like to lay out a few
of the underlying assumptions and requirements.
If you want to develop a code system as a team, yes, you can start coding independently and then see what you get. But this
approach can only be an initial brainstorming at best; a first step towards developing a code system based on which you can
test inter-coder agreement. But this will be much later in the process. You first need a structured code system in which each
code is clearly defined. The testing also needs to be done by two or more additional coders that are independent of the
person who developed the codes. Thus, if you want to measure inter-coder agreement, you need at least three persons: One
person developing and defining the codes, and two persons to apply the codes.
Please keep in mind that the inter-coder agreement tool crosses the qualitative-quantitative divide. Establishing inter-
coder agreement has its origin in quantitative content analysis (see for instance Krippendorff, 2018; Schreier, 2012). If
you want to apply it and want to adhere to scientific standards, you must follow some rules that are much stricter than
those for qualitative coding.
Why Call It Inter-Coder Agreement Rather Than Inter-Coder Reliability?

The coefficients that are available measure the extent of agreement or disagreement of different coders. Based on this
measure one can infer reliability, but the coefficients do not measure reliability directly. Therefore, what is measured is inter-
coder agreement and not inter-coder reliability.
Agreement is what we measure; reliability is what we wish to infer from it.
Why Reliability Matters

The purpose of collecting and analyzing data is that researchers find answers to the research questions that motivated the
study in the first place. Thus, the data are the trusted ground for any reasoning and discussion of the results. Therefore, the
researchers should be confident that their data has been generated taking precaution against distortions and biases,
intentional or accidental, and that the mean the same thing to anyone who uses them. Reliability grounds this confidence
empirically (Krippendorff, 2004).
There are two ways to ope rationalize reliability, one routed in measurement theory, which is less relevant for the type of
data that ATLAS.ti users have. The second one is an interpretivist conception of reliability. When collecting any type of
interview data or observations the phenomena of interest usually disappears right after it has been recorded or observed.
Therefore, the analyst's ability to examine the phenomena relies heavily on a consensual reading and use of the data that
represent the phenomena of interest. Researchers need to presume that their data can be trusted to mean the same to all of
their users. This means “that the reading of textual data as well as of the research results is replicable elsewhere, that

researchers demonstrably agree on what they are talking about. Here, then, reliability is the degree in which members of a
designated community agree on the readings, interpretations, responses to, or uses of given texts or data. […] Researchers
need to demonstrate the trustworthiness of their data by measuring their reliability” (Krippendorff, 2004, p. 212).
Testing the reliability of the data is a first step. Only after establishing that the reliability is sufficiently high, it makes sense
to proceed with the analysis of the data. If there is considerable doubt what the data mean, it will be difficult to justify the
further analysis and also the results of this analysis.
Reliability And Validity

Whereas reliability offers the certainty that research findings can be reproduced and that no or only limited external "noise"
has contaminated the data or the results, validity assures that the assertions made by the research reflect the reality it
claims to represent. Validity concerns truth(s).
Reliability relates to validity in the following ways:
The more unreliable the data, the less likely it is that researchers can draw valid conclusions from the data. In terms of
coding data, this means that researchers need to identify valid accounts in the data to a degree better than by chance. If the
agreement of two or more coders is not better than the agreement by chance, then reliability is low and you cannot infer that
a common understanding of the data exists. Thus: Unreliability limits the chance of validity.
On the other hand, reliability does not necessarily guarantee validity. Two coders may share the same world view and
have the same prejudices may well agree on what they see, but could objectively be wrong. Also, if two researchers may
have a unique perspective based on their academic discipline but their reading is not shared by many people outside their
own scholarly community, the reliability might be high but the outcome of the research has little chance of being
substantiated by evidence of the reality that is inferred. As Krippendorff (2004) states: “Even perfectly dependable
mechanical instruments, such as computers, can be wrong – reliably.” (p. 213).
A third aspect is the dilemma between high reliability and validity. Interesting interpretations might not be reproducible,
or interesting data may not occur often enough to establish reliability. Highly reliable data might be boring and oversimplified
in order to establish a high reliability in the first place.
At What Phase In Your Project Should ICA Analysis Be Performed?

A good time to have your coding checked by other coders is when you have built a stable code system and all codes are
defined. This means, this is somewhere in the middle of the coding process. Once a satisfactory ICA coefficient is achieved,
the principal investigator has the assurance that his or her codes can be understood and applied by others and can continue
to work with the code system.
Requirements For Coding

Sources for unreliable data are intra-coder inconsistencies and inter-coder disagreements. To detect these, we need to
replicate the coding process. Replicability can be assured when several independently working coders agree on the use of the
written coding instruction, by highlighting the same textual segments to which the coding instructions apply, identifying the
same semantic domains that would describe them, and code them using the same codes for each semantic domain.
Development Of Semantic Domains
In developing the ICA function, it was decided to use a special name to make it clear that this type of coding is related to an
ICA analysis.
A semantic domain is defined as a space of distinct concepts that share common meanings. Examples of semantic domains
are emotional states, a set of strategies mentioned to deal with something, motivations for achieving something, gender
biases, memberships in different, values, or genres. Each semantic domain embraces mutually exclusive concepts indicated
by a code.
At the development stage of a coding instruction a semantic domain is open ended. For example, one may start with the
semantic domain “benefits of friendship” by distinguishing “caring for each other” and “supporting each other” but soon
discovers that there are also other aspects like “improve health and longevity” and “learning from each other”. So a code for
these aspects needs to be added to the semantic domain of “benefits of friendship”. Once a coding instruction is written and
used in testing its reliability, one can no longer expand a semantic domain.
All semantic domains are context dependent. The colour of a ball pen has little to do with the state of a drunk, or a political
party. Semantic domains may use abstract names, but without acknowledgements of their contexts coding becomes
unreliable.
Semantic domains are logically or conceptually independent of each other, hence freely combinable as appropriate. In a
section of your data, you may find someone describing the characteristics of friendship and changes over time. As these
codes come from different semantic domains, they can both be applied.

Figure 176: Examples of semantic domains in ATLAS.ti
There are two requirements for developing and working with semantic domains: exhaustiveness and mutual exclusiveness.
Exhaustiveness means that the codes of the code system cover the variability in the data and that no aspect that is relevant
for the research question is left-out. On the domain level this means that all main topics are covered. On the sub code level,
this means that the codes of a semantic domain cover all aspects of the domain and the data can be sorted in the available
codes without forcing them. An easy way out is to include a catch all 'miscellaneous' code for each domain into which coders
can add all data that they think does not fit anywhere else. However, keep in mind that such catch all codes will contribute
little to answering the research questions.
Mutual exclusiveness affects two areas. One is the meaning of the sub codes: Each of the sub codes within each domain
needs to be different and this needs to be clearly specified in the code definitions and coding rules. There should be no doubt
when to apply sub code 1, 2 or 3. The second is the application of the sub code: You can only apply one of the sub codes of
a semantic domain to a quotation or to overlapping quotations. Using the same code colour for all codes of a semantic
domain will help you to detect possible errors. See Figure 177.
If you find that you have coded a quotation with two codes from the same semantic domain, you can fix it by splitting the
quotation. This means, you change the length of the original quotation and create one new quotation, so you can apply the
two codes to two distinct quotations.
Figure 177: How to correct a violation of mutual exclusiveness
If you need to split a code into sub codes to create a semantic domain, you find an option in the split code tool to assign
quotations to subcodes in a mutually exclusive manner. See “Splitting A Code“.
If codes within a semantic domain are not applied in a mutually exclusive manner, the ICA coefficient is inflated – and in
the current implementation of the tool cannot be calculated!
In version 2 of the ICA tool released with version 9, ATLAS.ti will calculate the coefficient but will indicate that there is a
problem. There will also be a link to the segments in your data that are problematic.
Mul ti -va l ued Co di ng

As also shown in Figure 178, you can apply multiple codes of different semantic domains to the same quotation. This is
referred to as multi-valued coding. For instance, a respondent expresses an opinion about a recent event. The semantic
domain in this example is the RECENT EVENT and the various 'opinions' about the recent event are the codes of his domain.
Within the same section or in an overlapping section, the respondent also talks about the people involved in the event and
the consequences it had for them. The PEOPLE INVOLVED, and the CONSEQUENCES are two further semantic domains. If
your coding should cover all these different aspects that are mentioned in the sentence or paragraph, you need and can
apply codes from all three domains.

Figure 178: Mulit-valued coding
Coding with codes from multiple semantic domains will allow you to see how the various semantic domains are related. For
example, what kind of people are involved in what kinds of events and how they experience the event. For this you can use
the code co-occurrence tools at a later stage in the analysis. See “Code Co-Occurrence Tools“.
Co mmo n M is ta kes
A common belief is that consensus is better than individual judgment. Rather than to work independently, coders are
encouraged to discuss what they code and to reach their decision by compromise. However, data generated in this way does
not ensure reproducibility, nor does it reveal the extent of it. The results often reflect the social structure of the group, the
most prestigious member of the group dominating the outcome. Reproducibility requires at least two independent coders.
Another common procedure is to allow coders to consult each other if problems arise, e.g. they do not understand a coding
instruction, or they have problems applying some of the codes to the data given to them. This also compromises reliability.
Ideally, the coding instructions should be clear and easy to understand. If this is not the case, the coders involved in the
discussion create their own interpretation of what the codes mean. This is difficult to communicate to others and therefore
jeopardizes reproducibility. In addition, the process loses stability as the data coded in the early phases were coded based on
a different understanding of the codes. If coders do not work independently and discuss problems during the process of
coding, the reliability coefficient might be higher in the end, but this is partly illusory. If the data were to be given to different
coders not having the same insights, reliability is likely to be lower again. As it is common that code systems evolve, and
code definitions and coding rules need to be refined, you can ask coders to write down all the issues they see with the current
instructions and definitions. Based on their notes, the coding system can be refined and tested again, but with different
coders.
Another common mistake is to assume that it is best to ask other experts, colleagues with a long history of
involvement in the subject of the research, or close friends and associates to serve as coders. Those coders are likely to
agree, but not because they carefully follow the coding instructions, but because they know each other and the purpose of
the research. This also results in higher measures of reliability, but also does not serve reproducibility.
Measuring Inter-coder Agreement

Suppose two coders are given a text of a certain length and do what the coding instructions tell them to do. The simplest
agreement coefficient |cua assesses the degree of agreement among these coders to decide what is relevant to a present
research project. The may create so-called reliability data – complying with all the earlier mentioned condition under which
they work – so that replicability can be inferred from the observed inter-coder agreement. They may give you the following
record of their coding – here only which segments of text are relevant:
Figure 179: Textual continuum
Evidently. The first pair of segments agree in length and location on the continuum.
The second pair agree in length but not in location. They have an intersection in common. In the third case, coder A finds a
segment relevant, not recognized by coder B. the largest disagreement is observed in the last pair of segments. Coder A
takes a narrower view than coder B.

In terms of your ATLAS.ti coding, you need to think of your document as a textual continuum. Each character of your text is a
unit of analysis for ICA, starting at character 1 and ending for instance at character 17500. For audio and video documents,
the unit of analysis is a second. Images can currently not be used in an ICA analysis. The quotation itself does not go into the
analysis, only the characters or seconds that have been coded. If you add multiple documents to the analysis, the continuum
is extended like pearls strung on a chain. Thus every character or second where coders agree go into the calculation of the ICA
coefficient.
According to Krippendorff (2019), the simplest inter-coder agreement coefficient is:
It is a measure of the extent to which data can be trusted to represent the phenomena of analytical interest that one hopes
to analyze in place of the raw phenomena.
When coders pay no attention to the text, which means they just apply the codes in an arbitrary manner, their coding has no
relationship to what the text is about, then the observed disagreement Do equals the expected disagreement De, then a = 1–1
= 0.000. On the other hand, if agreement is perfect, which means disagreement Do = 0, then a = 1- 0 = 1.000. For further
information on how alpha is calcuated, see the appendix.
Figure 180: Contingency table for a more complex example
To better understand the relationship between actual, observed and expected agreement, let's look a the following
contingency table:
The matrices with perfect and expected agreement/disagreement serve only as a benchmark. In this simple example you
could have worked it out in your head, but in a real example in ATLAS.ti this is no longer possible. The numbers are much
higher, and often also odd since the calculation is based on the number of coded / non-coded characters / seconds.
Therefore, it is good to see the perfect and expected agreements as a point of reference.
In the example above, the tables represent a semantic domain with five codes. If all coders agreed, they would have applied
the semantic domain codes to 10 units each. If they had been applied randomly, they would have been evenly distributed
amongst 10 units each (10/5 = 2). In the observed contingency table, we can see that the coders agree in applying code 4.
There is some confusion about the application of code 2 and even more for code 5. The coders have applied the latter to three
different codes: 1, 3, and 5. For all codes, where there is confusion the code definition needs to be revisited. For code 5 for
instance you need to ask why it was confused with code 1 and 3? Are there any overlaps in the definition? Why was it
understood in different ways?
Methods For Testing ICA

ATLAS.ti currently offers three methods to test inter-coder agreement: Simple percent agreement, Holsti Index, and two of
the Krippendorff's alpha coefficients. For scientific reporting, we recommend the later two. In version 2 of the ICA tool,
planned to be released with version 9 of ATLAS.ti, all four of the family of aplpha coefficients will be calculated (see
“Krippendorff’s family of alpha coefficients – from the general to the specific“. You will also be able to inspect and print the
coincidence matrices.
All methods can be used for two or more coders.
Percent Agreement
Percentage Agreement is the simplest measure of inter-coder agreement. It is calculated as the number of times a set of
ratings agree, divided by the total number of units of observation that are rated, multiplied by 100.

The benefits of percentage agreement are that it is simple to calculate and it can be used with any type of measurement
scale. Let's take a look at the following example: There are ten segments of text and two coders only needed to decide
whether a code applies or does not apply:
Segments 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Coder 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Coder 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Table 1: Coding of two coders
Percent Agreement (PA) = number of agreements / total number of segments

PA = 6 / 10
PA =0.6 = 60%
Coder 1 and 2 agree 6 out of 10 times, so percent agreement is 60%. One could argue this is quite good. This calculation,
however, does not account for chance agreement between ratings. If the two coders were not to read the data and would
just randomly code the 10 segments. we would expect them to agree a certain percentage of the time by chance alone. The
question is: How much higher is the 60% agreement over the agreement that would occur by chance? Below only the results
are presented if chance agreement is taken into account. If you are interested in the calculation, take a look at Krippendorff
(2004, p. 224-226). The agreement that is expected by mere chance is (9.6 +1.6)/20 = 56%. The 60% agreement thus is not
impressive at all. Statistically speaking, the performance of the two coders is equivalent to having reliably coded only 1 of the
10 segments, and have arbitrarily assigned 0s and 1s to the other 9 segments.
Hol s ti Index
Holsti's method (1969) is a variation of percentage agreement, as percent agreement cannot be used if the coders have not
all coded the same data segments. When coders were allowed to create their own quotations and did not code pre-defined
quotations, the Holsti index needs to be user. P'lease note, that also the Holsti index does not take into account chance
agreement.
The formula for the Holsti Index is:
PA (Holsti) = 2A/ (N1+N2)
PA (Holsti) represents percentage of agreement between two coders,
A is the number of the two coders' consensus decisions, and N1 and N2 are numbers of decisions the coders have made
respectively .
Percentage agreement and the Holsti Index are equal when all coders code the same units of sample.
Holsti, O. R. (1969). Content analysis for the social sciences and humanities, Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley
Co hens ka ppa
Cohen's Kappa (Cohen, 1960) is another coefficient used in the calculation of ICA and offered by other CAQDAS programs. We
have been asked by users why ATLAS.ti does not offer it. Kappa is a modification of Scott's pi and according to Krippendorff
(2019) and Zwick (1988) a rather unfortunate modification. There is a conceptual flaw in his calculation, as Kappa counts
disagreements between observer preferences for available categories as agreements. In addition, both Cohen's kappa and
Scott's P assume an infinite sample size. Krippendorff's alpha coefficient is sensitive to different sample sizes and can also
be used on small samples.
Zwick, Rebecca (1988). Another look at interrater agreement. Psychological Bulletin, 103, 347-387.
Kri ppendo rf f ’s f ami l y o f al pha co ef f i cients – f ro m the genera l to the s peci f i c

Inter-coder agreements can be measured at different levels. At the most general level, you get a value for relevance. That is,
have the coders identified the areas relevant to the research question in a consensus manner? With reference to ATLAS.ti,
this means agreement or disagreement at the level of the quotation, regardless of what was coded there.
At the next level, you get a coefficient for all semantic domains that are included in the analysis. This value takes into
account the multiple-valued coding of codes from different semantic domains and is not just the average of the coefficients
for all the semantic domains used in the analysis.
Next, you can see if encoders could identify the same semantic domain and how well they could distinguish between codes
within the semantic domain.

Figure 181: Krippendorff’s alpha family – from the general to the specific
|cua indicates the extent to which coders agree on the relevance of texts for the research project (currently alpha binary)
Sua indicates the extent to which coders agree on the presence or absence of semantic domains, (currently Cu-alpha)
(s)ua indicates the degree to which coders identify a particular semantic domain (currently cu-alpha)
csua indicates the agreement on coding within a semantic domain (currently not yet implemented)
As background reading we recommend: Krippendorff, Klaus (2019). Content Analysis: An Introduction to its Methodology.
Thousand Oaks, 4th edition. California: SAGE publications.
Currently implemented are the c-alpha binary and the cu & Cu-Alpha coefficients:
Kri ppendo rf f 's c-Al pha Bi na ry

The C-Alpha Binary coefficient is a measure for the reliability of distinguishing relevant from irrelevant matter. It is applicable
if the coders have created quotations themselves. The coefficient will tell you for each code whether the different coders
have identified similar or the same areas in relation to a given meaning (code).
Kri ppendo rf f 's cu-Al pha / Cu-Al pha

The cu⍺ coefficient omits all references to the gaps between valued units and assesses the reliability of coding relevant
matter only. It can be used to infer the reliability of each semantic domain.
The Cu⍺ coefficient with a capital C calculates the reliability for all selected semantic domains considered together.
The calculations require that codes of semantic domains have been applied mutually exclusively. This means only one of
the sub codes per domain is applied to a given quotation. If this rule is violated cu or Cu-Alpha cannot be calculated.
Decision Rules
A number of decisions have to be made when testing for inter-coder agreement. For instance, how much data material needs
to be used, how many instances need to be coded with any given code for the calculation to be possible, and how to evaluate
the obtained coefficient.
Sa mple s iz e
The data you use for the ICA analysis needs to be representative of the total amount of data you have collected, thus of
those data whose reliability is in question. Furthermore, the number of codings per code needs to be sufficiently high. As a
rule of thumb, the codings per code should at least yield five agreements by chance. Krippendorff (2019) uses Bloch and
Kraemer’s formula 3.7 (1989:276) to obtain the required sample size. The table below lists the sample size for the three
smallest acceptable reliabilities αmin: 0.667 / 0.800 / 0.900; for four levels of statistical significance: 0.100 / 0.050 / 0.010 /
0.005, and for semantic domains up to10 codes (probability p c):

Table 2: Required sample size (adapted from Krippendorff, 2018)
Example: If you have a semantic domain with 4 codes and each of the codes are equally distributed, you need a minimum of
139 codings for this semantic domain if the minimum alpha should be 0.800 at a 0.05 level of statistical significance. For a
lower alpha of 0.667, you need a minimum of 81 codings at the same level of statistical significance. If the frequencies across
the sub categories per domain are not equally distributed, you need to increase the sample size. By 4 codes in a semantic
domain, the estimated proportion p c of all values c in the population is .250 (¼).
If the distribution of your codes in a semantic domain is unequal, you need to make a new estimate for the sample size by
using a pc in the formula shown in Figure 182that is correspondingly less than ¼.
If your semantic domain has more than 10 codes, you can calculate the needed sample size using the following equation. It
applies if you work with two independent coders.
You can see the corresponding z value from a standard normal distribution table. For a p-value of 0,05, z = 1,65.
Figure 182: Calculating sample size if your semantic domains

have more than 10 codes
Accepta b l e l evel o f rel ia b i l i ty

The last question to consider is when to accept or reject coded data based on the ICA coefficient. Krippendorff's (2019)
recommendations are:
• Strive to reach α = 1,000, even if this is just an ideal.

• Do not accept data with reliability values below α = 0.667.
• In most cases, you can consider a semantic domain to be reliable if α ≥ 0.800.
• Select at least 0.05 as the statistical level of significance to minimize the risk of a Type 1 error, which is to accept data as
reliable if this is not the case.
Which cut-off point you choose always depends on the validity requirements that are placed on the research results. If the
result of your analysis affects or even jeopardizes someone's life, you should use more stringent criteria. A cut-off point of α
= 0.800 means that 80% of the data is coded to a degree better than chance. If you are satisfied with α = 0.500, this means
50% of your data is coded to a degree better than chance. The sounds a bit like tossing a coin and playing heads or tails.
Setting Up A Project For Inter-coder Agreement Analysis

Before you take just any data set and run the inter-coder agreement analysis, we strongly recommend that you read the
sections “Team Work“ and “Please Read This First!."
You need to start from a Master project set up by the main analyst or principal investigator. The principal investigator
adds all documents and codes that will be subjected to the ICA analysis to the Master project and creates sub projects
based on the Master project for each coder.
To summarize the steps:

• The principal investigator develops the code system providing clear definitions for each code.
• The principal investigator creates a project bundle file for each coder that either contains only the documents to be coded
and the code system, or the documents, the quotations, and the code system.

Figure 183: Project set-up for ICA analysis
• The coders import the project bundle file, rename the project file during the process of import, double-check under which
user name they are logged in.
• The coders code the data independently. If they have questions or difficulties applying the codes, they write notes into a
memo.
• Once the coders are done, they prepare a project bundle file for the principal investigator.
• The principal investigator imports the project bundle files from each coder and briefly checks the work of each coder and
reads the memo they have written (if any).
• The principal investigator starts the inter-coder agreement mode and merges the projects of the coders.
• The principal investigator runs the ICA analysis.
Merging Projects For ICA Analysis

The step-by-step instructions below start with entering the ICA mode. All other steps are covered by the instructions for
team work. See “Team Work“. The following instructions assume 2 independent coders.
Import the project bundle files of code 1 and 2.
Open the project of coder 1 and create a snapshot. Do not accept the default name, enter a name that indicates that this is
the project for the ICA test for coder 1 and 2.
Close the project of coder 1 and continue to work with the renamed snapshot.
Select ANALYZE / ENABLE INTERCODE MODE .
Figure 184: First step in staring an ICA analysis: Enable the Intercoder Mode
Next, merge the project of coder 2 and save the merged project.
In ICA mode, The 'codings' of all coders will become visible.
A coding is the link between a code an a quotation. In ICA mode, you can see which coder has applied which code to a
quotation.
To see the authors of the various codings, change the view settings from icons to user in the View tab of the contextual
Document ribbon:
Figure 185: View settings suitable for ICA testing

Each coder is indicated by a different color. Hover over the user icon to see the name of the user. In Figure 186, all quotations
where created by the blue user Susanne. The brown user was asked to apply the codes of the code system to these
predefined quotations.
Figure 186: Display of the codings of different users
Preparing For ICA analysis

Click on the INTERCODER AGREEMENT button in the ANALYZE tab.
Click on the ADD CODER button and select two or more coders.
Click on the ADD DOCUMENTS button and select the documents that should be included in the analysis. The default option is
for all selected documents to be regarded as one continuum and all coded quotations of these documents will go into the
calculation. You can, however, also view agreements / disagreements per document and get a coefficient for each
document.
Only the documents are shown that have been coded by the selected coders.
Click on the ADD S EMANTIC DOMAIN button and add one or more codes to the domain. Alternatively, you can drag and drop
codes from the Project Explorer or the code list into the semantic domain field:
Figure 187: Adding codes to a semantic domain
Repeat this process for each semantic domain.

As there currently is no function to define a semantic domain formerly, all codes that you are adding from the list will be
considered to belong to a semantic domain. As you can see in Figure 187, semantic domains were already built indirectly in
the process of developing the code system by adding the same prefix to all codes that belong to the same semantic domain
like ACTIVITIES or BENEFITS. Please remember that all sub codes of a semantic domain (i. e., all codes with prefixes) must be
applied to quotations in a mutual exclusive manner. See “Requirements For Coding“.
A semantic domain can also consist of only one code.

After you have added coders, documents and codes, your screen looks similar to what is shown in Figure 188.
Figure 188: ICA view after adding coders, documents and codes
The quotations of the semantic domain are displayed on the right-hand side. When you select a quotation, the full content is
shown in the preview and you can write comments. You also see where the quotation is located in the document continuum.
When you scroll to the right in the quotation view window, you see the codes that have been applied by the selected coders.
If you click on one of the lines, only the quotations of the selected code and coder are shown in the quotation window (Figure
189).
Figure 189: Quotations coded by coder Susanne with the code activities: sport
You can remove coders, codes or documents from the analysis by clicking on the red x.
To the right of each coder line you see some descriptive statistics:
Figure 190: Descriptive statistics
The blue coder (Susanne) has applied the code “activities clubbing / going for a drink” 11 times. The number of characters
that are coded with this code are 1331 out of a total of 172.414 characters in all three selected documents, which is 0,8%.
The brown coder (Sabine) has applied the code “activities clubbing / going for a drink” 8 times. The number of characters that
are coded with this code are 1057 out of a total of 172.414 characters in all three selected documents, which is 0,6%.
Calculating An ICA Coeffient

To calculate ICA, select one of the four methods from the ribbon. See “Methods For Testing ICA“ for more detail
In Figure 192, the c-alpha binary for the semantic domain 'activities' is 0, 983 and for the semantic domain 'benefits' is 0,937,
For both domains, it is 0,949. This means that the reliability for identifying relevant from irrelevant matter related to the
codes of these domain is high.
Figure 191: Select an ICA method

Figure 192: Display of results for c-alpha binary
The results for cu-alpha and Cu-alpha for the two selected domains are shown in Figure 193.
Figure 193: Display of results for cu-alpha and Cu-alpha
The difference between the two measures is that the lower case cu-alpha applies to one semantic domain only, the capital
Cu-alpha applies to all selected semantic domains. It is not simply an average of all lower case cu-alphas, as sub codes from

different domains can potentially be applied to one quotations. This is referred to as multi-valued coding (see also
Krippendorff et al., 2016) and “Multi-valued Coding“ above.
Working With Multimedia Data

When we refer to multimedia data, we mean audio and video files. As the mouse clicks are the same for audio and video
files, the difference being that there is no picture when working with audio files, below we describe all steps for both file
formats together. For illustration purposes, most figures show video data.
Linking Multimedia Data to A Project

As multimedia files, especially video files can be quite sizable, it is recommend to link multimedia files to a project rather
than to import them.
To link audio or video files to the project, in the Home tab click on the drop down arrow of of the ADD DOCUMENTS BUTTON
and select A DD L INKED VIDEO/AUDIO.
Linked documents remain at their original location and ATLAS.ti accesses them from there. Preferably, these files should not
be moved to a different location. If the files need to be moved, you need to re-link the files to your project. ATLAS.ti will alert
you, if there is an issue and a file can no longer be accessed. You find a R EPAIR L INK option in the Document Manager under
the "Tools Tab."
Figure 194: Linking multimedia
files to a project
Display Of Multimedia Documents
Figure 195: Resizing the audio

wave
Figure 196: Display of video files
Audio wave: On the right-hand side the audio wave is displayed. You can make is smaller or wider by positioning your mouse
on the left-hand side of the audio wave and dragging it either to the right-hand side or the left-hand side.

WORKING WITH MULTIMEDIA DATA 126
Preview images: For video files, preview images are displayed in the full preview and the margin area. When you add a new
video to a project, you do not immediately see the preview images as they first need to be generated. Depending on the
length of the video this may take a few seconds or up to a few minutes.
Preview images are generated from key frames. A key frame is defined as one of the frames in a video that provide the best
summary of the video content. The key frame rate is a variable that you can set using most good encoding software. A fast
key frame rate (with a lower number on the scale, as this refers to the interval between key frames) means that the video
has more frames designated as key frames. A slower key frame rate means that fewer frames are designated as key frames.
If you've got a typical talking head video or something else with little motion, you can get away with a slow key frame rate. If
you are shooting something with a lot of motion like a sporting event or a dance recital, a faster key frame rate is necessary.
The standard rate is to include a key frame every 5 seconds.
Playhead: The playhead shows the current position in the video or audio file.
Full preview: Below the display area you see a preview of the entire file. You can use it to select the segment that should be
displayed in the margin area.
Zoom: As the space from top to bottom of your computer screen will be too small in most cases to meaningfully display your
audio or video file, especially it it is coded, you can zoom the file in the full preview section. For this you use the two orange
lines that you see to the right and left of the full preview. See "Zooming the Time Line."
Figure 197: Display of audio files
Media Controls
If you move the cursor inside the audio or video pane, the media controls appear and you can start, stop and pause the video,
skip forward and backwards. You can also start and stop the multimedia file by pressing the space bar.
Figure 198: Multimedia controls
From left to right:

Stop: Stops the multimedia file and set the play head to the beginning.
Skip to previous mark: Moves backward to the last mark, which could be the end or beginning of a selection or a section, or
the beginning of the file.
Skip backward: Seek backward in the multimedia file.
Play / Pause
Skip to previous mark: Moves forward to the next mark, which could be the end or beginning of a selection or a section, or
the end of the file.
Skip forward: Seek forward in the multimedia file.
V OLUME: On or Off

Click the space bar to stop and start an audio or video file.
Multimedia Toolbar
As soon as an audio or video file is loaded, the multimedia options will be displayed in the Document tab. If you hoover over
each button with the mouse, a screen tip is displayed explaining each option. The options in the first sections are described
above ("Media Controls").
Figure 199: Multimedia toolbar
Capture Snapshot: If you want to analyze a particular frame in more detail, you can take a snapshot. If you click on it, the
frame will be added as new document to your project as image file.
Media Controls: See "Media Controls."
Volume: Set the volume on slider between 0% (mute) and 100%
Playback Rate: If you want the video to play faster or slower, you can select a playback rate between 0,25 times the original
speed to 4 times the original speed. The current play back rate is shown in the blue status bar at the bottom of the screen.
Mark Position: Sets the start position for a quotation. The short-cut key is < or ,
Create Quotation: Sets the end position for a quotation and creates a quotation at the same time. The short-cut key is > or .
You can also access the media controls with a right-click on the audio or video area (see Figure 211).
Keyboard Shortcuts For Working With Multimedia Documents
Multimedia Documents
Pause Play Space
Pause Play Media Play Pause
Pause Play F4
Play P
Play Shift+P
Play Play
Pause Pause
Stop S
Stop Shift+S
Stop Media Stop
Skip Back Browser Back
Skip Back Media Previous Track
Skip Forward Browser Forward
Forward Command Media Next Track
Small Step Back Left
Small Step Forward Right
Medium Step Back Ctrl+Left
Medium Step Forward Ctrl+Right

Large Step Back PageUp
Large Step Forward PageDown
Playback Rate Normal Multiply
PlaybackRate Up Plus (+ key on main keyboard)
Playback Rate Up Plus (+ key on numeric keyboard)
Playback Rate Down Minus (- key on main keyboard)
Playback Rate Down Minus (- key on numeric keyboard)
Mark Quotation Start , or <
Mark Quotation End + Create Quotation . or >
Zooming the Time Line
Figure 200: Effect of zooming the time line
A quick way to zoom the time line is by putting the mouse pointer onto the preview images on the right-hand side or
the margin area, holding down the Ctrl-key and scrolling the mouse wheel.
You can also zoom the timeline using the two orange sliders to select just the section of the audio or video that you want to
see in the margin area:
Figure 201: Zooming the time line
When you move the mouse pointer over the full preview, two orange sliders appear (see Figure 201).
Move the right and left slider to the desired position.
Multimedia View Options

If a multimedia document is loaded, you find a number of additional options on the View tab of the contextual document
ribbon.

Figure 202: Multimedia View options
The time line can be positioned at the bottom of the screen horizontally, or vertically next to the audio wave form.
You can show or hide the audio waveform or the video previews in both the margin or the zoom line.
If you deactivate 'auto-scroll margin' the playhead moves from the top to the bottom of the screen. The margin does not
move. If you have zoomed the margin, the playhead will be out of view if the audio or video file plays beyond the zoom area.
If you are only working within the zoomed area, or display the entire multimedia file on the screen, you may want to
deactivate the auto-scroll option as this is a lot smoother on your eye.
If you activate 'auto-scroll margin' the playhead remains in the middle of the screen and everything else moves (preview
images, audio wave form, margin).
Navigation Using The Arrow Keys

Use the right and left arrow keys, to move the position of the playhead by 1/1000th increments of the length of the video
that is currently displayed in the margin area.
Use the right and left arrow keys + the Ctrl-key, to move the position of the playhead by 1/20th increments of the length
of the video that is currently displayed in the margin area.
Creating Multimedia Quotations In the Margin Area

To create an audio or video quotation, move your mouse pointer on top of the audio wave and mark a section by clicking
on the left mouse button where you want it to start. Then drag the cursor to the end position. The times of the end and
start positions are shown, as well as the total length of the segment
As soon as you let go of the mouse, a quotation is created and you see the blue quotation boundary in the margin area:
Figure 203: Selecting a video

segment
Figure 204: Video quotation
If you want to take it one step slower, you can change the following setting under multimedia preferences that requires an
additional step to create a quotation (see also “Multimedia Preferences“:
Figure 205: Preference setting for creating multimedia quotations
If you have deactivate auto-create, hoover with the mouse over the selection and click the CREATE QUOTATION button as
shown in Figure 206.

Figure 206: Create quotation if auto-creation is deactivated
Creating Multimedia Quotations While Listening / Watching

You can also create audio or video quotation while listening / viewing the file. For this, you can use the Mark and Create
Quotation button in the tool bar or the short-cut keys < or , to set the start position and > or . to set the end position and to
create a quotation.
Play the video. If you find something interesting that you want to mark as a quotation, click on the , or the < key. Which
one to use depends on your keyboard.
Click . or > to mark the end position and to create the quotation.
Continue listening / watching and setting quotations.
Reviewing A Multimedia Quotation

If you want to review a quotation click on the "play" button.
Figure 207: Playing the current video selection
You can of course also immediately code multimedia files (see "Coding Multimedia Documents." However, as especially video
files contain so much more information as compared to text, it is often easier to first go through and segment the audio or
video file, i.e. creating quotations before coding. You have both options, whatever suits better.
Adjusting the Size of Multimedia Quotations
Figure 208: Adjusting the size of a multimedia quotation
To adjust or change the length of the quotation, drag the start or end position to the desired position.

Display Of Multimedia Quotations

A new quotation will be listed in the Quotation Manager, the Project Explorer or Quotation Browser. The default name for
audio and video quotations is the start and end time of the quotation. Each quotation can, however, be renamed.
Figure 209: Display of video quotations in the Quotation Manager
Depending on the media type, the quotation icon changes:
Figure 210: Quotation icons for various media types
Renaming A Multimedia Quotation

Select a quotation either in the Quotation Manager, the Project Explorer or the Quotation Browser, right-click and select
the RENAME option.
Audio and video quotations can be easily recognized by their special icon.
Activating And Playing Multimedia Quotations
In The Ma rgi n Area

To play the quotation, double-click on the quotation bar.
You can also move the playhead with the mouse to any position within an audio or video file.
Fro m Other Pla ces

• You can double-click on a multimedia quotation in the Project Explorer, the Quotations Browser or the Quotation Manager
to play it in context.
• You can preview a multimedia quotation in the preview area of the Quotation Manager. See "Activating and Displaying
Quotations."
• You can preview a multimedia quotation in a network.
Creating Snapshot Images From Video Frames

If you want to analyze particular frames of your video in more detail, you can create a snapshot. The snapshot is
automatically added as new image document to your project.
Move the play head to the desired position in the video.
Click on the camera icon in ribbon, or right-click on the video area and select the option CAPTURE VIDEO FRAME .
See "Creating Graphical Quotations" for further information on how to work with image files.

Figure 211: Accessing the media controls via the context menu
Coding Multimedia Documents

Right-click on the blue quotation bar and select CODING / OPEN CODING . For further information see: “Coding Data“.
Figure 212: Coding multimedia quotations
Describing Multimedia Quotations To Improve Output

The name of an audio or video quotation is its start and end position. If you want to add further information, you have two
options: renaming and adding a comment.
In the process of creating video quotations, rename them so they can serve as titles for your video segments. To do so, right
click on the quotation name in the Quotation Manager and select the R ENAME option. See also "Renaming A Multimedia
Quotation." This allows you to create a meaningful text output of coded audio and video segments. Use the comment area to
add further information, e.g. describe the segment and offer a first interpretation.

Figure 213: Analyzing multimedia quotations
To create a report, select a few video quotations in the Quotation Manager. Select the REPORT button in the ribbon. Under
options, select Comment. The report will show an overview of all the titles you have created for your video (or audio)
segments and the comments you have written. Plus, it provides the exact position within the audio or video file (start
position [duration}).
Figure 214: Report of renamed and commented video quotations
Video Tutorial: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows-Coding Audio and Video Documents
Multimedia Preferences
Under P ROJECT P REFERENCES (File / Options), you can set project specific preferences for multimedia files:

Figure 215: Multimedia Preferences
The effect of Autopreview is that the audio or video quotation immediately starts to play when you activate or open a
function.
When selecting autopreview for documents the multimedia quotation immediately begins to play when selecting a
multimedia document in the Document Manager.
When selecting autopreview for quotations the multimedia quotation immediately begins to play when selecting a
multimedia document in the Quotation Manager.
When selecting autopreview for hyperlinks the multimedia quotation immediately begins to play when activating a hyperlink.
The default option is that a multimedia quotation is created as soon as you have made a selection on the audio wave form.
If you prefer to make a selection first before creating a quotation with an additional mouse click, deactivate this option.
Working With Geo Docs

ATLAS.ti 8 uses Open Street Map as its data source for geo documents. Even though there is only one data source, you can
also use more than one geo docs in your project, e.g. to create distinct sets of locations, to simulate tours, to simply tell
different stories.
Adding A Geo Document To A Project

To add a geo document to the project, in the Home tab click on the drop down arrow of the ADD DOCUMENTS BUTTON and
select NEW G EO DOCUMENT.
A new document is added and if you open it you see the world map. The default name is "New Geo Document”. You may
want to rename it, so it better describes your analytic intention.
Figure 216: New geo document with margin area

WORKING WITH GEO DOCS 135
Finding A Location
The first thing you probably want to do is to query an address:
In the Document tab, click on the button QUERY ADDRESS. A new tab opens in the navigator on the left. Enter a search
term.
Figure 217: Document tab
Figure 218: Entering a search time to move to the desired location on the map
The map immediately displays the location that fits the search term and adds a place mark.
Creating Geo Quotations

Creating a Geo quotation is not much different from creating other type of quotations. The only difference is that the
quotation is just one location on the map – the place mark, and not a region.
Right-click on the place mark and select the option CREATE FREE QUOTATION (or click on the Create Free Quotation button in
the Document ribbon).
To create further quotations, either enter a new address and search for a location of interest, or left-click a point of
interest on the map to set a place mark. Right-click and select Create Free Quotation from the context menu.
If you move your mouse over a quotation, a text window opens displaying information about the quotation like the name,
the author, when it was created, any codes and memos that are attached to it, the longitude and latitude and the address.
Coding Geo Quotations

You can also create a quotation and link a code to it in one step, or code an existing quotation:
Set a place mark or select an existing one, right-click and select the option OPEN CODING or L IST CODING (or click on the
equivalent coding buttons in the Document ribbon).
Figure 219: Coding a Geo quotation via the context menu
All other drag-and-drop operations described for coding also apply. See "More Drag-And-Drop Options."

Dis pl a y of Geo Q uo ta ti o ns
Geo quotations can be access in the margin area, the Quotation Manager, the Quotation Browser, the Project Explorer and
also from within networks. Geo quotations are displayed as follows:
Figure 220: Display of geo quotations in the Quotation Manager
The quotation icon shows a place mark and the quotation name consists of the Geo coordinates for degree of longitude and
degree of latitude written in the decimal system,
In addition the Quotation Manager shows a preview of the Geo location (Figure 221). You may want to consider renaming Geo
quotations, e.g. by adding the name of the location to the coordinates. Another option is to add a comment, See also
"Describing Multimedia Quotations To Improve Output."
Figure 221: Preview of geo location in Quotation Manager
Acti va ti ng Geo Q uo ta ti o ns
Select a Geo quotation in any of the above mentioned browsers or windows and double-click. It will be displayed in
context, The place mark is colored in pink. All non-activated place marks are colored in light-blue.
Figure 222: Activate and deactivated Geo quotations
Mo di f yi ng A Geo quo ta ti o n
To modify a Geo quotation, activate it (see "Activating Geo Quotations") so it is highlighted in pink.
Move the place mark to a different location. The quotation follows along.

Creating A Snapshot
You can create a snapshot from the geographic region that is currently shown on your screen. This snapshot is automatically
added as a new image document. This allows you to select a region to create a quotation or to code it. Further you can
browse the Geo location in Google Maps (see "Browsing Geo Locations").
In the Document tab, click on the button CREATE SNAPSHOT.
Figure 223: Default name for Geo snapshots
A new document is created. The default name is: 'Geo Snapshot @ longitude:latitude' of the last selected location.
As a snapshot results in an image document, you can also handle it like an image document. See for example "Creating
Graphical Quotations."
Bro ws i ng Geo Lo ca ti o ns
Based on a Geo snapshot, you can look at the location on Google Maps by selecting the button BROWSE GEO L OCATION in the
Document tab. This opens Google Maps in your default browser outside of ATLAS.ti.
Figure 224: Browsing a Geo location in Google Maps
Video tutorial: Working with Geo documents.

WORKING WITH SURVEY DATA 138
Working With Survey Data
Overview
These days, a great many surveys are conducted through online tools. A positive side effect is that (a) all data is immediately
available in digital format, and (b) respondents are often willing to provide longer answers to open-ended questions. This
was rarely the case with paper-and-pencil surveys. Statistical programs like SPSS ™ offer some options to analyze open-
ended questions, but basically require you to encode each answer with a number. A proper qualitative analysis of the answers
is not possible with these tools. ATLAS.ti, however, does permit comprehensive analysis with great ease and in great depth.
A typical work flow for working with survey data looks like this:
Figure 225: Work flow when importing survey data
Online surveys can be created using a variety of tools. What most of them have in common is that they let you export data as
Excel™ file. And this is what you need to prepare for import in ATLAS.ti (see below). Based on specific prefixes that you add
to your variable names, ATLAS.ti interprets the column headers and cells of the Excel™ table in various ways and turns them
into primary documents, the contents of the primary documents, primary document families, quotations, codes, comments,
and code families.
Data are imported case-based. This means each row of the Excel™ table that is imported from the online survey tool is
transformed into a primary document.
How Survey Data Is Treated In ATLAS.ti

To represent the results of an online survey within the framework of ATLAS.ti in the most accurate and complete manner, a
few basic requirements need to be considered.
A survey broadly consists of the name of the survey, the questions, and the answers from each respondent. Questions can be
of different types, such as single-choice questions (yes/no, or offering more than two options), multiple-choice questions, or
open ended questions. Within the framework of ATLAS.ti these concepts are mapped as follows:
Open-ended question: Code (and code comment)

question Content of a quotation
answer
Single Choice 0/1 Document group
Single Choice > 2 options Document group from question plus value
Multiple Choice Document group from question plus value
This does not mean that you cannot turn a multiple-choice question into a code. It all depends on how you define the
columns in your Excel table. If you turn single or multiple choice questions into codes, you later need to do some automatic
coding based on the response choices available in the questionnaire.
Always remember that ATLAS.ti is not a software for analyzing statistical data, although it is possible to add information
from traditional quantitative questions. A general recommendation is to include the following variables from the online
survey:
• Variables describing the respondents, i. e. the classical demographic variables like age group, gender, profession,
educational level, income groups, etc.. Turn those variables into document groups.

• Responses to open-ended questions. Turn those into coded segments.

• Selected other variables like answers to single or multiple choice questions that are important in relation to analyzing the
open-ended questions.
Preparing An Excel™ Table For Import

The following table shows the list of all available prefixes that you can to add to the column headers in Excel™ in order for
ATLAS.ti to interpret the cells in various ways.
Prefixes and their interpretation

Prefix Result
! Defines the column to list the names of the primary documents. This column can be omitted. If you do no want
to provide a specific name for each document, ATLAS.ti automatically creates this column. The default name for
each document is case 1, case 2, case 3 and so on.
^ Defines the column to list the primary document's author
& Defines the primary document's date, expects ISO8601 format, see: http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~mgk25/iso-
time.html
Example: 4th of February 1995 or 1995-02-04 in ISO8601 format = YYYYMMDD = 19950204
< Ignore this column, use to exclude stuff inserted by the survey tool
. Creates a document group from the field name. Currently the cell needs to contain the number 1, or the words
Yes or Ja to be applied. Use for single choice questions where respondents can answer yes or no (or encoded as
1 and 0). Only the responses encoded with yes/ja or 1 become part of the document group.
: Creates a document group from the field name plus cell value. Use for single choice question like gender.
# Creates a document group from the field name plus the actual cell value. Use for single choice questions with
more than two answer options or for multiple choice questions.
Add no prefix to all open ended questions. The text in the column header is used as code. To avoid very long
code name, use a short form to indicate the question and add the full question as comment (see next row)
:: All text entered after two colons is added to the entity's comment field. This can be applied to cells resulting in
document groups or codes.
Open End::How do I
#Favorites::What
! create a question that
&dateTime ^Name .Academic :Gender bands do you listen to Tell us a dream
caseID is interpreted as open-
regularly?
ended?
This is a lengthy
I was walking on
20100414T1200 Michell response to a question
Case 1 0 female Beatles, Stones the roof of a 12-
00 e that may elicit
story building….
loooooong answers.
Quite simple: every
I am sorry, I don't field name (question)
20100415T1710
Case 2 Hans 1 male Stones, Scorpions remember any that has no prefix is an
00
dreams at all. open-ended question
by default.
Figure 226: Sample table ready for import
By importing the above sample table, we get:

• The name, date and author of the resulting document.
• One group for Academic containing all cases with cell value 1.
• Two groups Gender::male and Gender::female
• Four groups Favorites::Beatles, Favorites::Stones, etc. The following comment is added to each document group: What
bands do you listen to regularly?
• Two codes Tell us a dream and Open End. The following comment is added to the comment field of the code "Open
End": How do I create a question that is interpreted as open-ended? The text in the cell is making up the document
content for each case.
How To Import Survey Data

If you haven't done it yet, download the sample survey data here (or prepare your own).
Select the IMPORT & EXPORT tab and then the S URVEY button. Select the Excel file to be imported and click Open. The import
procedure starts. You see a progress report and ATLAS.ti informs you when the import is finished.

Inspecting Imported Survey Data

Open the Document Manager and take a look at what has been added to the project:
Figure 227: Document Manager after importing survey data
If you do not specify a name for each case, the default is case 1, case 2, case 3 and so on. Here the name/synonym of each
respondent was known and entered as author. Based on the information provided in the Excel table, document groups were
created. The highlighted respondent 'case 6' for example has some college education, is a female, single, and has no children.
She answered the question: 'Do children bring happiness' with yes.
ATLAS.ti automatically creates a group that contains all survey data in case you work with data from multiple sources.
If your data comes in waves, you can add the data to the same data and import it again. ATLAS.ti will only import the
new information. This also applies if you add new variables.
Each open-ended question was also automatically coded with the information provided in Excel.
Double-click case 6 to open it and open the Code Manager alongside ( H OME tab / CODES button or double-click on the main
Codes branch in the Project Explorer).

Figure 228: Coded document content after survey import
The first code has no a comment and the full length name is used as code label because no syntax was added in the Excel.
SQ: Reasons for not having children
For the second open ended questions, the column in Excel was labeled:
SQ1:: Reasons for having children
Note the syntax that was used ::. The effect is that the text that follows the two colons is entered as code definition in the
code comment field. The code label is shorter and the full label also does not appear in the body of the text, which can for
instance effect word clouds and word frequency counts in unwanted ways.
Working With Survey Data

Analyzing survey data requires that you know how to code (see "Working With Codes ). You may want to explore the data
first by creating Word Clouds or Word Lists, see "Exploring Data " and by using the auto coding feature ("Auto Coding").
After coding, further analysis options that are often used with survey data are the Code-Document Table, the Query Tool in
combination with the Scope option and possibly also the Code-Cooccurence Table. For further information, see "Querying
Data."
Working With Reference Manager Data

ATLAS.ti is frequently used for assisting with literature reviews. See for example:
• On Conducting a Literature Review with ATLAS.ti
• Using ATALS.ti 8 Windows in Literature Reviews
• Managing Literature Reviews Using ATLAS.ti
ATLAS.ti 8 provides even better support for literature review as you can import your articles directly from your favorite
Reference Manager. The prerequisite is that you are either using Endnote, or a reference manager that allows you to create
an export for Endnote in XML format. This is for instance the case in following programs:
• Reference Manager
• Mendeley
• Zotero
You might collect a great many documents in your reference manager for a first screening, or because you have come across
an article that might potentially be of interest at some point. You do not want to import all of these articles into ATLAS.ti,
only those that you want to look at more closely and that you have already identified as being useful for your literature
review and subsequent theory chapter. Therefore we recommend that you prepare your data in the reference manager of
your choice in such a way that the export only contains a pre-selection of documents. How this is done is different in each
reference manager.

WORKING WITH REFERENCE MANAGER DATA 142
Mendeley
In Mendeley, for instance, you highlight the documents that you want to export, right-click and select EXPORT. When
saving the file, you can select the file format:
Figure 229: Exporting an EndNote XML file in Mendeley
Select ENDNOTE XML as file type, and save the file.
Zotero
In Zotero, you find the export option under the FILE menu: EXPORT LIBRARY .
Zotero offers about ten different formats to export to. Here, too, select the Endnote XML option.
In addition, you can export your notes and the full content of the documents. Select both options. The notes will be
imported as document comments in ATLAS.ti.
Figure 230: Exporting an Endnote XML file in Zotero
Importing Documents
To start importing the file into ATLAS.ti, select the IMPORT & EXPORT tab and the button R ERFERENCE M ANAGER .
Figure 231: Select import options

WORKING WITH REFERENCE MANAGER DATA 143
ATLAS.ti can create document groups for you based on the following meta data:
• First authors
• Co-authors
• type of document (journal article, book, book chapter, etc.)
• Language
• Source – If you import documents from more than one reference manager, it is useful to group documents by source, so
that you know where they were coming from.
• Periodical
• Year
• Volume
• Issue
• Edition
• Publisher
Document name format

The default name for the document in ATLAS.ti is the name of the document as it used in the Reference Manager. For easier
sorting and organization, you can chose to add the name of the first author and the publishing year to the document name.
If the full document is not available

If only the document abstract is available and not the full document, you can select to import the abstract as a document.
If you have written a note about the document in your Reference Manager, this note will be immported as document
comment.
Make your selections and click the IMPORT button.
Inspecting Imported Documents

Open the Document Manager (Home tab / Documents button):
Figure 232: Documents imported from Zotero
The imported documents are sorted by author and year in alphabetical order. Further, document groups were created based
on the available information. Document 4 for instance was published in Nurse Researcher in 2002 and the source is Zotero.
The text entered as note in Zotero was imported as comment. If there are no notes for the document, the URL of the
document is added into the comment field (if available).

WORKING WITH TWITTER DATA 144
Working With Twitter Data
Importing Twitter Data

This section shows you how to import Twitter data.
A sample project showing how to work with Twitter data will follow later.
To import Twitter data, select the IMPORT & EXPORT tab and then the T WITTER button.
Enter a query. You can also look for multiple hashtags or authors by using OR. For example: #WorldAidsDay|#HIV|#Aids.
Figure 233: Set Twitter import options
Next, select whether you want to import the most recent or the most popular tweets and whether to include re-tweets,
images and profile images.
Note that you only will be able to import tweets from the last week. Further, as the final selection is done by Twitter and
not within our control, queries at different times, or on different computers may result in different tweets.
Figure 234: Select coding options
The imported data is automatically coded based on the selection you make:
Tweets often contain many more hashtags than the original one that you searched for. Coding all hashtags often results
in great many codes. Therefore you have an option to only code the queried hashtags. Further options are to code all
authors and all mentioned Twitter users, the location, and the language.
Figure 235: Select linking options

WORKING WITH TWITTER DATA 145
Lastly you can decide whether a link should be created between authors and locations and between the authors and
mentioned Twitter users.
Inspecting Imported Twitter Data

Load the imported and automatically coded document, e.g. from the project explorer on the left-hand side.
On the top of the document, you can read how many tweets and retweets were imported and how many you requested. Each
tweet is coded with the selection you have made.
Figure 236: Imported Twitter data
Open the Code Manager to inspect the code and code groups that have been created (H OME tab / CODES button):
Figure 237: Codes and code groups created during Twitter import
The code groups help you to navigate through your codes. By clicking on the code group Twitter: Languages, for instance, you
can immediately see how many and which languages are used in the tweets you imported.
Video Tutorial: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows-Working with Twitter Data

WORKING WITH HYPERLINKS 146
Working With Hyperlinks
Representing the Rhetoric of Data

A network with text (or other media) as nodes is often referred to as a hypertext. The original sequential text is de-linearized,
broken down into pieces that are then reconnected, making it possible to traverse from one piece of data to another piece of
data regardless of their original positions.
While a code offers fast access to sets of data segments, it defines only a simple relation between them, namely
equivalence.
Hyperlinks, which directly relate data segments, express more differentiated relationships between quotations:
contradiction, support, illustration, etc.
No code is needed to connect quotation Q1 with one that it contradicts (Q2).
Cross-references between text passages are very common even in conventional media like books - just think of religious and
juridical texts, literature, journals etc. Footnotes and end notes are another common deviation from the pure linearity of
sequential text. However, in conventional media, not much navigational support is provided for "traversing" between the
pieces of data that reference each other.
Computer-related hypertext applications include, for example, online help systems that display operational information in
suitable small chunks (compared to lengthy printed information), but with a considerable amount of linkage to other pieces
of information. A well-known hypermedia structure is the World Wide Web with its textual, graphical and other multimedia
information distributed world-wide.
Today's largest hypertext

system: the World Wide
Web
Benefits of Hypertext
What are the advantages of direct connections between text segments, compared to the traditional procedures of
qualitative text analysis?
Wha t Co des Ca nno t Do

Maybe we should ask a different question first: How can you express that statement X in text A contradicts statement Y in
text B, or how can you retrieve all contradictory statements of a specific utterance if all you have is codes and their
associations with the data?
The "code & retrieve" paradigm, which is so prevalent for many systems supporting the qualitative researcher, is not
Pure classification is not adequate for certain types of analysis. In formal terms, attaching codes to chunks of data creates named sets of segments
always adequate with almost no internal structure. This is not to say that partitioning lots of text segments into sets is not useful. On the
contrary, classification leads to manageable amounts of segments that later can be retrieved with the help of the attached
code words. But this may not be the only way you want to look at your data.
The concept of hypertext introduces explicit relations between passages. These links have to be built manually and result
Hypertext makes text- from an intellectual effort. The system cannot decide for you that segment x is in contradiction to segment y. But after the
text relations explicit work of establishing the links, you can make semantically richer retrievals: "Show statements contrary to statement x."
Hypertext allows you to create different paths through the data you are analyzing. For example, you may create a time line
different from the strict sequence of the original text.
Graphical Hyperlink Maps

ATLAS.ti incorporates procedures for creating and browsing hypertext structures. It allows for two or more quotations being
connected using named relations. Further, you can create graphical maps - using Networks - to make parts of your
hyperspace accessible in a comfortable way. Hyperlinks may connect quotations (textual, graphical, multimedia) across
documents (inter-textual links) or may link segments within the same primary document (intra-textual links). The natural
boundary for hyperlinks, like all structures in ATLAS.ti, is the project.
The hypertext network below displays quotations showing the full content in the preview. Other node types can also be
included in the Network, like memos and codes.

Figure 238: A network of quotations
Creating Hyperlinks
A hyperlink is a named linked between two quotations. If, for instance, you notice that one statement in a report or interview
is explaining a previous statement in a bit more detail, you can link the two using the relation "explains.” Or you may find a
contradictory or supporting statement. These are just a few of the default relations that come with the software. If they do
not fit what you want to express, you can create user-defined relations in the Relation Manager. See "Defining New
Hyperlink Relations."
ATLAS.ti offers a variety of options for creating and traversing hypertext links. Similar to the linking of codes, you may create
hyperlinks in a the network editor (see "Linking Nodes"). In addition, hypertext links can be created "in context," or via Drag &
Drag in the Quotation Manager and in the margin area.
Crea ti ng Hyperl i nks In Co ntext

Select a data segment as source, or an already existing quotation.
Right click on the selection select the option CREATE LINK SOURCE from the context menu.
If you select a data segment as source or target that was not yet a quotation, ATLAS.ti automatically creates a
quotation from it.
Figure 239: Creating a hyperlink using the context menu

Select a target segment or an existing quotation as target, right click and select the option CREATE LINK TARGET . The list of
available relations opens up. Select a relation with a left-click.
Figure 240: Selecting a relation for the hyperlink
If none of the existing relations fit, create a new relation in the Relation Manager. See "Defining New Hyperlink Relations."
C REATING A STAR
You can continue linking by highlighting another segment and selecting the CREATE L INK T ARGET option again. This eventually
will result in a star like formation. A hyperlink star connects many quotations from one source quotation. In the example
shown in Figure 242, the source quotation is 3:160, which is linked to seven target quotations via a number of different
relations.
Figure 241: A hyperlink star
C REATING A CHAIN
if you want to create a chain linkage, you need to select the target quotation again and set it as source and select a third
quotation as target, and so on, as shown in Figure 242:
Figure 242: Creating a hyperlink chain
Quotation 3:26 served as a source quotation and was linked to the target quotation 3:160. In order to continue the chain, the
target quotation 3,160 became the source quotation and was linked to the new target quotation 3:209.

Dis pl a y Of Hyperl i nks In The M argi n Area

Hyperlinks show the quotation icon, the relation and if space allows also the ID and name of the target quotation:
The margin is an optimal
work space for navigating
hyperlinks
Figure 243: Display of quotation and hyperlinks in the margin area
Dis pl a y Of Hyperl i nks In The Q uo ta ti o n Ma na ger

All hyper-linked quotations can easily be recognized in the Quotation Manager. All source quotations are marked with an
In list views, linked opening angle bracket <, all target quotations with a closing bracket >. If a quotation is both, source and target (as the case
quotations are prefixed when creating chains), then both brackets are used as prefix <>.
with angle brackets.
Symbols added to the Quotation Id:
Symbol Explanation
~ Quotation has a comment
< Quotation is source of a hyperlink
> Quotation is target of a hyperlink
<> Quotation is both start and target, thus at least two other quotations are linked
Hyperlinked quotations in the Quotation Manager:
Figure 244: List of commented and hyperlinked quotations
Crea ti ng Hyperl i nks In the Quo ta ti o n Ma na ger

This method can be applied to connect one or more existing quotations to one target quotation.
Select one or more source quotations in the Quotation Manager (multiple selections can be done in the standard way).
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the quotation(s) to a target quotation in the Quotation Manager.
Release the left mouse button. The Relation menu opens and you can specify the relation to be used for the hyperlinks.

Figure 245: Linking two quotations via drag & drop in the Quotation Manager
Crea ti ng Hyperl i nks In The Ma rgi n Area

Like the method described above, creating hyperlinks in the margin area is best suitable for connecting two quotations that
are in close proximity to each other.
Select a quotation bar in the margin area.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the bar onto another quotation bar.
Release the left mouse button. The Relation menu opens. Select a relation. The linking procedure ends here.
Crea ti ng Hyperl i nks By Vi ewi ng Do cuments Si de-By- Si de

Load two documents side-by-side, which means to load two documents and to move one into a second tab group. See
"Working With Tabs And Tab Groups ."
Left click a quotation bar in the active region, drag the mouse to a quotation bar on a document in a different tab group,
release the left mouse button and select a relation. See Figure 248.
Figure 246: Creating hyperlinks by viewing documents side-by-side
Tra vers i ng Hyperl i nks

To preview a hyperlinked content or to jump back and forth between hyperlinks, double-click on a hyperlink, a window
The margin area permits pops up providing information on the linked quotation and you can click inside to visit this quotation.
a very intuitive traversal
of hyper links.
You can also use the short-cut Ctrl + double-click to immediately jump to the linked quotation.

Mo di f yi ng Hyperl i nks
You can modify existing hyperlinks, i.e. cutting a link, flipping (reversing) a link, or changing the relation at various places.
C UTTING OR R EVERSING A L INK I N THE MARGIN AREA

Right-click on a hyperlink in the margin area and select either the CUT HYPERLINK or the R EVERSE H YPERLINK option from the
context menu.
Figure 247: Cutting or reversing a hyperlink in the margin area
Figure 248: Open Hyperlink Manager
MODIFYING H YPERLINKS IN THE HYPERLINK MANAGER

To open the Hyperlink Manager, click on the drop down arrow of the Links button in the Home tab. See also "Links
Manager Columns (Hyperlinks)“
Select the HYPERLINKS button in the Link Manager:
Figure 249: Modifying a hyperlink in the Hyperlink Manager

To modify a hyperlink, select it, right-click and select the desired option (CUT LINK , FLIP L INK or CHANGE R ELATION ) from the
context menu.
MODIFYING H YPERLINKS I N THE NETWORK EDITOR

Open a network on a hyperlink, e. g. by right clicking and selecting the option OPEN NETWORK from the context menu, or
click on the Open Network button in the ribbon.
Figure 250: Network based on the created hyperlinks
In the network editor, right click on a link label and select the desired option (FLIP L INK, CUT L INK or CHANGE R ELATION ) from
the context menu.
At this point, here is a very useful application of renaming quotations: As the names are displayed in a network, it allows you
to create meaningful and easy to understand models of your data. 'The hook for the article' <expands> 'guiding questions'
<continued by> 'worse than expectations....' and this is discussed by quotation [1:2] 'consistent evidence of negative
correlation...'
USEFUL OPTIONS F OR HYPERLINKS AND QUOTATIONS I N THE NETWORK EDITOR

To either see the full content of a quotation, or to move to the content of a quotation that appears in a network, double-
click a quotation node and choose SHOW IN DOCUMENT . You are moved to the section of the Document where the quotation
resides.
Figure 251: Show quotation in context
To expand the hyperlinks you see in a network, or to see which other entities are linked to a hyperlinked quotation, you can
import neighbors.
If you want to see how many entities are linked to a quotation, select the View tab and activate the option SHOW
FREQUENCIES . See Figure 252.

Figure 252: View options for networks
Quotation 2:20 is linked to three other entities and quotation 2:14 to two other entities, which could be other quotations,
codes or memos.
Directly linked entities are 'neighbors' and you can import them by right-clicking and selecting the appropriate option from
the context menu. You can import all neighbors, or select a specific entity type that you are interested in:
Figure 253: Importing neighboring entities
For more information on how to work with networks see the chapter "Working With Networks."
Def i ni ng New Hyperl i nk Rela ti o ns

New relations can be defined in the "Relation Manager." The procedure for defining or editing hyperlink relations is
equivalent to defining or editing code-code relations. It requires a basic understanding of "Nodes And Links," "Link vs.
Relation," and relation properties (see "Relations"). Therefore, we recommend to first read these sections.
Code-code and quote-quote links are the only types of network connections that allow you to assign a name to the
connection that appears on the line or arrow that runs between nodes.
E di ti ng Hyperl i nk Co mments
The links between quotations use fully qualified relations, like the links between codes and unlike the simple association
Use the margin area to between a code and a quotation. As "first-class" objects, these links can be assigned a dedicated comment.
display and edit link
comments. Such a comment could explain why quotation A has been linked to quotation B. Link comments can be accessed, displayed
and edited from three locations: the margin area, the Hyperlink Manager and the network editor.
The margin area has the advantage that it is readily available during scrolling through the documents. The network editor
method offers a visual approach to accomplishing this goal.
TO E DIT A HYPERLINK C OMMENT IN T HE M ARGIN A REA

Pop-up the context menu for a hyperlink displayed in the margin. The quotation inside the primary document pane is
highlighted at the same time.
Choose EDIT H YPERLINK COMMENT (see Figure 247).

TO E DIT A HYPERLINK C OMMENT IN T HE H YPERLINK M ANAGER

Open the Hyperlink Manager (Links button in the Home tab).
Select a hyperlink.
Edit the comment in text pane below the link list, or open a text editor by clicking the Editor comment button in the
ribbon, or the Edit Comment option in the context menu.
Figure 254: Writing a comment for a hyperlink
TO E DIT A HYPERLINK C OMMENT IN A N ETWORK

Open a network editor on a hyperlink (see "Modifying Hyperlinks In The network editor."
Move the mouse pointer to the link between two quotations and right-click.
Choose EDIT COMMENT .
Figure 255: Editing a hyperlink comment in a network
Working With Comments And Memos

Writing memos is an important task in every phase of the qualitative analysis process. The ideas captured in memos are
Possible uses for memos: often the "pieces of a puzzle" that are later put together in the phase of report writing. Theory-building, often associated
• To take methodological with building networks, also can involve the use of memos.
notes
• As a "bulletin board" in Memos are explanatory and descriptive texts that may be associated with other entities like quotations, codes, or other
team projects memos. Memos can also be just a text on its own, without being linked to anything. They can contain methodological
• As a project planning notes; they can be used as a bulletin board to exchange information between team members; you can use them to write
device.
• As a primary document

WORKING WITH COMMENTS AND MEMOS 155
notes about the analytical process, keeping a journal of to-dos, and to write up your analysis, formulating answers to
your research questions.
Memos can also be assigned as documents, if you want to code them (see "Using Memos as Document ").
Difference Between Memos And Codes

Code names are (or should be) succinct, dense descriptors for concepts emerging during the stage of closely studying the
data. They often reduce complex findings to crisp placeholders and/or theoretically relevant concepts.
Beginners often stuff lengthy treatises into a code name, blurring the distinction between codes, comments, and memos
and thereby mistaking codes for their more appropriate siblings.
If you find yourself using more than a few words as code word, consider using quotations or the code comment instead.
Like codes, memos have names. These names, or titles, are used for displaying memos in browsers, and help to find specific
memos. Just like code names, a memo's title should be short and concise. Don't confuse the name with its content! The
purpose is to fill the memo with content, which is a longer text that goes beyond just describing the memo title.
Ho w Memos And Co mments Di ff er

A comment is always a
part of another entity; a Comments exclusively belong to one entity. For example, the document comment is part of the document; a code comment
memo is an entity by belongs to a particular code and is usually a definition for this code. Memos can also have comments, which could f.ex. be a
itself. short note to use this memo for chapter 4 in the thesis, etc.
Comments are not displayed in browsers separately from the entity to which they are attached.
Memos can be linked to other entities and have an additional type attribute, e. g., theoretical, methodological, commentary,
etc. They can also be free-standing, unlike comments.
When creating a report, comments can be included. See "Creating Reports."
Typi cal Usa ge

The following two tables provides and an overview of most common usages of the various comments and memos.
Comments for... Typical Usage

Project … contain a project description. Take for instance a look at the comment written for this Children &
Happiness sample project by clicking on the EDIT COMMENT button in the HOME tab.
Documents … provide meta information about the document, e.g., a source reference, comments on an
interview situation, etc. When you use ATLAS.ti for your literature review, they may contain short
summaries of the article or an evaluation whether and how you want to continue to use this article.
Quotations … may contain an in interpretation of the data segment / may contain a transcript of a video
segment / may contain a summary of the data segment / may contain a translation into another
language, etc.
Codes … describe the code / provide coding rules / contain a sample quote / summaries or interpretations
of the coded content
Memos … may contain a note of another researcher on the team / supervisor reading the memo / an
evaluation where to use the memo in the ongoing analysis / ideas for linking and building networks
as comment on an analytical memo
Groups … describe the group / how you intend to use it / why you have grouped the entities the way you
did
Networks … describe the content of the network
Links … describe why the two entities (code-code relation or quotation-quotation relation) are linked and
why this relation has been used
Relations … to describe the relation and how you want to apply it
Below there are only some ideas on how memos can be used. These are probably sufficient to get your started. But do not
feel restricted by the suggestions. In gaining more experience in working with the software, you may come up with more
ideas on how to use memos.
Memos Description Type

Research diary Summary of activities in a work session. Usually there is only one research diary method
per project. However, if your research diary gets very long you may consider to
split it up in multiple memos, e.g. one per month
Research questions List and descriptions of your research questions memo

Notes for team members Things you notice during the analysis and that you want to discuss with your for team
team
Ideas As a place to collect ideas that arise during analysis memo
On the code system Notes on the code system like ideas on code refinement; ideas for potential memo
categories / higher order codes / sub codes; notes to yourself where you still
see areas of improvement
To-do-memo A general memo on things that are still on the to-do-list memo
Interpretations / answers to Memos can be used as a place for writing-up analysis. Use a quotation analysis
research questions comment for interpretations on single data segments and memos for
interpretations across a larger range of quotations, e.g. a retrieval by code or
the results of more complex retrievals in the query tool, the results of a code-
cooccurence or code-document table, etc.
Writing Comments
As detailed in the table above, you can write comments for:
• projects • codes • networks
• documents • memos • links
• quotations • groups • relations
In the Entity Managers, the comment for a selected entity is displayed in the text pane below the list pane. You may edit the
text right there or you might prefer to open a full-fledged text editor (see Figure 256). For minor changes, or if you do not
need any formatting options, working in the text pane in the Entity Manager is quite comfortable.
Figure 256: Writing comments for quotations
Sa vi ng A Co mment
A comment is saved automatically whenever you select another entity in the list or when you close the window. Changes can
be explicitly saved at any time by y clicking on the S AVE icon at the top right of the text pane (see Figure 257).

Figure 257: Writing code comments
All text editors offer full rich text support.
Creating Memos
Memos can be created from the H OME TAB, or in the Memo Manager(see Figure 259).
To create a memo from the Home tab , open the drop-down menu of NEW ENTITIES and select FREE M EMO.
Enter a name for the new memo and click CREATE .
Figure 258: Creating a new memo
Depending on your last settings, the memo editor may open as floating or docked window. Figure 261 shows a floating editor.
If you want to change between floated and docked windows, see "Working With Docked And Floated Windows,"
ATLAS.ti will remember your last used settings.
Begin to write your memo. When you are done, click the Save button and close the window.
All memos are listed in the Memo Manager.
The Memo Manager
Figure 259: Memo Manager options
Open the Memo Manager by clicking on MEMOS in the H OME TAB . The Memo Manager offers the following options:

All options in the Memos ribbon are explained here: "Memo Manager Ribbon."
Figure 260: Set types in Memo Cha ngi ng The M emo Type
Manager
Memos can be organized, sorted and filtered by the type attribute. Several standard memo types are offered by ATLAS.ti:
commentary, memo and theory. You can add new types or modify existing ones. The default type is 'memo'.
To change the memo type or create a new one:
Select a memo and click on the S ET T YPE button.
Select one of the existing types to change the current one, or enter a new one in the field: Memo type.
Click the S ET T YPE button.
Figure 261: Rich text editor for memos
Openi ng An E xi s ti ng M emo
If you want to review or continue to work on a memo, double-click the memo either in the Project Explorer, the Memo
Manager or in the margin area if you have linked a memo to a quotation.
Li nki ng M emos
Memos can be linked to other memos, quotations and codes. When writing up your analysis, you probably come across
segments in your data (quotations) that nicely illustrate the points you are making in the memo. In order not to lose these
quotations, you can link the memo to them.
Figure 262: Create and set memo type

Different from hyperlinks (quotation-quotation links), memo-entity links cannot be named. See "First and Second-Class
Links" for further detail.
LINKING MEMOS T O QUOTATIONS

Drag and drop a memo from the Memo Manger or from the navigator onto a quotation (the highlighted area), or the
quotation bar in the margin area.
If you drop a memo onto a code in the margin area, the code will be replaced!.
Figure 263 Illustrates the various options. In the margin area, the memo link shows the magenta colored memo icon. In the
Memo Manager you see the Groundedness count going up if you successfully linked a memo to a quotation. See
"Groundedness And Density Counts For Memos" for more information.
Figure 263: Linking memos to quotations and codes
You can also link a quotation from the Project Explorer or the Quotation Browser to a memo via drag & drop.
Another option is to drag a quotation from the Quotation Manager to a memo in the Memo Manager to link the two; or vice
versa from the Memo Manager to the Quotation Manager.
REVIEWING LINKED QUOTATIONS

To review linked quotations, hold down the Ctrl key + double-click. Then the list of linked quotation opens.
Figure 264: Retrieving linked quotations (Ctrl+double-click)
LINKING MEMOS T O MEMOS

You can link two memos to each other via drag and drop in the memo manager, or by linking them in a network editor. See
"Linking Nodes" for further information. If you successfully linked a memo to a memo, the density count goes up. See
Groundedness And Density Counts For Memos"

You can also link a memo from the Project Explorer or the Memo Browser to a memo in the Memo Manager or margin area
via drag & drop. This also works the other way around.
LINKING MEMOS T O CODES

You can link a memo to a code in a network editor (see "Linking Nodes"), or via the various drag-and-drop operations:
You can link a memo from the Project Explorer or the Memo Browser to a code in the Code Manager or a floated Code
Browser via drag & drop. This also works the other way around, dragging a code from the Code Manager or floated Code
Browser to a memo in the Project Explorer or Memo Browser.
You know that the drag-and-drop operation was successful if you see the pop-up note confirming the operation and if you
see the density count for memos going up. See Groundedness And Density Counts For Memos."
Please note, of you drag-and-drop a memo on top of a code in the margin area you replace the code with the memo.
Groundedness And Density Counts For Memos

Groundedness indicates the number of quotation a memo is linked to.
Density indicates the number of memos and codes a memo is linked to.
Which entities are linked to the memo can be seen in the Project Explorer on the left or in a network.
Figure 265: Memo links in the Project Explorer
Vi ewi ng Memo Li nks i n a N etwo rk

You can look at the links you have created between memos and other entities in a network. Networks are explained in detail
in the section "Working With Networks." Below we only want to offer a preview of how you may want to integrate the
network function when working with memos.
The easiest way to open a network for a memo is to right-click on a memo (no matter where you are – you can select a
memo in the margin area, the Memo Manager or the navigator) and select OPEN NETWORK from the context menu.
Figure 266: Open a network on a memo (here a memo has been selected in the margin area)
Figure 266 Shows the memo 'RQ2: positive and negative effects of parenting' and its links to two quotations and four codes.

Figure 267: Memo-Link Network
Us i ng Memos a s Do cument
Memos can be assigned as documents to a project. You may want to consider this option if you want to code the memo. This
is how you do it.
Select a memo in the Memo Manager.
Select the CONVERT TO DOCUMENT button in the ribbon, or from the context menu.
The memo is now added to your list of documents. You can continue to use the memo as memo (this is different from
version 7, where a memo that was converted to a document could not longer be edited).
The memo comment is not transferred. It is treated independently of the comment that you may want to write for the
memo document.
Querying Data
All exercises described in this chapter are based on the sample project Children & happiness (stage 2). You can download
and import it if you want to follow along.
There are several ways to query data. You already learned the steps for a simple retrieval based on one code, and based on
multiple codes using the Boolean operators AND or OR (see "Retrieving Coded Data"). In the following, four further ways of
querying data are shown:
• Code-Document Table: Looking for code frequencies (and content) across documents or document groups
• Code-Cooccurence Explorer and Table: Looking for code cooccurences. You might also think of it as a cross-tabulation of
codes.
• Query Tool: Looking for combinations of codes using Boolean, proximity or semantic operators
• Global Filtering
Overview Of Analysis Tools

Codes-Primary-Documents-Table: This table is a cross-tabulation of codes or code groups by documents or document
groups. It shows how often a code (codes of a code group) has (have) been applied to a document or document group. See
"Code Document Table."
Co-occurrence tools: Different from the query tool, where the results are quotations, you can use the two co-occurrence
tools to find overlapping codes. The tree explorer list all codes on the first level of the tree and if there are more codes that
have been applied to the same or overlapping quotations, then you can open the tree branches to see those codes. If you
open the tree further, the associated quotations are shown. The second tool, the table explorer, shows a cross-tabulation of
codes and within the cells a frequency count of how often each pair of codes co-occurs and a coefficient that indicates the
strength of the relation between the two codes. The cells also provide access to the data behind them. See "Code Co-
Occurrence Tools."

QUERYING DATA 162
The Query Tool finds quotations based on a combination of codes like: "Show me all quotations where both Code A and Code
B have been applied." Such queries can also be combined with variables in form of documents or document groups. This
means that you can restrict a query to parts of your data like: "Show me all quotations where both Code A and Code B have
been applied, but only for female respondents between the age of 21 and 30." See "The Query Tool."
Smart Codes are stored queries. They can be reused and always reflect the current state of coding, e. g. after more coding
has been done or after coding has been modified. They can also be used as part of other query, thus, you can build complex
queries step by step. See "Working With Smart Codes ."
Smart Groups: Like smart codes, smart groups are stored queries based on groups. The purpose is to create groups on an
aggregate level. For instance, if you have groups for gender, age and location, you can create smart groups that reflect a
combination of these like all females from age group 1 living in city X (see "Working With Smart Codes ").
Global Filtering: Global filters allow you to restrict searches across the entire project. If you set a document group as global
filter, the results in the Codes-Document or Code-Cooccurence Table will be calculated based on the data in the filter and not
for the entire project. Global filters effect all tools, windows and also networks (see “Applying Global Filters For Data
Analysis“).
Available Operators For Querying Data

Knowing about the available operators is important when using the code-cooccurence tools, the query tool, for creating
smart codes and smart groups.
Set operators allow combinations of keywords according to set operations. They are the most common operators used in
information retrieval systems.
Semantic operators exploit the network structures that were built from the codes.
Proximity operators are used to analyze the spatial relations (e. g., distance, embeddedness, overlapping, co-occurrence)
between coded data segments.
• Before using the Code-Cooccurence Explorer or Table, you should be familiar with the "”Proximity Operators."
• If you want to create smart groups, you need to know about "Set Operators," especially how to use the operators AND
and OR.
• If you want to build queries or smart codes, you need to to know them all.
• To know about "Semantic Operators" helps to understand relation properties (see "Transitives Relationship") in
networks and how they can be queried.
Set O pera to rs
The following set operators are available: OR, AND, ONE OF and NOT.
OR, AND and ONE OF are binary operators which need exactly two operands as input. NOT needs only one operand. However,
the operands themselves may be of arbitrary complexity. Codes, code groups, or other smart codes can be used as operands:
"(A OR B) AND (NOT C AND D)."
ONE OF (Exactly one of the following is true): The ONE OF operator asks that "EXACTLY one of…" the conditions must
meet. It translates into everyday "either-or." Example: All quotations coded with EITHER 'Earth' OR 'Fire' (but not with both).
Figure 268: Available set AND (All of the following are true): The AND operator finds quotations that match ALL the conditions specified in the
operators query. This means you have applied two or more codes to the same quotation. Example: "All quotations coded with "Earth
AND Fire”. The AND operator is very selective and often produces an empty result set as it requires that the selected codes
have all been applied to exactly the same data segment. It produces best results when combined with less restrictive
operators or when the overall number of the available text segments is large.
OR (ANY of the following are true): The OR operator does not really match the everyday usage of "OR." Its meaning is "At
least one of…," including the case where ALL conditions match. The OR operator retrieves all quotations that are coded with
any of the codes used in the expression. Example: "All quotations coded with "Earth OR Fire” will produce a result list that
contains all quotations coded with 'Earth' and all quotations coded with 'Fire'.
NOT (None of the following are true): The NOT operator tests for the absence of a condition. Technically, it subtracts the
findings of the non-negated term from all data segments available. Given 120 quotations in the project and 12 quotations
assigned to code 'Fire', the query "NOT Fire” retrieves 108 quotations - those which are not coded with 'Fire'. Of course, the
operator can be used with an arbitrary expression as in the argument "NOT (Earth OR Fire)" which is the equivalent of
"neither Earth nor Fire."
Figure 269: Boolean queries
depicted as Venn diagrams Venn diagrams are descriptive schemes for illustrating the different set operations associated with Set operators.
Sema nti c Opera to rs

The operators in this section exploit code-code links that have been previously established by linking codes via drag-and-drop
in the Code Manager, or in a network (see "Working With Networks" and "Linking Nodes." While Boolean-based queries are
extensional and simply enumerate the elements of combined sets (e. g., Love OR Kindness), semantic operators are
intentional, as they already capture some meaning expressed in appropriately linked concepts (e. g., All Children of code
(POSITIVE ATTITUDES)).

QUERYING DATA 163
The UP operator looks at all directly linked codes and their quotations at higher levels - all parents of a code.
The DOWN operator traverses the network from higher to lower concepts, collecting all quotations from any of the sub
codes. Only transitive code-code relations are processed; all others are ignored (see "Transitives Relationship").
When building a terminology from your codes, use the ISA relation for sub-term links.
Like the OR operator, the DOWN operator may produce large result sets. However, because you make use of purposefully
established links, the "precision" is likely better as compared to using OR. The SIBLING operator finds all quotations that are
connected to the selected code or any other descendants of the same parent code. Example: "All quotations coded with Love
or any other Positive Attitude, here: kindness (Figure 270 below).
Figure 270: A hierarchy of concepts suitable for semantic retrieval
Given such a network, the following queries would be possible:

All children of code 'Positive Attitude' => {Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5}
All children of code 'Negative Attitude' => {Q6, Q7, Q8}
All children of Code 'Attitude' => {Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8}
Siblings of code 'Positive Attitude' => {Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8}
Siblings of code 'Negative Attitude' => {Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8}
Pro xi mi ty O pera to rs
Proximity describes the spatial relation between quotations. Quotations can be embedded in one another, one may follow
another, etc. The operators in this section exploit these relationships. They require two operands as their arguments. They
differ from the other operators in one important aspect: Proximity operators are non-commutative. This property makes their
usage a little more difficult to learn.
Figure 271: Proximity operators
Non-commutativity requires a certain input sequence for the operands. While "A OR B" is equal to "B OR A," this does not
hold for any of the proximity operators: "A FOLLOWS B" is not equal to "B FOLLOWS A." When building a query, always enter
the expressions in the order in which they appear in their natural language manifestation.
Another important characteristic for these operators is the specification of the operand for which you want the quotations
retrieved. "A WITHIN B" specifies the constraint, but you must also specify if you want the quotations for the As or the Bs.
This is done implicitly by the sequence. The code (or term) that is entered first is the one in which you are interested. If B's
quotations are requested, you have to enter "B ENCLOSES A" using the query language described below.
E MBEDDING OPERATORS
The embedding operators describe quotations that are contained in one another and that are coded with certain codes.
Quotations enclosing quotations: A ENCLOSES B retrieves all quotations coded with A that contain quotations coded with
B.
Quotations being enclosed by quotations: A being enclosed by B (WITHIN) retrieves all quotations coded with A that are
contained within data segments coded with B.

QUERYING DATA 164
Figure 272: Visualizing the spatial relations between segments
For example, if you want to retrieve all segments for 'hard work but: fulfillment' related to the code '#fam: have children',
you would need to enter the query as follows (Figure 273):
Figure 273: An example WITHIN query
If you were to enter the query the other way around (i.e., the code 'fam: have children' on the left hand side), the query tool
would not deliver any results. If you are however interested in reading all quotations coded with '#fam: have children' that
contain segments coded with 'hard work but: fulfillment', the query would need to look as follows:
Figure 274: An example ENCLOSES query
You always need to enter the code whose content you are most interested in on the right-hand side of the query.
OVERLAP OPERATORS
The overlap operators describe quotations that overlap one another:
Overlaps (quotation overlapping at start): A OVERLAPS B retrieves all quotations coded with A that overlap quotations
coded with B
Overlapped by (quotations overlapping at end): A OVERLAPPED BY B retrieves all quotations coded with A that are
overlapped by quotations coded with B.
THE CO-OCCURRENCE OPERATOR

Often when interested in the relation between two or more codes, you don't really care whether something overlaps or is
overlapped by, or is within or encloses. It this is the case, you simply use the COOCCUR operator. Co-occur is essentially a
short-cut for a combination of the four proximity operators discussed above, plus the operator AND. AND is a set operator,
but also finds cooccurrence, namely all coded segments that overlap 100%.

QUERYING DATA 165
Figure 275: Example of a cooccurence query
The query shown in Figure 275 retrieves all quotations that are coded with '#fam: 2 or more children' that cooccur with
quotations coded with codes in the code group 'effects of parenting positive' in whatever way.
The more general cooccurrence operator is quite useful when working with transcripts. In interviews, people often jump back
and forth in time or between contexts, and therefore it often does not make much sense to use the very specific embedding
or overlap operators. With other types of data they are however quite useful. Think of video data where it might be
important whether action A was already going on before action B started or vice versa. Or if you have coded longer sections in
your data like biographical time periods in a person's life and then did some more fine-grained coding within these time
periods. The WITHIN operator comes in very handy in such instances. The same applies when working with pre-coded survey
data where all questions are automatically coded by ATLAS.ti. Using the WITHIN operator you can ask for instance for all
quotations coded with 'topic x' WITHIN 'question 5'.
A DJACENCY OPERATORS
The distance operators describe a sequence of disjointed quotations.
Quotations following quotations: A FOLLOWS B retrieves all quotations coded with A that follow quotations coded with B.
Quotations preceding quotations: A PRECEDES B retrieves all quotations coded with A followed by quotations coded with
B. Currently the base unit is 1 (character or second). In future versions you will be able to specify a user-defined distance.
Code Document Table

The table contains either a frequency count for each code or code group per document or document group, or a word count of
the coded segments.
A useful application is a comparison across different groups of documents for a particular category of codes. Thus, you are
likely to create such a table if you have a certain research question in your mind.
Figure 276: Opening the Code-Document-Table
Openi ng The To o l
To open the tool, select the ANALYZE tab and click CODES-DOCUMENT -T ABLE .
A N E XAMPLE QUERY
In the following we present an example query based on the Children & Happiness - stage 2 sample project. If you want to
follow along, the project can be downloaded here.
In the example we compare statements about positive and negative effects of parenting across two documents. The
documents represent comments from readers of a parenting blog and from readers of an article that was published in the
New York Time Magazine on the topic of children and happiness.
After opening the tool, select codes or code groups and documents or documents groups to populate the cells in the table.
To select an item, you need to click the check-box. In front of it. It is also possible to select multiple items via the
standard selection techniques using the Ctrl or Shift-key. After highlighting multiple items, push the space bar to
activate the check boxes of all selected items, or right click and chose CHECK SELECTED .

QUERYING DATA 166
The context menu in each selection list facilitates selection. See Figure 277.
To generate the table in Figure 279, all codes with the prefix 'effects pos” were selected. Entering a prefix in the Search field
above the selection lists will facilitate finding the items you are interested in.
Further the two documents D3 and D5 were selected.
In the ribbon, the option Codes as Rows was set.
Figure 277: Context menu of selection lists
Figure 278: Code Document Table
The results in the table cells show how often each selected code was applied in each document (= the number codings). If you
click on a cell in the talbe, the quotation content is shown. You can select between list or preview option. In addition, it is
possible to export the quotations from there, currently in Excel format.
Next to each code, you see how often the code was applied in total in the entire project. If you select a code group, you see
the total number of codings for all codes in the code group. Below the documents, you see the total number of quotations in
each document. If you select a document group, the number of quotations plus the number of documents in each group is
shown.
This additional information allows you to better evaluate the numbers inside the table cells. If the value in the table cell is 10,
but the code overall was applied 100 times, this leads to a different interpretation as if the code was only applied 12 times in
the entire project.
When looking across documents, the total number of quotations gives you a hint whether it is better to normalize the data.
The same applies when comparing document groups. The number of documents in a group in combination with the total
number of quotations gives you an indication whether normalization will give you a better comparison. See “Normalization
and Relative Frequencies in the Code-Document Table.“
Co de-Do cument Tab l e O ptio ns
Figure 279: Code-Document Table ribbon
Show Lists: If you only want to see the table and not the selection lists, deactivate this option.
Refresh: If the table is open and you change some coding, you can click the 'Refresh' option to update the results.
Row Totals: Display the row total table
Column Totals: Display the column total in the table
Normalize: If documents are of unequal length, or document groups are of unequal size, you can normalize the data. This
means the number of codings per documents that are selected for the table are adjusted. As base the document with the
highest number of codings for the selected codes is used. For example, if you compare two documents and the total number

QUERYING DATA 167
of codings for the first document is 100 andfor the second document it is 50, then all codings of the selected codes for the
second document are multiplied by 100/50 = 2. Below an example is shown.
Binarize: This option reduces the table to the information whether a code, or codes of a code group, occurs or do not occur in
a document or a document group. If they occur a black dot is shown; if not, the cell is empty. When you export the table to
Excel, the dots are 1s and the empty cells are 0s.
Absolute Frequencies: Display number of quotation occurrence per code or codes of a code group.
Column Rel.-Frequencies: Display relative frequencies based on the column codes. The total of each column will add up to
100%. See below for a more detailed description.
Row Rel.-Frequencies: Display relative frequencies based on the row codes. The total of each row will add up to 100%. See
below for a more detailed description.
Table Rel.-Frequencies: Display relative frequencies based on all codes used in the table. The totals of all row and column
codes will add up to 100%. See below for a more detailed description.
Count Codings: Count the number of times a code has been applied to a quotation. Please note, The number of codings can
be higher than the number of quotations as you can apply multiple codes to one quotation.
Count Words: Count the words of the quotations coded by code or codes of a code group.
Compress: This is a quick way to remove all rows or columns that only show empty cells. This is the same as manually
deactivating codes or documents that yield no results. Thus, you cannot “uncompress” a table.
Codes as Rows: Display all selected codes / code groups in the rows of the table.
Codes as Columns: Display all selected codes / code groups in the columns of the table.
Details: You can deactivate the quotation count that is shown after each code/code group, or below each document /
document group. Currently it is still included when you export the table to Excel.
Export: You can export the table to Excel, as plain text file, and as graphic file (see Figure 278).
V IEW OPTIONS
Figure 280: Code-Documen Table View

options
Autosize Columns: Adjust the size of the columns automatically so that the full label is shown.
Freeze first Column: Set if you do not want the auto size option to affect the first column.
Set Column Size: You can manually set the column size. 100 means that the column is as wide as the full label.
No rma l iz a ti o n and Rel a ti ve Freq uenci es i n the Co de-Do cument Tab l e

Relative frequencies are useful for comparing code distributions across or within groups (cases) as percentages are easier to
comprehend. If documents are of unequal length, or if document groups have an unequal number of members, it is
recommended to normalize the counts as absolute counts may distort the results.
W ITHIN G ROUP COMPARISON - C OLUMN R ELATIVE F REQUENCIES

In the example below the two document groups gender::female and gender::male are compared. As indicated by the red
numbers (not displayed by ATLAS.ti), there are more females than males. Thus, for a comparison across groups we need to
normalize the data. For comparing the distribution of codes within a group, this is not necessary. We can use the column
relative frequencies for this.
Which relative frequency count you select depends on how you display the table. If the two document groups were listed
as rows and the codes as columns, you would need to us row relative frequencies for a within group comparison.

QUERYING DATA 168
Figure 281: Code-Document Table displaying absolute counts and column relative frequencies
You must read this table from top to bottom along the columns. It shows the distribution of the selected codes within the
two document group. The results of the table could be summarized as follows: As reasons for not having children, women
have mostly mentioned "self-centered" (58%) and "being there for others" (25%). For men, “self-centered” was also the
main reason (60%), followed by "responsibility" (20%) and "not worth the trade-off" and "state of the world" (both 10%).
Apart from the fact that these data are completely fictitious, this summary shows that percentages can inflate the results
quite a bit. There is only one quote for "not worth the trade-off" and "state of the world". In terms of percentage, it looks like
Figure 282: Normalized data
a lot more. Use this option with care. It is very useful for larger data sets and if you have a higher number of quotations.
A CROSS G ROUP COMPARISONS - R OW RELATIVE FREQUENCIES

To compare the distribution across the two groups, we get more accurate results if we normalize the data first as there are 13
female respondenst and only 11 male respondents. Also the total number of quotations in the female group is higher.
Figure 282shows the absolute frequencies of the codings after normalization. The codings for the document group
gender::male have been multiplied by 12/10 = 1,2 so that the totals for both groups are the same.
For an easier comparison of the two groups, relative row frequencies can be calculated:
Figure 283: Code-Docuement Table with relative row frequencies
This table must be read from left to right. It allows you to compare the application of codes across documents or document
groups. If we for example compare males and females with regard to how often they mentioned “self-centered” as reasons
for not having children, than males mentioned it slightly more (50,7% as compared to 49,3% for females). The absolute
count would let us conclude that they mention is slightly less (6 times as compared to 7 times for women).

QUERYING DATA 169
Let's consider one more example. Document 3 is about twice as long as document 5 in the Children & Happiness sample
project. Thus, the number of codings regarding a specific topic can be expected to be higher as well in document 3. If we
compare how often positive and negative effects of parenting were mentioned in both documents, normalizing the data will
give a more accurate picture.
Figure 284: Effects of noramlization
Looking at the data without normalization it looks like that the readers of the NYTM article mention much fewer positive and
negative effects of parenting. After normalization, this interpretation needs to be adjusted. The reader of the NYTM article
mentioned more negative effects of parenting as compared to the readers of parenting blog (55% as compared to 45%) and
only slightly less positive effects (47% as compared to 53%).
TOTAL R ELATIVE F REQUENCIES

If you select total relative frequencies, the calculation is based on the total number of codings all all selected codes in the
table. In the example below, these are 178. When comparing how much readers of the parenting blog and the NYTM article
have written about reason for having and not having children, then the distribution is as follows: readers of the parenting
blog have given 68 / 178 = 60% of the reasons for having children and 32% of the reasons for not having children: readers of
the NYTM article have contributed 44% of the reasons for having children and 44% of the reasons for not having children
(the data have been normalized). Thus, comparatively, the readers of the NYTM articles have given quite a bit more reasons
for not having children, which fits the results reported above that they also wrote more about negative effects of parenting.
Figure 285: Display of table relative frequencies (data are normalized)
You can display all values: absolute frequencies and all relative frequencies in one table by selecting all options. It depends on
the purpose for which you want to use the table. For interpreting the data, it is probably easier if you look at each of the
relative frequency counts separately. But for a comprehensive report for an appendix, you may want to export the table with
all options included.
Bi na ri z e The Res ul ts O f A Co de-Do cument Tab l e

At times, you might only be interested to see whether a code occurs in a document or not. If so, you can activate the option
„Binarize“. The table will show black dots if a code or codes from a code group have been applied to a document or document
group. If it has not been applied, the cell is empty. If you export the table to Excel, the Excel tabel shows 1s and 0s. The row
and column totals count the number of yes / no occurences. Such a table can for instance be used for discriminant analysis
in a statistical program.

QUERYING DATA 170
Figure 286: Binarized Code-Document Table
The exported table looks as follows:
Figure 287: Binarized Code-Document Table exported to Excel
Code Co-Occurrence Tools

The Code Cooccurrence tools allows to ask a different type of questions. Using this tool, you can ask ATLAS.ti to show you all
codes that cooccur across all of your primary documents. The result is a cross-tabulation of all codes.
As compared to the Query Tool where the user has to determine and select codes or code groups and the appropriate
operator, the Co-occurrence Explorer by default looks for all codes that co-occur in the margin area combining the operators
WITHIN, ENCLOSES, OVERLAPS, OVERLAPPED BY and AND.
Code Cooccurrences can be displayed in a tree view ("Code Co-Occurrence Explorer," or as a data matrix ("Code Co-Occurrence
Table "). The Explorer in addition to code cooccurences also displays documents and their quotations and codes.
Co de Co -O ccurrence E xplo rer

To open the tool, select the ANALYZE tab and click COOC EXPLORER.
Figure 288: How to open the Code Cooccurence Explorer

QUERYING DATA 171
The Code-Cooccurence Explorer can also be loaded from the Home tab into the navigator on the left hand side by
clicking on the drop-down arrow of the Navigator button.
Figure 289: Code Co-Occurrence Explorer after opening
After opening the tool, you only see the root objects.
Open the branches by clicking on arrow in front the root for Codes or Documents.
You will see the list of codes on the first level, if you expand the tree further, you see all co-occurring codes, and on the third
level the quotations.
When you open the Documents branch, you see all project documents on the first level, followed by codes that have been
applied to the document on the second level and the quotations coded with those codes on the third level.
Expand: If you select Codes, you can automatically expand to the code level, the cooccurence level or the quotation level.
If you select Documents, you can automatically expand to the document level, the cooccurence level or the quotation level.
Figure 290: Automatically expand to various levels
Collapse: Collapse all levels back to the root.

Word List: Create a word list of a selected entity. Multiple selections by holding down the Shift-key are possible.
Word Cloud: Create a word cloud of a selected entity. Multiple selections by holding down the Shift-key are possible.
Auto Coding: Thus button is only active if you select a document. Multiple selections are not possible.
C ODE CO-OCCURRENCE T REE
Figure 291: Code Co-Occurrence Tree expanded to the co-occurrence level
In the above example, you can see all codes that cooccur with the code 'source (of happiness): children'. We can see that it
was mentioned by people commenting on the blog or the NYTM article, by those with children (1 or 2 children), by female
respondents mentioning some effects of parenting and some reasons for having children, plus as additional source of
happiness 'relationships'.
To see the data that were coded with the co-occurring codes, you can either double-click the code- all quotations coded
with that code are opened in a list – or you can expand the tree to the quotation level (see Figure 292):

QUERYING DATA 172
Figure 292: Expanded code cooccurence tree to the quotation level
With a double-click on a quotation, it is displayed in the context of the document.

In the section "Number Of Hits And Number Of Involved Quotations" it is explained how to interpret the listed quotations. If
you want a count of the number of quotations that co-occur, we recommend to use the Code Co-Occurrence Table .
We recommend to use the Code Co-occurrence Explorer to get a quick overview where there might be interesting
overlaps in your data. For accessing the quotations of co-occurring codes, the Code-Cooccurence Table is better suitable.
D OCUMENT TREE
The document tree shows all codes that have been applied to a document. If you expand the tree further, you see the
quotation coded by these codes. The example shown in Figure 293 compares the coding of case 2 and case 3, which are
responses to two survey questions.
Figure 293: Exploring documents and their coding
Co de Co -O ccurrence Ta b l e
The Co-occurrence Table in comparison to the Explorer shows the frequencies of co-occurrence in form of a matrix similar to a
correlation matrix that you may know from statistical software.
To open the tool, select the ANALYZE tab and click Codes-Document-Table.
Figure 294: How to open the Code Co-occurrence Table
Next, as indicated on the screen, you need to select the codes that you want to relate to each other:

QUERYING DATA 173
Figure 295: Context menu of selection lists
As soon as you select at least one row code and one column code, the table fills with content. The results are displayed
immediately:
Figure 296: Code-Cooccurence Table ready to be filled with content
The context menu in each selection list facilitates selection. See Figure 295.
To select an item, you need to click the check-box in front of it. It is also possible to select multiple items via the
standard selection techniques using the Ctrl or Shift-key. After highlighting multiple items, push the space bar to
activate the check boxes of all selected items, or right click and chose CHECK SELECTED FROM the context menu.

QUERYING DATA 174
RESULTS OF A C ODE CO-OCCURRENCE QUERY
Figure 297: Rsults of a code co-occurence analysis
The number in the cell indicates the number of hits, how often the two code co-occur. See "Number Of Hits And Number Of
Involved Quotations" for more information.
If you click on a cell, the corresponding row and column codes and their quotations are displayed at the bottom of the
window.
You can change between list and preview mode and you have an option to export the quotations. If you double-click on a
quotation, you can view it in the context of the document.
C ODE CO-OCCURRENCE T ABLE OPTIONS
Figure 298: Code Co-occurrence Table options
Color: You can choose among three colors for the table cells ( blue, red and green) and no coloring. If you select a color, the
table cells are colored in different shades. The lighter the color, the higher the number in the cell.
Show count: Show the number of co-occurrences (=number of hits, see below).
Show Coefficient: The c-coefficient can only be meaningfully interpreted with larger data sets, or a large number of
quotations per case, e.g. if you code video data very fine-grained. Therefore it can be activated or deactivated. See "C-
Coefficient" for more detail.
Cluster quotations: If you want to count embedded quotations as only one count (compare "Embedding Operators"),
activate this option.
Compress: This is a quick way to remove all rows or columns that only show empty cells. This is the same as manually
deactivating codes that yield no results. Thus, you cannot “uncompress” a table.
Rows => Columns: Select to switch row and column codes.
Auto Size Columns: Adjust the size of the columns automatically so that the full label is shown.
Freeze first column: Set if you do not want the auto size option to affect the first column.

QUERYING DATA 175
Set Column Size: You can manually set the column size. 100 means that the column is as wide as the full label.
Details: If activated, you see the total number of times the code has been applied to a quotation. This helps you to better
evaluate the numbers in each cell. The interpretation is likely different if two codes co-occur 10 times, if each of the codes
have been applied 50 or only 15 times.
Export: You can export the table to Excel (see Figure 299). If 'Show Count' is selected, only the number of co-occurrences are
exported. If 'Show Coefficient' is selected, only the c-coefficient and not the absolute number of hits are exported. If you
have selected both, both are exported:
Figure 299: Excel export of the code co-occurrence table
NUMBER OF H ITS A ND N UMBER OF I NVOLVED QUOTATIONS

The co-occurrence frequency does not count single quotations it counts co-occurrence „events." If a single quotation is coded
by two codes, this would count as a single co-occurrence. In case of overlap, thus when each of the two quotations is coded
by one of the codes, this also counts as a single co-occurrence. Therefore two lists of quotations are displayed when you
select a cell: the quotations of the column code and the quotations of the row code.
Figure 300: Quotations resulting from two co-occurring codes
The second co-occurrence is a 100% overlap, thus an AND occurrence as the two codes code the same quotation: 3:32.
Figure 301: Code-Cooccurence in the margin
The first and third cooccurence is an overlap as the quotation Ids are different for both codes. In the context of the data, the
overlaps for the third co-occurrence is as shown in Figure 301. Quotations 3:317 is embedded in the larger quotation and
3:236):
if you select one of the co-occurring quotations, it is highlighted. If you select the corresponding second one, the boundary of
the second one is shown by the two orange dots.
The number of quotations can also be different in each list. This is the case if one code occurs two or more times within
another one.
C-C OEFFICIENT
The c-coefficient indicates the strength of the relation between two codes similar to a correlation coefficient. This option can
be activated in the ribbon of the Code Co-occurence Table. The calculation of the c-coefficient is based on approaches
borrowed from quantitative content analysis. The range of the c-coefficient is between 0: codes do not co-occur, and 1: these
two codes co-occur wherever they are used. It is calculated as follows:
c = n12/(n1 + n2 – n12)

QUERYING DATA 176
n12 = co-occurrence frequency of two codes c1 and c2, whereby n1 and n2 are their occurrence frequency
Figure 302: Code Co-occurence Table with c-coefficient
Depending on your coding, you may experience the following:

• Distortion due to unequal frequencies: The frequency of the row code is more than 5 x higher than the frequency of the
column code or vice versa.
• Out of range: The C-index exceeds the 0 - 1 range it is supposed to stay with.
DISTORTION DUE TO UNEQUAL FREQUENCIES

An inherent issue with the C-index and similar measures is that it is distorted by code frequencies that differ too much. In
such cases the coefficient tends to be much smaller than the potential significance of the cooccurrence. For instance, if you
had coded 100 quotations with code 'have children' and 10 with 'effects on career' and you had 5 co-occurrences:
n_have children = 100, n_effects on career = 10, n_have children-effects on career = 5
c = 5/(100 + 10 - 5) = 5/105 = 0.048

A c index of only 0.048 may slip your eye easily, although code 'effects on career' appears in 50% of all its applications with
code 'have children'. Looking from code 'have children' only 5% cooccur with code 'effects on career'.
If the ratio between the codes frequencies exceeds a threshold of 5, the yellow light goes on in the cell. So whenever a cell
shows the yellow marker it should invite you to look into the co-occurrences of this cell despite a low c-index.
Figure 303: Display of unequal ratios
Figure 304: Mouse-over display of ratio
When you hover with the mouse over a cell, a pop-up displays the ratio of the two codes.
OUT OF RANGE
The c-index (structurally resembling the Tanimoto and Jaquard Coefficient, which are similarity measures) assumes separate
non-overlapping text entities. Only then can we expect a correct range of values.
However, ATLAS.ti's quotations may overlap to any degree. Overlaps would only then bear no problem if there wasn't any
„coding redundancy. Let's look at a few scenarios.

QUERYING DATA 177
Example 1: Two differently coded quotations overlap, we assume no more quotations available. Let P1 be a textual
document, q1 and q2 = quotations, and a,b = codes. q1 is coded with a, q2 is coded with b.
Figure 305: Out of range example 1
Using the formula: c := n_ab/(n_a + n_b) – n_ab, we get:

n_ab = 1 one co-occurrence of a and b
n_a = 1, n_b = 1 a and b each code exactly one quotation.
c = 1/(1 + 1 – 1) = 1
Such a scenario results in the maximum co-occurrence of 1 !
Example 2: q1 is coded with both codes a and b, the overlapping quotation q2 is coded with b
Figure 306: Out of range example 2
n_ab = 2. q1 alone counts for a co-occurrence event and the overlapping q1*q2 for another.
n_a = 1, n_b = 2
c = 2/(1 + 2 – 2) = 2!!
This results in a value of twice the allowed maximum. Thus, the C index is not appropriate to correctly represent co-
occurrence in redundantly overlapping texts. If the c-coefficient exceeds 1, you need to do some cleaning up and eliminate the
redundant codes (see “Finding Redundant Codings .“). ATLAS.ti currently does not correct such redundancies automatically.
In order not to present a misleading image, all cells displaying an out-of-range number (> 1) show a red dot in the top right
corner.
Figure 307: Out of range indication
Correcting the redundant overlaps, could for example look like this:
Figure 308: Out of range example 2 normalized
We get three quotations. q1' coded with a and b, q1*2 coded with a and b, q2' coded with b:
n_ab = 2, n_a = 2, n_b = 3

c = 2/(2 + 3 – 2) = 2/3 = 0.67
The result is within the allowed range and it correctly takes into account that of the three possible co-occurrence events only
two apply. a.
When the mouse hovers over a cell, a pop-up displays the ratio of the two codes.

QUERYING DATA 178
Summary Of Color Indicators

Yellow dot: Unequal quotation frequencies - the ration between the frequencies of the code and row code exceeds the
threshold of 5.
Red dot: The C-index exceeds the 0 - 1 range.
Orange dot: The orange circle is simply a mixture of the red and yellow conditions.
This video tutorial explains the co-occurrence concept in ATLAS.ti and shows how to examine them qualitatively and
quantitatively.
A PPLICATION
The two Co-occurrence Tools are very useful for many kinds of analysis. But not all options make sense for all type of data. If
you have a smaller data set like a typical interview study with 10 to 20 respondents, then taking a look at the frequency
count for exploratory purposes is likely to provide some new ideas and where to pursue the analysis.
The c-coefficient is useful when working with larger amounts of cases and structured data like open-ended questions from
surveys. If you use the c-index, pay attention to the additional colored hints. As your data base is qualitative, the c-
coefficient is not the same as for instance a Pearson correlation coefficient and therefore also no p-values are provided.
In any case, co-occurrence measures need to be clearly understood, not only for the mechanical but also for semantic issues
involved in their meaningful interpretation (e. g., mixed application of codes with different level like broader and sub terms).
Furthermore, you need to be aware of the artifacts enforced by a table approach like being reduced to a pairwise comparison.
Higher order co-occurrences which would take more than two codes into account need more elaborate methods.
The Query Tool

Video Tutorial: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows-The Query Tool
The Query Tool is used for retrieving quotations using the codes they were associated with during the process of coding. This
You need the Query Tool is different from a text search: To search for occurrences of text that match a specified pattern or string. For this you need to
for queries using more use "Project Search."
than a single code.
The simplest retrieval of this kind - search for quotations with codes- is what you frequently do with the Code Manager:
double-clicking on a code retrieves all its quotations (see "Simple Retrieval Using The Code Manager Or Navigator"). This may
already be regarded as a query, although it is a simple one. The next level are the "Simple AND And OR Queries In The
Quotation Manager." The Query Tool is more complex in that it can be used to create and process queries that include a
variety of combinations of codes.
Figure 309: Opening the Query Tool
A query is a search expression built from operands (codes and code groups) and operators (e. g. NOT, AND, OR, etc.) that
define the conditions that a quotation must meet to be retrieved (e. g., all quotations coded with both codes A and B).
By selecting codes or code code groups and operators, a query can be built incrementally which is instantaneously evaluated
and displayed as a list of quotations. This incremental building of complex search queries gives you an exploratory approach
toward even the most complex queries.
To open the tool, select the ANALYZE tab and click QUERY T OOL .

QUERYING DATA 179
Figure 310: The query tool window
The query tool ribbon contains all "Available Operators For Querying Data ," plus a few options that help you build a query like
adding a code, changing an operator or saving a smart code. These options are explained below when explaining how to build
and edit queries.
At the left-hand side you see the list of codes and code groups that can be used as operands in a query. The main space is
reserved for displaying the query and the results. Remember the results of a query in the query tool are always quotations.
At the top right-hand side you find the report button to export the results of a query.
The tool is best understood when actually seeing how queries are build. Therefore in the following a few example queries are
shown.
Ho w To Bui l d A Query Us i ng Set O pera to rs

Question: Find all quotations where people talk about cultural embedded believes and focusing illusion as reasons for having
children.
First step: Select the operator OR in the ribbon
Figure 311: Adding a code to the query
Second step: Select the code 'reason for hc: cultural embedded believes' in the list of codes and double-click, or click on the
button ADD CODE in the ribbon. Drag-and-drop is currently not supported. Note the change in the query term.
Third step: Click on the second place holder to make it the active node. You recognize an active note by its blue frame (see
left).
Select the code 'reason for hc: focusing illusion' in the list of codes and double-click, or click on the button ADD CODE in the
ribbon.
Figure 312: Query after

selecting the operator OR

QUERYING DATA 180
Figure 313: Full query term
Above the query you see the full query term:

Below you see the list of resulting quotations. The blue status bar shows the total number of quotations this query results in
(Figure 314). You can change between list and preview mode. Double-click to view a quotation in the context of the document
or export them to Excel.
Figure 314: OR query in the query tool
D ISPLAYING P ARTIAL R ESULTS

You can list the quotations of any element in the query. If you click on the code "reasons for hc: focusing illusion” only the
quotations of this code will be displayed in the result list. The currently active part of the query has a blue frame and the
number of resulting quotations is displayed in the status bar.
Figure 315: Displaying partial results
READING T HE R ESULTS
You can switch to preview mode. This option works well if your quotatoins are not long. For longer quotatoins, double-click a
quotation in the result list and read the quotation in context, or you create a report.

QUERYING DATA 181
V IEWING RESULTS I N CONTEXT

If you have a big screen you may want work with a floating query tool and place the query tool next to the ATLAS.ti main
editor to browse through the results. If your screen is smaller, it may be more convenient to dock the query tool window and
to place it into a second tab group. This way you can view the query tool and the documents side-by-side. See "Working With
Docked And Floated Windows" and "Working With Tabs And Tab Groups ."
Creating A Report
To export the data to Excel, you can click on the report button on the top right-hand side of the quotation list (see Figure
314).
to create a text report, click on the Report button in the ribbon. The drop-down menu offers the following options:
Report: This is a report that you can customize. It is explained in more detail in the section “Creating Reports." An example
is shown below.
List: Use this output for audio and video data that have no text content. Only the reference, the quotation ID and name are
included in the report. It can also be a useful option if you have started your analysis utilizing the quotation level, renaming
and commenting quotations instead of coding right-away
List With Comments: Same application as the List output including comments. If you have made extensive use of
comments to describe your data segment, this output option is useful.
Full Content: Includes the full content of text and image quotations, plus the full quotation reference, any codes, memos
Figure 316: Report options
and hyperlinks that apply.
Content plus Comments: Includes the full content of text and image quotations including comments, the full quotation
reference, any codes, memos and hyperlinks that apply.
To create a report that contains the quotations show in the list of results in Figure 316, click the REPORT button.
Select 'Content' if you only want to read the quotations in full. Add 'Codes' if you want to see which other codes have been
applied to the quotations.
Click CREATE REPORT.
Figure 317: Create a customized report
Crea ti ng Do cument Gro ups Fro m Res ul ts

When you add documents to a project, it is easy to create document groups based on sample characteristics like gender,
ager, profession, location, etc. But at times, you first need to code the data to find relevant information like years of working
experience, special skills, attitudes about something, relationship to other people, etc. For this you need an option to create
document groups based on query results. E.g. you query all documents where people have mentioned that they have more
than 10 years of working experience. Based on in which document the quotations occur, ATLAS.ti creates a document group.

QUERYING DATA 182
Figure 318: Create document groups from results in the query tool
You can enter a name for the document group after clicking on the button New Document Group. The document group will
then be shown in the Project Explorer and the Document Manager:
Figure 319: New document group created based on a query result
Ho w To Bui l d A Query Us i ng Pro xi mi ty O pera to rs
Question: Find all quotations where people who have more than two children talk about how to define happiness.
First step: Select the operator Co-occurs in the ribbon
Second step: As we want to read only the segments where those with two children talk about how to define happiness,
we first need to select the code group 'definition happiness'. If we were to enter the code 'fam: 2 or more children' on the
right hand side, we would get get the entire response of all respondents with two children and not only the parts where
they talk about the definition of happiness. Compare "Proximity Operators."
Figure 320: Starting

with the operator
Figure 321: Adding the code to the query whose quotation we want to read

QUERYING DATA 183
If you got the operands the wrong way around, you can swap them by clicking on the Swap button in the ribbon.
Third step: Click on the second place holder to make it the active node. You recognize an active note by its blue frame (see
left). Select the code '#fam: 2 or more children' in the list of codes and double-click, or click on the button ADD CODE in the
ribbon.
The query results in six quotations.
Figure 322: COOCCUR query
Next, we want to show how to build a query that contains two operators. The question that should be examined is as follows:
Question: Do parents who report negative aspects of parenting also talk about positive aspects?
First step: Select the operator: Co-occurs
Second step: As for this query in the first step, we want all segments where parents write about negative effects of
parenting, select the '#fam: have children' code via a double-click to be entered in the node on the left hand side.
Figure 323:On the left-hand side select the code whose quotation you want to read
On the right-hand side, you enter the code group 'effects of parenting negative'.
Figure 324: On the right-hand side select the cooccurring code that
you are interested in
As we only want to find comments where parents both raise positive and negative issues around parenting, we need to
extend the query further:
Step 4: Make sure that the cooccurence node is the active element in the query. You will see a blue frame around it. Now
select the Co-occurs operator again.

QUERYING DATA 184
Figure 325: Extending the query
Select the code group 'effects of parenting positive' to complete the query.
Figure 326: Adding a further code to the query
The resulting number of quotations for this query is 7. Thus, seven respondents have written about both positive and
negative effects of parenting. You can review the results in context, or create a report if you prefer to read all quotations in
an editor.
Another option is to store the query as a smart code for further re-use:
Click on the S AVE SMART CODE button in the QUERY T OOL tab.
Enter a name for the smart code and click CREATE . If the query result is needed to answer a particular research question,
this could be reflected in the name, e.g. Research question 3: positive & negative views on parenting.
Figure 327: Smart codes can be recognized by the gray dot.
You can now review all quotations of this query at any time that is convenient, e.g. in the Code or Quotation Manager. Smart
codes can be recognized by the gray dot at the bottom left hand side of the code icon. See "Working With Smart Codes " for
further information.
Ho w To Bui l d A Query Us i ng Sema nti c O pera to rs

The use of semantic operators requires that you have linked codes to each other using transitive relations. See "Semantic
Operators" and "Transitives Relationship" for more detail.
An Example will be added later.
Ho w To Bui l d A Query Us i ng A Comb i na tio n of O pera to rs

With the following query we want to show you how you can exchange terms to modify the original question to examine
various aspects of it.

QUERYING DATA 185
Question: Find all blog comments where respondents express the opinion that children bring greater happiness, but at the
same time also report negative effects of parenting.
The resulting query should then be modified:
• to find blog comments where respondents express the opinion that children bring greater happiness and also write about
positive effects of parenting.
• to find blog comments here respondents express the opinion that children lower happiness and write about negative
effects of parenting.
• to find blog comments here respondents express the opinion that children lower happiness, but at the same time report
positive effects of parenting.
First step: Select the operator Encloses in the ribbon. On the left-hand side enter the code '#blog entry' and on the right-
hand side the code 'children: > happiness'
Figure 328: Finding all blog entries that contain segments coded with children:>happiness
Second step: As the blog entry should also contain comments on negative effects of parenting, we need to find matching
blog entries. This means we need to select the operator AND. The new node we use to enter a new query that finds the
matching blog entries that we are looking for.
Figure 329: Extending the query by adding an additional operator
Third step: Click on the new node to make it the active node. Select the ENCLOSES operator again.

QUERYING DATA 186
Figure 330: Building the query further
Figure 331: Entering a second query term for the AND operation
Fourth Step: On the left-hand side enter the code '#blog entry' and on the right-hand side the code group 'effects of
parenting negative', ATLAS.ti finds one quotation.
And this is the blog entry which fit the criteria, we have been looking for:
Figure 332: Result of the query
ROTATING T HE QUERY LAYOUT

You can rotate the layout of a query by clicking on the ROTATE LAYOUT button in the ribbon.

QUERYING DATA 187
Figure 333: Rotated query layout
MODIFYING E XISTING QUERIES

Next, we want to find all blog entries where respondent believe children make you happier and at the same time also write
about positive effects of parenting.
Figure 334: Modify a query by exchanging an operand or operator
Select the node with the code group 'Effects of parenting negative' and click on the DELETE button in the ribbon.
Click on the empty node so it is activated and select the code group "Effects of parenting positive'. ATLAS.ti finds 4 blog
entries this time.
The other two modifications look as follows – you exchange the code 'children: > happiness' with 'children: < happiness',
and also match it with blog entries that either contain comments on positive or negative effects of parenting:
Figure 335: Modify a query be exchanging single operands
Do cument And Gro up Co mpa ris o ns In The Query Too l

You can also use the query tool, if you want to restrict a search to a particular document or document group, e.g. because you
are interested in comparing male and female respondents based on what they have said about particular issue. The query can
be as simple as querying a single code in combination with a document or group, or you build a query first before you set a
scope.
As before, we demonstrate this feature by way of example. In the following exercise, we will only query a single code in
relation to either a document or document group.
Question: Find all quotations where respondents define happiness. Subsequently we would like to compare what people
wrote on the parenting blog (D3) and what people wrote who commented on the NYTM article (d4).
After starting the query tool, select the code group 'definition happiness' with a double-click. This retrieval results in 20
quotations that you see at the bottom right in the blue status line.

QUERYING DATA 188
To filter the result list by documents or document groups, switch to the Scope Tool ribbon and click on the button EDIT
S COPE.
After selecting the Edit Scope option, an additional region opens on the left-hand side.
As scope select document 3 is selected (double-click). This filters the list of quotations in the result pane at the bottom
right. Also the information in the blue status bar changes and the scope is added above the query term.
Figure 336: Query with scope
With the scope set to document D3, the number of resulting quotations is 11. In addition, ATLAS.ti provides the total number
of quotations of the term that you have set as scope (here: the 320 quotations of document D3). The term can be as simple
as just one document or document group. You can however also build a more complex scope using Boolean operators (AND,
OR, ONE OF and NOT).
To change the scope, click on the D ELETE button in the Scope Tool!. This resets the scope.
If you want to delete a scope, pay attention that you are in the Scope Tool and not the Query tool. If you click the Delete
button in the Query Tool, your query is deleted.
Working With Smart Codes

Smart Codes are a convenient way to store queries. They are very similar in look and feel to normal codes, with one important
difference: instead of "hardwired" connections to quotations.

QUERYING DATA 189
Figure 337: Codes with 'hardwired' linked quotations
Smart Codes store a query to compute their virtual references whenever needed.
They "automatically" change their behavior during the course of the analysis. If you have a Smart Code based on a query like
(Code A | Code B) COOCCUR Code C
and you add or delete quotations linked to either Code A, B or C, then the smart code will automatically be adjusted. Smart
Codes can be selected in code lists like any other code and they will display their quotations in an identical way.
Figure 338: Smart codes are not directly linked to quotations
Smart codes are displayed in the Code Manager just like regular codes and can be recognized by a gray dot at the bottom left
of the code icon.
The list of quotations associated with the Smart Code can be displayed with a double-click, just as for any other code.
Frequencies/density are only shown if the smart code has been activated at least one time during a session, e.g. with a
double-click in the Code Manager.
If you start a new session, an asterisk (*) replaces the frequency count. The reason for this is that a Smart Code is dynamic
and its density/frequency count changes as soon as you modify any of the codes contained in the query of the Smart Code.
For the same reason, Smart Codes are not displayed in the margin area.
Smart Codes can be used in code groups, networks, and, last but not least, as powerful operands in queries, allowing you to
incrementally build complex queries.
There is the possibility to create a regular code from a Smart Code. See "Creating Snapshot Codes."
Wha t Yo u Ca nno t Do Wi th Sma rt Co des

As Smart Codes are not directly associated with quotations, certain restrictions apply.
Coding: The most important constraint is that you cannot associate them with quotations directly. Therefore, Smart Codes
Smart codes cannot be are not presented when doing "code by list," and drag & drop onto data selections is prohibited.
used for coding.
Merging: Code Merge operations including Smart Codes are also not possible.
Prevent Cycles: If you created a Smart Code whose query contains a reference to a code group, you cannot assign this Smart
Code to the code group later. This would create a cyclic structure and is therefore disallowed.

QUERYING DATA 190
Crea ti ng Sma rt Co des

To create a Super Code, you must have already constructed a query using the "The Query Tool." Note that because Smart
Codes are 'intentional'. You can also create a valid and useful Smart Code with an empty results list (which might well change
in a later stage of your analysis).
Create a query in the query tool.
Click the S AVE SMART CODE button in ribbon.
Enter a name for the new Smart Code or click CREATE .

The newly created Smart Code immediately appears in the list of codes and can be used for new queries (and also for other
smart codes) right away.
Crea ti ng Sma rt Co des In The Q uo ta ti o n M ana ger

You can also create smart codes using an AND or OR combinations in the Quotation Manager. Here is an example:
The aim is to combine all comments written by those who either have no children yet or who do not want children.
Select the two codes '#fam: don't want children' and '#fam: don't have children yet' in the side-panel by holding down the
Ctrl-key.
In the yellow filter bar, select the operator ANY.
Figure 339: Creating a smart code in the Quotation Manager
Right-click on one of the selected codes and select the option CREATE SMART CODE from the context menu, or click on the
S MART CODE button in the ribbon.
Figure 340: Select Create Smart Code option from the context menu
Crea ti ng O red Sma rt Co des in the Co de Ma na ger

If you only need a simple OR combination or two or more codes a smart code, a quick way of doing it is in the Code Manager.
Open the Code Manager, select two or more codes, right-click and selec the CREATE S MART CODE option from the context
menu.

QUERYING DATA 191
Figure 341: Creating ORed smart codes in the Code Manager
E di ti ng Sma rt Co des
If you want to see the query behind a smart code, of if you want to modify the query, you can edit a smart code. To do so:
Open the Code Manager, select the Smart Code and click on the button EDIT SMART CODE .
This opens the query tool where you can review and modify the smart code.Figure 342 shows the smart code that is
shown to be created in Figure 341.
Figure 342: Editing a smart code
Crea ti ng Sna ps ho t Co des

A Snapshot Code is a normal code that records the current state of a Smart Code by way of "hard-wired" links to the derived
quotations. By creating a snapshot from time to time, you can analyze the development of a Smart Code.
Unlike the Smart Code, a code created by the snapshot is displayed in the margin area and can be used for further coding.
The default snapshot code names are suffixed with [SN<number>].
Open the Code Manager.
Select a Smart Code and click on the button CREATE S NAPSHOT in the ribbon.
Figure 343: A smart code and its snapshot

QUERYING DATA 192
Working With Smart Groups

Smart entities in ATLAS.ti are a convenient way to store queries. Smart Groups are very similar in look and feel to normal
groups, with one important difference: instead of "hardwired" connections to their members, Smart Groups store a query to
compute their virtual references whenever needed.
For example, if you have created a smart group "females + urban” and you add more data to your project that you assign to
groups like 'female', 'male', 'rural' and 'urban'. When you select the smart group 'female + urban', ATLAS.ti runs the
underlying query and displays all members that belong to this group.
You can create smart groups using the Set operators ANY or ALL (see also the section "Set Operators").
ANY: All items of all selected groups are included in the new a smart group. An example would be if you wanted to create a
document group that combines the two groups 'work experience 1 to 3 years' and 'work experience 4 to 6 years'. Or if you
want to combine the codes of two categories because you want to set them as filter. See "Applying Global Filters For Data
Analysis."
ALL: All common items of the selected groups are included in the new smart group (= all criteria must apply). An example
would be females from urban areas.
To create a new smart group, open an entity manager. See "Launching An Entity Manager."
Select the desired operator first. Click on the operator button, or right-click in the side panel and select CHANGE OPERATOR.
Next select the groups that you want to combine and the desired operator from the down down menu as shown in Figure
70.
Right-click on one of the selected groups and select the option NEW SMART G ROUP from the context menu. Accept the
suggested name or enter a new one and click CREATE .
Smart entities can be recognized by the little gray circle at the bottom left of the icon. See left.
Crea ti ng A Sna ps ho t O f A Sma rt Gro up

You can transform a smart group in a regular group by creating a snapshot. You can do this in the group manager.
Select the smart group in the Group Manager. Select the CREATE S NAPSHOT button from the ribbon.
Applying Global Filters For Data Analysis

Global filters are a powerful tool to analyze your data. As compared to local filters that you can invoke in each manager,
global filter have an effect on the entire project. If you set a document group as global filter, also the results of the code-
document table or the code-cooccurence table will also be effected. For example, if you cross-tabulate a code category
ACTION with another code category OUTCOME, you can see which actions are related to which outcomes for all of your
respondents. If you set the document group: 'gender: female' as global filter, the results of the table will change only
showing which actions are related to which outcome for all female respondents.
In a code document table, it allows you to combine two variables without having to create a smart group. Given the above
example, a code-document table including all ACTION codes by document groups “have children”, “do not have children”, the
results will show the quotation frequency of all action codes for 'female respondents with children' vs. 'female respondents
without children'.
In network, all entities that do not pass the filter criteria will be faded out. Or, if you select the 'import neighbor' or 'import
co-occurring' options, you can control the process by only importing entities that pass a given filter criteria.
An additional benefit is that you can focus your analysis on certain aspects of your project. All selection lists become shorter
and if you know that you only want to work with 5 out of your 15 categories for the moment, you create a code group that
only contains the codes that you want to work with at the moment and set this code group as global filter. Similarly you can
create document groups if you want to focus on only a sub set of your documents for a given analytic task.
Currently only groups can be set a global filter. Other entities will be added in the future. If you want to set a single
document or code as global filter, you need to create a group for it. This is a current work around until it is possible to
also set single entities as global filter.

APPLYING GLOBAL FILTERS FOR DATA ANALYSIS 193
Creating A Global Filter

Creating a global filter means creating a group:
• Document groups as global filter filter out documents and their quotations.
• Code groups as global filter filter out codes, and memo groups as global filter filter out memos.
Figure 344: Setting a global document filter
Setting Global Filters

Global filters can be set in the Project Explorer on the left and in each manager. Right click on a group and select the
option S ET GLOBAL FILTER .
Display Of Global Filters

Similar to the visualization of local filters, global filters are also indicated by a colored bar.
Figure 345: Display of global filters ATLAS.ti Win
• Global document filters are blue.

• Global quotations filters are orange.
• Global code filters are green.
• Global memo filters are magenta.
• Global network filters are purple
As mentioned above, document group filters have an effect on quotations. If you open the Quotation Manager and a
document group is set as global filter, you will see an orange global filter bar on top of the quotation list.
Examples
In Figure 353 the global filter is combined with a local code filter (beige colored bar). This results in the following query: Show
me all quotations of the code “reasons for nhc: self-centered” for all female respondents.

Figure 346: A global quotation filter combined with a local code filter
Figure 347: Network created with the support of global filters + filtered emphasize one area of interest (ATLAS.ti Mac)
Figure 347 Shows a network that has been created with the help of a global code filter. The question behind the network
was: Which positive and negative effects of parenting have been mentioned by those with 1, 2 or 3 children.
These were the steps to create the network:
The data are comprised of 140 comments to a parenting blog and a NYTM article Thus, there are many comments by
different people in one data file. Therefore demographics like gender or number of children was coded.
In order to filter out all other aspects, a code group was created that only contained the three attribute codes (#fam, 1 child,
#fam: 2 children, #fam: 3 or more children) + the effects of parenting codes. Subsequently this group was set as global
filters:
Figure 348: Activated global code filter
The next step was to open a network for each attribute code and to import all co-occurring codes. As the global filter was set,
only the 'effects of parenting' codes were imported.

Figure 349: Linking cooccurring codes
These were linked with the attribute codes:
Figure 350: Importing code neighbors
Based on these, a network with all three attribute codes was created. This was achieved by adding all attribute codes for
number of children into one network and importing all code neighbors:
Figure 166 shows the resulting network using the organic layout and poly-line rerouting option:

Figure 351: Network with all three attribute codes based on an organic layout and poly-line rerouting (ATLAS.ti Win)
Next, the global filter was changed to codes from the code group: 'Positive effects of parenting'. All other effects are faded
out in the background.
Figure 352: Network with global filter setting (ATLAS.ti Win)
Global Filters In The Code Co-occurrence Table

Figure 355 Shows two code co-occurrence tables. The first one shows the various opinions about the relationship between
children and happiness of those respondents with and without children that commented on the parenting blog. The second
table shows the same for those commenting on the New York Times Magazine article. If you deactivate the filter, you see
the results for the entire data set. This applies to the table as a whole and to the quotation list that you get per code at the
bottom of the window.

Figure 353: Effect of global filtering on code co-occurrence table
Global Filters In The Code Document Table

Figure 354 shows two Code Document Tables. Here the reasons mentioned for having and for not having children across
different educational levels and gender are compared.
Figure 354: Code Document Table with global filter setting

Activating / Deactivating Global Filters

Given the above example, if you want to see all quotations coded with “reasons for nhc: self-centered”, you click on the
check-box for the global filter.
Figure 355: Deactivated global filter
Removing A Global Filter

If you change a global filter, the currently active filter is automatically reset.
If you want to remove a filter completely, click on the X on the right. The Project Explorer in the navigation area offers a
convenient way to do so.
Figure 356: Removing global filters in the Project Explorer
Working With Networks

Visualization can be a key element in discovering connections between concepts, interpreting your findings, and effectively
communicating your results. Networks in ATLAS.ti allow you to accomplish all three of these important objectives. These
small segments of your larger web of analysis are modeled using the network editor, an intuitive work space that we also like
to think is easy on the eye.

WORKING WITH NETWORKS 199
Figure 357: An ATLAS.ti network
The word "network" is an ubiquitous and powerful metaphor found in many different fields of research and application. Flow
charts in project planning, text graphs in hypertext systems, cognitive models of memory and knowledge representation
(semantic networks) are all networks that serve to represent complex information by intuitively accessible graphic means.
One of the most attractive properties of graphs is their intuitive graphical presentation, mostly in form of two-dimensional
layouts of labeled nodes and links.
In contrast with linear, sequential representations (e. g., text), presentations of knowledge in networks resemble more
closely the way human memory and thought is structured. Cognitive "load" in handling complex relationships is reduced with
the aid of spatial representation techniques. ATLAS.ti uses networks to help represent and explore conceptual structures.
Networks add a heuristic "right brain" approach to qualitative analysis.
The user can manipulate and display almost all entities of a project as nodes in a network: quotations, codes, code group,
memos, memo groups, other networks, documents, document groups and also all smart entities. The following discussion
applies to all nodes regardless of their type. See "Node Types."
Video Tutorials: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows-Visualizing Linkages in Networks and ATLAS.ti 8 Windows-Creating and Displaying
Semantic Linkages
Nodes And Links

The term "network" is formally defined within graph theory, a branch of discrete mathematics, as a set of nodes (or
"vertices") and links. A node in a network may be linked to an arbitrary number of other nodes.
The number of links for any one node is called its degree; e. g., a node with a degree of zero is not linked at all. Another
simple formal property of a network is its order: the number of its nodes. You may make practical use of the degree of nodes
by using it as a sorting criterion in the codes list window. The column ‘Density' in the Code Manager represents the degree of
a code.
Di rected And No n-Di rected Li nks

Links are usually drawn as lines between the connected nodes in graphical presentations of networks.
Furthermore, a link between two nodes may be directed or not. A directed connection is drawn with an arrow. With directed
links, source and target nodes must be distinguished. The source node is where the link starts and the target node is where it
ends: the destination to which the arrow points.

Figure 358: Examples of directed and non-directed links
Links are created either implicitly (e. g., when coding a quotation, the quotation is "linked" to a code), or explicitly by the user.
See "Linking Nodes."
Strictly speaking, code-quotation associations ("codings") also form a network . However, you cannot name these links, the
code is simply associated with a quotation through the act of coding. In a network you can visualize these links (Figure 359).
In ATLAS.ti all unnamed links are referred to as second class links, all named links are referred to as first-class links.
Figure 359: Code -Quotation links
Fi rs t a nd Seco nd- Cl as s Li nks

First-class links are links based on relations. They are entities by themselves, with names, authors, comments, and other
properties. They are available for a code -code links and quotation-quotation links. The latter are also called hyperlinks. See
"Working With Hyperlinks."
Second-class links are links that do not have individual properties, e. g., the links between quotations and codes (Figure 359),
between codes and memos, between a group and its members.
Relations
ATLAS.ti allows you to establish named links to more clearly express the nature of the relationships between concepts. With
A default set of relations named links, you may express a sentence like "a broken leg causes pain" by two nodes (the source node "broken leg" and the
is provided. You may target node "pain") connected with a named link ("causes" or "is-cause-of").
define your own.
The name of a link is displayed in the network editor as a label attached to the link midway between the two connected
nodes. Six pre-set relations are available in ATLAS.ti. These standard relations can be substituted, modified, or
supplemented by user-defined relations.
ATLAS.ti Def a ul t Rela ti o ns

The default relations that come with the software are listed in the table below. C1 and C2 are source and target nodes,
respectively.

Relations are like "styles"

in a word processor.
Changing the style will
change all occurrences of
its usage, in this case: the
links
Figure 360: List of default relations
Some of these characteristics directly affect the display of links, while others affect processing (e. g., search routines,
automatic layout). A link between concepts is displayed in a network editor by a line with the relation's label. You can choose
from three different labels (name, short and symbolic).
The "formal attribute" affects both the display and processing capabilities of a relation. All transitive and asymmetric
relations are symbolized in the network editor with an arrow pointing toward the target code. Symmetric relations are
displayed as a line without arrows.
The following properties are user-definable: the lables, the width and color of the line linking two nodes, the formal property,
and the preferred layout direction. The preferred layout direction affects the layout of a network when ATLAS.ti
automatically arranges the nodes. See "Layout And Routing ."
Fo rma l Pro perti es
S YMMETRIC RELATIONSHIP
A relation R is symmetric if it holds for all A and B related with R that A is related to B if, and only if, B is related to A.
Figure 362: Formal definition for symmetric relations
Figure 361: Transitive Examples:

relations. Source: A "are friends B
Wikipedia A "is married to" (in most legal systems) B
A "is a fully biological sibling of" B
a "is a homophone of" B
TRANSITIVES R ELATIONSHIP
If A has a relation R to B, and B has a relation R to C, then A has a relation R to B.
Figure 364: Formal definition for transitive relations

Figure 363: Graph with
asymmetric relations
A typical transitive relation is the is-cause-of relation: if C1 is-cause-of C2 and C2 is-cause-of C3, it follows that C1 is-cause-of
C3. Transitive relations enable semantic retrieval. See "Semantic Operators."
Examples:
• equality is a transitive relation: a = b, b = c, hence a = c
• "is descendant of"
• "less than" is a transitive relation: a < b, b < c, hence a < c
• mother(x,y) is not a transitive relation
• sister(x,y) is a transitive relation (if all are females)
• brother (x,y) is a transitive relation (if all are males)
A SYMMETRIC RELATIONS
If x has a relation R to y, but y does not have a relation R to x.
A graph is asymmetric if:
• for every edge, there is not an edge in the other direction, then the relation is asymmetric
• loops are not allowed in an asymmetric digraph

Examples:
Figure 365: Family trees are asymmetric
• "is a child of": if Martin is the child of Marilyn, then Marilyn cannot be the child of Martin.
• "is less than," if x < y, then y is not less than x
A lot of your directed relations in ATLAS.ti will probably be asymmetric as often if A leads to B, it does not automatically
also lead to / result in / is part of C. Thus, it is not transitive. Transitive relations are for instance applicable if you
develop a taxonomy.
In Figure 366 a conceptual network is shown, which is more like telling a story how things fit together in your data. Those
stories can in most cases not be expressed based on transitive relations.
Figure 366: ATLAS.ti network expressing conceptional linkages
Li nk vs . Rel a ti o n
It is important to understand the difference between a relation (or a link type) and the link itself: There is only one "is part of"
relation, but potentially many links using it. In the Network below, the relation "is part of" is used four times and the the
relation "strategy for" is used five times.
Another way to think of links and relations is to view links as instances of relations. Links are well informed about the
characteristics of relations, which define their styles. If a characteristic of a relation is changed (e. g., line width, color,
symbol), these changes are propagated to all links using it.

Figure 367: Two relations used by nine links
THE ROLE OF R ELATIONS

It is useful to understand the role that relations play in the construction of a theory. The concepts (codes) that are linked
using relations represent aspects of the problem domain under investigation. On the other hand, the relations used to link
these domain concepts are part of the methodology used to analyze the phenomena. As important epistemological tools
they constitute the main questions that guide the development of a model or a theory.
If you are interested in learning more about network theory and how it is applied in ATLAS.ti, you can watch the
following video: Did you ever wonder what's behind the ATLAS.ti network function .
The Network Editor

The network editor offers an intuitive and powerful method to create and manipulate network structures. It favors a direct
The network editor lets manipulation technique: You can literally "grab" codes, quotations, memos, or other entities using your cursor and move
you visually connect them around the screen as well as draw and cut links between them.
codes and other objects
to create semantic The following describes various methods available for creating and editing networks.
networks or hypertext
webs.
N etwo rk Cha ra cteri s ti cs
Networks have certain important characteristics:
• Networks can be given names under which they are stored and accessed inside the project.
• Networks can be commented.
• Networks are displayed and edited in the network editor.
• Networks allow individual layout of the nodes.
• As a node, a single entity can be a member of any number of networks, just like a code can be an element of more than
one code groups.
• An entity, e. g., a specific code, can only appear once in any network.
Networks allow for a flexible but logically consistent display of links and relations, so there are a few constraints to keep in
mind:
• If code A is linked to code B using the relation "is associated with," then every network that contains code A and code B
will necessarily include the relation"is associated with" between the two.
• Furthermore, as only one link can exist between any two nodes at any given time, no network will display any other
relation between those two nodes.
If however, you want to link code A and B in different ways, then you need to work with "dummy or modifier codes." These
are empty codes, i. e. you have not used them for coding, but you need them to modify a relation.

Figure 368: Using modifier codes for case-based networks
No de Types
The following object classes can be displayed and edited as nodes within the network editor.
Figure 369: Codes as nodes C ODES AS N ODES

Codes are probably the most prominent objects in ATLAS.ti networks. They provide the main ingredients for models and
theories. Figure 369 shows three code nodes, a gray green colored node, and a code node without color. The gray and
uncolored code are commented, therefore the node also displays the comment icon.
MEMOS A S NODES
Memos in networks are often an important supplement to code networks.
Figure 370: A memo as
node Several theoretical memos can be imported into a network to map out their relationship. The visual layout provides
comfortable territory for moving from memo to memo to read and contemplate each individually and the relationship(s)
between them.
D OCUMENTS AS N ODES
Documents as nodes are useful for case comparisons paired with the option to "Add Node Neighbors." Further, documents as
nodes make a nice graphical content table for graphical documents when selecting the preview.
Depending on the file format, the document node icon is slightly different. It contains the comment icon, if a comment has
been written for the document.
Figure 371: QUOTATIONS AS N ODES

Documents as
nodes Quotations and codes have one thing in common that is not true for the other entities. They can link to each other
(quotations to quotations and code to codes) with fully qualified "first class" links using relations.
The inclusion of quotations in a network supports the construction and inspection of hyperlink structures. Like the icons for
document nodes, the icons for quotation node also vary by media type:
GROUPS AS N ODES
Displaying groups and their members in networks are useful to present all members that are part of the group. The links
Figure 372:
Quotations as nodes between a group and its members are depicted by a dotted red line. The line property cannot be changed.
Figure 373: groups as

nodes

Figure 374: Displaying a code group and its members in a network
Another application is to import code neighbors of document groups. The following network shows the result of a social
network analysis with the two persons serving as bridges between the two groups:
Figure 375: Working with document groups in networks
The lines between document groups and their members are colored in blue (source: McKether, Willi L. and Friese, S. (2016).
Qualitative Social Network Analysis with ATLAS.ti: Increasing power in a black community.)
Figure 376: Networks as nodes
NETWORK A S NODES
Networks as nodes allow the inclusion of networks in other networks. They cannot be linked to anything, but via the context
menu you can open the network in a separate network editor. You can also double-click to open the network (see Figure 376).
If it has a comment, the comment is displayed and from there you can click to open it. This is for instance useful if you are
running out of space on your screen. Instead of trying to represent everything in one network, you can create several
networks that build on each other. Via a network node in a network, you can continue to tell the story you want to tell.

View Options
The display characteristics of the nodes can be altered in a variety of ways.
To change the node or link style, select the View tab in a network editor, or in the contextual tab of the Network Tools.
Figure 377: Network View options
Vi ew
Overview: If you select this option, a schematic overview of the network is shown.
Figure 379: Switch between full,

short and symbolic display of
the label
Figure 378: Schematic overview of a network
Fit to Window:This options adjust the network to fit the size of the currently opened network editor.
Grid: The grid helps you to position nodes.
Figure 381: Network with activated grid option
Snap: Snapping llows an object to be easily positioned in alignment with grid lines, guide lines or another object, by causing
Figure 380: Node options
it to automatically jump to an exact position when the user drags it to the proximity of the desired location.
Layout
Routing: See “Layout And Routing .”
Layout: See “Layout And Routing .”

Link Label: In Figure 360the default relations are shown. See also "Relation Manager." You can define three labels for each
relation, a full name, a short name and a symbolic name. Depending on what you want to see in your network, you can switch
the label that is shown. If you change to a different label, this applies to all relations in the network.
Figure 382: Display options for nodes
Node Styles: Nodes can be displayed in four different styles. In the View tab open the drop-down menu for Node Styles. The
default style is 'flat'
Figure 383: Select a node style
Styl e
Comments: If activated the comments of all nodes that have comments are displayed.
Code-Documents Connections: There are no direct links between documents and codes as you do not directly apply codes to
a document. You apply codes to quotations that are part of a document. Nonetheless at times it is interesting to see which
codes have been applied to a document or a document group. In order to see those connections, you need to activate this
option. Code-Documents Connection are shown as blue lines. See Figure 384 and also Figure 375.
Figure 384: Network with code-docuemnt connections
Preview: The preview can be activated for all nodes where it applies if you activate the option in the ribbon. If you only want
to see the preview of selected entities, right-click the entity and select the Preview option from the context menu.

Figure 385: Show groundedness and density in networks
Frequencies: If activated it displays the the groundedness and density of code and memo nodes in the network. See "Code
Manager Columns" and Memo Manager Columns."
Show Node Icons: The node type icon can be switched on and off for all nodes. The small image used as a node icon
increases the distinctiveness of the nodes, especially when a mixture of node types exists in a network. Nonetheless, when
space runs low, you may prefer to switch off the icons.
Basic Network Procedures

Two methods for creating networks are available. The first one creates an empty network and you begin to add entities as
sequential steps. The other method creates a network from a selected entity and its neighbors.
Crea ti ng A N ew N etwo rk
In the Home tab open the drop-down menu for New Entities and select NEW NETWORKS . Enter a name for the network and
click CREATE .
Another option is to open the Network Manager with a click on the Networks button and select New Network in the ribbon of
the Network Manager.
Enter a name for the new network. A network editor opens.
Import nodes with any of the methods described in the section "Adding Nodes To A Network" below.
Addi ng No des To A N etwo rk

You can add nodes via the Add Nodes option or via drag and drop.
A DDING N ODES U SING T HE S ELECTION LIST

Select the NODES tab in the ribbon and from there the ADD NODES button.
This opens a selection list that is docked to the left-hand side of the network (see Figure 386). At the bottom of the
selection list you see the comments of an entity. The search fields helps you to find faster what you are looking for.
Select the entity type and then the entities that you want to add to the network.
Click ADD to complete the process.

If you do not need to add anything further to your network, you can close the selection list.

Figure 386: Selection list for importing nodes to a network
A DDING N ODES V IA DRAG & DROP

You can add nodes by dragging entities from Entity Managers, group manager, the margin, or the project explorer, or any of
the browsers into the network editor.
Open a network and position it next to the Project Explorer.
Select the node(s) you want to import into the network and drag-and-drop them into the editor. If you want to make
multiple selections, you need to open an entity browser or a manager and drag-and-drop from there.
Drag the selected objects into the network editor, and drop them there.
Sel ecti ng N o des And Li nks

Selecting nodes is an important first step for all subsequent operations targeted at individual entities within a network.
S ELECTING A SINGLE NODE

Move the mouse pointer over the node and left click.
All previously selected nodes are deselected.
S ELECTING MULTIPLE N ODES
METHOD 1
Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard, move the mouse pointer over the node and left click.
Repeat for every node to be selected.
METHOD 2 ("MARQUEE SELECTION")

This method is very efficient if the nodes to be selected fit into an imaginary rectangle.
Move the mouse pointer above and left to one of the nodes to be selected.

Figure 387: Marquee selection
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer down and right to cover all nodes to be selected with the
selection marquee.
Release the mouse button.
Li nki ng N o des
The links between nodes in a network are real connections between the entities. Therefore, creating and removing links
should not be regarded as solely "cosmetic" operations. Links make permanent changes to the project.
There are several ways to link nodes:
LINKING VIA D RAG & D ROP

Select a node. A red dot appears on the top left corner of the node. Click on the red dot with with the left mouse button
and drag the mouse pointer to the node that you want to link.
Release the left mouse button on top of the node.

If you link codes to codes or quotations to quotations, a list of relation opens.
Select one of these relations.
Figure 388: Linking two nodes
The two nodes are now linked to each other. In case of a first-class link between two codes or between two quotations, the
relation name is displayed above the line (rotated).
To set the display options, select DISPLAY / LINK DISPLAY from the network editor's menu.

LINKING TWO N ODES U SING T HE R IBBON I CON

Select a node in a network and click on the Link button in the ribbon (see left).
A black line appears. Move the end on top of another node and left-click.
If you link two codes to each other or two quotations, then a list of relations pops up. Select one of the offered relations
via a left click.
You need to use the method for linking if you want to link more than two nodes at a time.
As a reminder, Density counts all direct links to other codes. For instance, if six source codes are linked to one target
code, the target code is incremented by 6; each source code is incremented by one.
LINKING CODES OR QUOTATIONS IN THE ENTITY MANAGER

Quotations, codes and memos can also be linked in the Entity Manager via drag & drop.
Select one or more source items in the Manager's list pane and drag them to the target item in the same pane.
Select a relation from the list of relations in case you link codes, or quotations.
Figure 389: Linking quotations in the Quotation Manager via drag & drop
Openi ng A N etwo rk O n One O r Mo re E nti ti es

You can also open a network on an entity. It will be opened with all its directly linked neighbors,
Select an entity in the margin area, in a manager, the project explorer or any browser, right-click and select O PEN NETWORK
(or Open in Network Editor). Another option is to select the Open Network button in the ribbon. It is available if you select
an entity in a manager.
In the managers and browsers you can select multiple entities and select the OPEN NETWORK option. If multiple entities are
selected, their neighbors are not automatically included in the network. You can import their neighbors in a subsequent step.
The nodes are initially placed using the semantic layout procedure, but can be rearranged manually or using any of the other
layout procedures (see "Layout And Routing "). More nodes can be added to this network using different techniques . See
"Adding Nodes To A Network."
Each time a network is opened on a selected entity, a new network is created. There is no need to save it, as you can
easily display it at any time following the steps above. If you rearrange the nodes and want to preserve the new layout,
or if you add or remove nodes, then you need to save it explicitly: In the main Network ribbon select SAVE . Saved
networks can be selected from the Project Explorer, the list or the Network Manager, the Networks Browser and the
Network Manager.
Sel ecti ng And E di ti ng A Li nk

Only "first class" links can be selected. First class links can only exist between quotations or between codes. Selecting links is
similar to selecting nodes.

Move the mouse pointer to the line and left-click. The selected link label will be displayed boxed. All previously selected
nodes/links are deselected.
If you want to edit the link, right-click and open the context menu, or select the available options in the ribbon.
Being able to flip a link is relevant for directed links, i.e. relations with the property asymmetric or transitive. See "Formal
Properties."
Sel ecti ng N ei ghb o rs

Figure 390: Editing a link using the
context menu Neighbors are the nodes linked directly to a node. Using this procedure repeatedly selects a complete "connected graph,"
which is a partial network where every node has a path (either a direct link or via intermediate nodes) to each other node.
Select the initial nodes.
In the Nodes tab, select the option S ELECT NEIGHBORS, or press the short-cut CTRL-N on the keyboard.
Figure 391: Selecting neighbors
To mark a complete connected sub-network, repeat the previous step until all nodes within the partial network are
highlighted.
Sel ecti ng Al l N o des

To select all nodes select the option S ELECT A LL NODES in the ribbon , or press the short-cut Ctrl-A on the keyboard.
INVERTING THE CURRENT SELECTION

To invert the current selection, click the option INVERSE SELECTION in the ribbon. This will select all not selected nodes and
deselect all previously selected ones.
Des el ecti ng N o des And Li nks

To deselect a selected node or link: Click somewhere outside the node, or hold down the CTRL key and click on a selected
node or link.
To deselect all nodes and links: Click on an empty space in the network editor.
No de Acti o ns Per Do ub l e-Cl i ck

The table below describes the specific actions launched for the different node types.
Node Type Double-Click Action

Code Displays the code comment (definition).
Memos Displays the content of the memo.
Quotation Displays the full text of the quotation.
Document Displays the comment for the PD.
Group Displays the description/comment for the family.

Network Displays the description/comment for the network.
Cutti ng Li nks
Several approaches to disconnecting previously linked nodes are available. The first method is useful when many nodes
linked to one other node are to be disconnected, but it also works to cut just one link.
Select one or more nodes whose connections to another node are to be removed.
Click the CUT LINKS button in the ribbon. Nothing happens until you move the mouse pointer over the target node. If you
do the target node is boxed and the links to be cut are colored in orange.
Click the left mouse button.
Figure 392: Cutting links
To cut a single link, right-click on the link and select the CUT LINK option from the context menu (see Figure 390).
Mo vi ng N o des
By moving nodes to different positions, you can modify an initial layout created by the automatic layout procedure. For
precision placement of nodes, use the Grid and Snap option under the View tab.
Do not forget to save the network (and the project itself at the end of the session) if you want to make the new layout
permanent.
Res i zi ng N o des
Nodes can be individually resized.
Left-click a node at the bottom right corner and drag the box to make it larger or smaller.
Cl ea r N o de Si z es
If you have modified the node size, this option will reset the node size of selected node(s) to the default size.
Bri ng To Fro nt / Bri ng To Ba ck

You can resize a node, so that one node contains one or more other nodes. In order to see the nodes that are contain inside
others, you either need to bring the larger node to the back, or the smaller ones to the front. See Figure 393.

Figure 393: Resizing and bringing nodes to the front or back
Setti ng Co de No de Col o rs
In addition to applying colors to codes in the Code Manager, you can also set or edit the color of code nodes in networks.
Select one or more code nodes.
Click on the main Network tab, open the drop down menu of the COLOR button and select a color.
If you click on the Color button and not on the drop down arrow, you remove any existing color.
Figure 394: Set

code color in a
network
Remo vi ng No des Fro m N etwo rks
Removing nodes from the view simply takes the nodes out of a network. The nodes remain in the project. Removed nodes
can be "re-imported" at any time using the node import functions described previously.
Select the nodes to be excluded from the view.
Right-click and select R EMOVE FROM VIEW, or press the Del key on your keyboard, or select the Remove Nodes option in the
‘Removing Nodes' will not Nodes ribbon.
delete the entities they
represent.
Figure 395: Remove Nodes option in the Nodes ribbon
Mergi ng Co des In Netwo rks

In the section "Merging Codes " it has been described how to merge codes in the Code Manager. Below you will learn how to
accomplish this using the network editor. If you are more visually oriented, you may find it more comfortable to review, sort
and order your codes in the network editor.

Add all codes that you want to review and eventually merge into a network editor.
Select the code nodes that you want to merge, but not the target node. This is the node where you want all codes to be
merged into.
Click on the MERGE button in the ribbon of the Nodes tab. Move with your mouse over the target code node. A green
colored frame will appear.
Click on the target node and all selected code nodes will be merged into it.
Figure 396: Merging codes in a network editor
Figure 397: Merging codes in networks
Dupl i ca te Co des
If you duplicate a code, it will be like a clone. It will inherit all attributes like comment and color and all links. You find the
Duplicate option on the Nodes ribbon.
Crea ti ng A N ew Co de
When building networks, at times the need arises to insert a new code to be able to build the model you want to build, or to
tell just the story that fits your data. Therefore you find an option to create a new code in both the Network and the Node
ribbon.
Co py / Pa s te
You can copy and paste nodes from one network into another. If you paste a copied node into a text editor like a comment or
memo, the name of the node is pasted. You find the option und Nodes ribbon.
Crea ti ng Gro ups in N etwo rks

When you select a number of entities of the same kind you can create groups from them. If you select a number of codes,
you can create a code group, If you select a number of memos, you can create a memo group, and so on. You find the
grouping option on the Network and the Nodes ribbon.

Sa vi ng A N etwo rk
All links that you create are saved as soon as you save the project file. You only need to save a network, if you want to
preserve the layout, i. e. the way you have arranged the nodes within the editor. If you do not save a particular view, you can
always open up a network on an entity again and ATLAS.ti will arrange the entities according to the default or user-defined
layout directions.
To save a specific layout you have created, click on the button SAVE in the main Network ribbon.
Enter a name for the network and click CREATE .
The automatic layouts are not stored when you save a network. See "Layout And Routing ."
Dupl i ca ti ng A Netwo rk
If you want to continue working on a copy of a network, you can create a spin-off by clicking on the button CREATE S PIN-
OFF in the main Network ribbon.
Acces s i ng And Openi ng E xis ti ng N etwo rks

You can access saved networks in the Project Explorer, the Networks browser in the navigator, or the Network Manager.
In the network manager you can enter a comment for each network to describe it.
Creating New Relations
User-defined relations are only available for code-code or quotation-quotation links. All other links use "hard-wired"
relations (like the ones between quotations and codes).
New relations are stored together with the project in which they are used in addition to the default relations that come with
ATLAS.ti (see "ATLAS.ti Default Relations“).
New relations are created in the Relation Manager. You can define how a relation should look like in terms of color, width and
line style. Further you can select the layout direction and the formal property. The formal property defines whether a relation
is directed (transitive, asymmetric), or non-directed (symmetric).
You can access the Relation Editor via the LINKS button in the Home tab. Click on the drop-down arrow and select
R ELATIONS . Another option is to select the R ELATION M ANAGER button in the main ribbon in a network editor.
The ribbon options and column information has been described in detail in the section: "Relation Manager."
Depending on whether you want to create a new code-code relation or a new hyperlink relation, you need to select the
appropriate category first. The process of how to create a new relation is the same for both.
Figure 398: Selecting a category first
Click on the button NEW RELATION .

You can enter three labels for the relation: the name, which will be used as standard; a short name and a symbolic name.
These are only suggestions for how to make use of the three labels. You could also use the 'short name' field to enter the
label in a different language in case you work with data in different languages. If you apply this consistently you just need to
switch the link label (see “Editing Existing Relations"). and voila you have a second set of relations in a different language. It
is however not required to fill in the second and third field.
Enter a name for the relation and click CREATE .

Figure 399: Enter a name for the new relation
Figure 400: Define your new relation
Next select the line style (width, color, solid or dashed).
If you wish, you can specify the preferred layout direction that is used to automatically draw the picture when opening a
network on an object.
The final attribute to enter is the "formal property" of the relation: transitive, symmetric, or asymmetric. See "Formal
Properties" for further information.
Optionally, you can describe the newly created relation in comment field to the right.
E di ti ng E xi s ti ng Rela ti o ns
You can change the properties of relations. If these relations are already in use by the currently loaded project, changes will
take immediate affect and are stored along with the project when saving it.
Open the Relation Manager.
In the list of relations, select a relation that you want to modify and change any of the values. You can rename the
relation, change the line color, line width or style and its property.
Layout And Routing

You can select among twelve automatic layout options. The results of the automatic layout procedure are typically quite
usable and provide at a good starting point for subsequent manual refinement of nodes' placement. They can be combined
with four routing options that are responsible for an optimal placement of the links.
The following layouts and routing options are available:
Figure 401: Layout and Routing options

You can access them in the Network Editor via the main Network Tab and the View tab.
La yo ut
Orthogonal Layout: Orthogonal layouts allow the edges of the graph to run horizontally or vertically, parallel to the coordinate
axes of the layout. It produces compact drawings with no overlaps, few crossings, and few bends.
Orthogonal Tree Layout: Same as the standard orthogonal layout, but larger sub trees are processed using a specialized tree
layout algorithm, which is better suited for tree-like structures than the original orthogonal layout style.
Circular Layout: The circular layout places the nodes on a circle, choosing carefully the ordering of the nodes around the circle
to reduce crossings and place adjacent nodes close to each other. It emphasize group and tree structures within a network. It
creates node partitions by analyzing the connectivity structure of the network, and arranges the partitions as separate
circles. The circles themselves are arranged in a radial tree layout fashion. This algorithm suits social network analysis quite
well.
Circular Single Cycle Layout: This is similar to the circular layout, only that sub groups are not created and all nodes are
placed on a single circle. Useful for creating an overview and for shallow hierarchies.
Organic Layout: The organic layout style is based on the force-directed layout paradigm. When calculating a layout, the
nodes are considered to be physical objects with mutually repulsive forces, like, e.g., protons or electrons. The connections
between nodes also follow the physical analogy and are considered to be springs attached to the pair of nodes. These springs
produce repulsive or attractive forces between their end points if they are too short or too long. The layout algorithm
simulates these physical forces and rearranges the positions of the nodes in such a way that the sum of the forces emitted
by the nodes and the edges reaches a (local) minimum. Resulting layouts often expose the inherent symmetric and clustered
structure of a graph, they show a well-balanced distribution of nodes and have few edge crossings.
Radial Layout: When applying the radial layout style, the nodes of a graph are arranged on concentric circles. The layout
calculation starts by conceptually reducing the graph to a tree structure whose root node is taken as the center of all circles.
Each child node in this tree structure is then placed on the next outer circle within the sector of the circle that was reserved
by its parent node. All edges that were initially ignored are re-established and the radii of the circles are calculated taking the
sector sizes needed by each whole sub tree into account. This layout style is well suited for the visualization of directed
graphs and tree-like structures.
Hierarchical Layout: The hierarchical layout style aims to highlight the main direction or flow within a directed graph. The
nodes of a graph are placed in hierarchically arranged layers such that the (majority of) edges of the graph show the same
overall orientation, for example, top-to-bottom. Additionally, the ordering of the nodes within each layer is chosen in such a
way that the number of edge crossings is small.
Hierarchical Layout (Top-Bottom): Prefers to place nodes downwards from top to bottom along directed links.
Hierarchical Layout (Bottom-Top): Prefers to place nodes upwards from bottom to top along directed links.
Hierarchical Layout (Left-Right): Prefers to place nodes from left to right along directed links.
Hierarchical Layout (Right-Left: Prefers to place nodes from right to left along directed links.
Tree Layout: The tree layout is designed to arrange directed and non-directed trees that have a unique root node. All
children are placed below their parent in relation to the main layout direction. A child-parent relation in ATLAS.ti is defined
via a transitive or asymmetric link. Before applying the layout all nodes compromising a strict tree are removed and added
after the tree layout by connecting them with curved edges.
Tree layout algorithms are commonly used for visualizing relational data. The layout algorithm starts from the root and
recursively assigns coordinates to all tree nodes. In this manner, leaf nodes will be placed first, while each parent node is
placed centered above its children.
Random Layout: Randomly places the nodes every time this layout is invoked.
Ro uti ng
The positions of the nodes in the network are not altered by rerouting the edges.
Orthogonal Routing:This is a versatile and powerful layout algorithm for routing a diagram's edges
using vertical and horizontal line segments only. The positions of the diagram's nodes will remain
fixed. Usually, the routed edges will not cut through any nodes or overlap any other edges.
Poly Line Edge Routing: Polyline edge routing calculates polyline edge paths for a diagram's edges. The positions of the
nodes in the diagram are not altered by this algorithm. Edges can be routed orthogonally, i.e., each edge path consists of
horizontal and vertical segments, or octilinear. Octilinear means that the slope of each segment of an edge path is a multiple
of 45 degree.
Organic Routing: This algorithm routes edges organically to ensure that they do not overlap nodes and that they keep a
specifiable minimal distance to the nodes. It is especially well suited for nonorthogonal, organic or cyclic layout styles.
Straight Routing: Draw the links between nodes as straight lines without any consideration of node and edge crossing.
Please note, that currently all non-straight edges are not retained when closing and reopening the network.

Analytic Functions
Add No de N ei ghb o rs
This method imports all direct neighbors of the selected nodes into the network. This option is also available from the node's
context menu. Importing direct neighbors allows you to construct a connected network step-by-step. In a connected graph,
there is always a direct or indirect path between any two nodes.
Select one or more nodes, right-click and select the option ADD NEIGHBORS and then the type of entity that you want to
import.
Figure 402: Add Neighbors dialog
Below you see the list of neighbors for each entity. The option “all common” imports all neighboring nodes.
Documents • Codes
• Quotations
• Groups
Quotations • Codes
• Memos
• Quotations
• Documents
Codes • Codes
• Memos
• Quotations
• Groups
Memos • Codes
• Memos
• Quotations
• Groups
Document Groups • Codes

• group members
All other Groups • group members
Networks • Codes
• Memos
• Quotations
• Documents
• Groups

Co mpa ri ng Ca s es
Adding code neighbors to documents or document groups allows to create case-based network. You can ask questions like:
Which of the codes have been applied in which document or document group (and where do they not occur). ATLAS.ti
automatically draws light gray lines between codes and the primary documents.
In Figure 403 you see an example. It shows the type of reasons that have been mentioned by respondents of the two
document groups “education::highschool” and “education::come college”. In order to focus only on the “reasons for having
children codes”, the code group “reasons for having children” was set as global filter.
Depending which neighbors you are adding, it often is useful to set a global filter as otherwise too many items might be
imported. See “Applying Global Filters For Data Analysis.“
Figure 403: Using networks to compare cases (here two document groups)
Ad Co -o ccurri ng Co des
For code nodes, there is a special import feature that exploits the spatial relations of different codings. A code co-occurs with
another if it has been used to code quotations that are in close proximity: embedded, overlapping, or if two or more codes are
applied to the same quotation.
The proximity of coding applied to a text can also be exploited via the Query Tool’s “co-occurrence” proximity operator.
However, while the Query Tool yields quotations for explicitly specified codes, the import function brings in only the codes.
See “Proximity Operators“.
To import co-occurring codes:
Select one or more codes in the Network Editor.
Select one or more code nodes, right-click and select ADD CO-OCCURING CODES , or select NODES / A DD CO-CCCURRING CODES
from the ribbon.
When importing co-occuring codes it is often useful to set a global filter first. See “Applying Global Filters For Data
Analysis“.

Exporting Networks
Networks can be exported as graphic file, exported as XPS or PDF file, or printed.
To save a network as graphic file, select the EXPOR t tab in the Network Editor and the EXPORT BITMAP option. When saving
the file, you can chose among the following graphic file formats:
Figure 404: Different export formats for networks
To save a network in the Microsoft XPS format, select the EXPORT XPS option. The XPS format is Microsoft's alternative to
PDF.
If you want to create a PDF file, make sure a PDF writer is installed on your computer. If so, you can select the PRINT option
and chose your PDF Writer as printer.
Creating Reports
Overview
ATLAS.ti 8 offers user configurable reports in Word, PDF or Excel format. This means you can decide what should be
displayed in the report. You find an report option in each browser at the top right-hand side in the ribbon.
In addition, predefined reports are available in the Query Tool under the Report button. If you hover over an option with your
mouse, the screen tip explains what each of the report contains:
Figure 405: You find these four predefined reports in the query tool
Tables can be exported in Excel format, or text or graphic file. Take for example a look at the EXPORT button of the Code-
Document-Table in the Analyze tab. The graphic export option converts the table to .png format.
Creating Word / PDF Reports

Open the Code Manager and select one or more codes. Click on the REPORT button in the CODES tab.

CREATING REPORTS 222
The first option you may want to select is how the output is sorted. The default sort order is by code. If you select
multiple codes from different code groups, you can choose to group the output by code groups. Or if work in a team, you
may want to view the quotations by creating or modifying user.
The next step is to select all items that you want to include in the report:
Figure 406: Further options
Given the selections made in Figure 405, the output will contain the code name and all quotations with full content that are
linked to the selected codes.
If you for instance select 'Hyperlinks' under 'Quotations', a further sub-tree opens and you have more options (Figure 417). If
you only select Hyperlinks, the IDs and names of hyperlinked quotations are listed. If you are interested in reading the
content of the hyperlinks and you want to know which codes have been applied to them, in addition you would need to select
'Content' and 'Codes' in the Hyperlinks sub tree.
Figure 407: Code Report
Click CREATE REPORT to open the report. It is a read-only report.
Click on the S AVE button on top of the report to save it either as Word or PDF file

Creating Excel Reports

In every manager you find a button to create an Excel report. A frequently used report is a quotation report by codes. This
is how you can generate such a report:
Select one or more codes in the side panel.
Figure 408: Options for creating a quotation report by codes
Click on the EXCEL EXPORT button and select the following options:
The resulting Excel table looks as follows:
Figure 409: Excel report for quotations by code
Video Tutorials:
• ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - Creating a Report of Coded Quotations
• ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - Creating an Output of Quotations Linked to a Code

Creating A Codebook
To create a Code Book, you may want to select to group the output by code groups, include the descriptions (= comment)
of each code group, and the definitions for each code (= code comment):
Figure 410: Exporting the codebook to Word
Another option is to export to Excel:
Click on the EXCEL EXPORT button and select the options: Code / Comment / Code Group.
Figure 411: Codebook export to Excel
Figure 412: Codebook in Excel format
Video Tutorial: ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - Creating Output of Codes with Definitions

Creating A Report That Shows All Codes By Documents

Open the Document Manager and select the Excel export option.
Select the followig options:
Figure 413: Codes by documents report
Exporting Documents
You can export all documents that you have added to an ATLAS.ti project.
PDF and multimedia files (audio, video, images) are exported in their original format.
Text documents are exported as Word (docx) files. The formatting of the exported document may differ from the original, as
all text documents are converted to html when they are imported.
To export documents:
Open the Document Manager.
Select all documents that you want to export.
Select the T OOLS tab of the Manage Document ribbon, and from there the DOCUMENT EXPORT button.
Select a folder in which to save the documents.
Figure 414: Exporting documents from the Document Manager
Info Sheet for Excel Reports

All Excel reports have an addition sheet that shows meta information like the type of the report, the project name, date of
export and name of exporting user.

Figure 415: Info sheet for a document report
The info sheets of more varied reports contain more detail like which relative frequencies was selected in a Code-Document
Table, whether the c-coeffient was selected in the Code Co-occurence Table, an explanation of abbreviations used, or the
coders of an ICA report.
Figure 416: Example of an info sheet with more detail (Code-Docment Table report)
Data Export For Further Statistical Analysis

ATLAS.ti is intended primarily for supporting qualitative reasoning processes. On the other hand, especially with large
amounts of data, it is sometimes useful to analyze the data in a quantitative manner using statistical approaches. ATLAS.ti
can export your data in form of a syntax file for SPSS®, and a generic Excel format that can be imported to packages like R,
SAS, STATA as well as SPSS.
The basic components for statistics are cases and variables. The statistic export function in ATLAS.ti treats codes as
ATLAS.ti exports variables and data segments (quotations) as "cases."
quotations as cases. You
can use SPSS features to In contrast to the dichotomous treatment of codes within ATLAS.ti, you can use codes for further statistical analysis as
use primary documents ordinal or otherwise scaled variables by using a specific code-naming convention.
as cases. The notion of a "case" here is rather fine-grained and differs from the common understanding of this term. Usually cases in
qualitative research refer to persons, interviews, or documents. We chose to treat the smallest unit as a case for the output
to SPSS or other statistical packages, to ensure that no data is lost during export. Broader information, e. g., which
document or document group a quotation belongs to, is coded into the various variables (see below).
Scaled vs. Dichotomous Codes

Within ATLAS.ti, a code is always dichotomous, because it either refers to a given quotation ("1") or it does not ("0"). Each
case (= quotation) can, in respect to the codes, be described as a vector of 0's and 1's. The concept of scaled codes/variables
requires a special syntax.
The dimension or scale along which an evaluation is to take place is partitioned into the number of different values required.
Assuming that five degrees of fear are to be distinguished in a given analysis, five codes must be created:
evaluation %bad
evaluation %good
evaluation %not so good
A special naming convention is necessary to let ATLAS.ti identify variable codes from dichotomous codes.
Na mi ng Co nventi o n Fo r Sca l ed Co des

Variable name%value. As in:
Use comments to explain
the values of a scaled
code. Preference%red
Preference%blue

DATA EXPORT FOR FURTHER STATISTICAL ANALYSIS 227
Preference%green
This notation allows the system to construct one variable from all codes with the same prefix. The variable name will be
Do not assign multiple "Preference", and the values for this variable are: red, blue and green. You can use string or numerical values; anything that
values to the same follows the special symbol is interpreted as a value. Keep in mind that ordinal codes only have meaning in the context of the
quotation. Scaled codes statistic program you are using. Within ATLAS.ti, the differently valued codes are treated like every other code: in a
need to be applied in a dichotomous way
mutually exclusive way.
For the SPSS syntax export, you may choose an alternative character separating variable and value. If so, you can enter
the special character you used in the process of creating the SPSS syntax file.
Do not assign more than one scaled variable value (e. g., 'evaluation %good' and 'evaluation %2bad' to the same
quotation. Although ATLAS.ti permits an arbitrary number of codes to be attached to a quotation, this would not make
much sense with mutually exclusive values of scaled variables. If you do so, the SPSS generator will simply ignore
additional values after processing the first one it finds for a given quotation. Since it cannot be guaranteed which value
will be detected first, this will most likely produce unpredictable results-
SPSS Syntax Export

The output of the SPSS generator is a complete SPSS syntax file containing variable definitions, optionally the data matrix
ATLAS.ti exports and some default jobs statements:
quotations as cases. You
can use SPSS features to VAR LABELS are taken from code and code family names.
aggregate the data based VALUE LABELS for variables created from codes are:
on different criteria.
Y ES (1) - code is assigned
NO (0) - code is not assigned
Every "case" is not only described by the codes, but also by information about position (primary document, start and end
position), author, media type and date of creation.
There are two variables for the start position (SY and SX) and two variables for the end position (EY and EX) for a quotation.
Depending on the media type, they are used for different start and end coordinates.
SY (start) SX (start) EY (end) EX (end)

Text (rich text) paragraph Column character, paragraph Column character,
quotation based quotation based
PDF page Character count, page page Character count, page
based based
Audio --- milliseconds --- milliseconds
Video --- milliseconds --- milliseconds
Image SX and SY indicate the position of the upper left EX and EY indicate the position of the lower right
hand corner of the image hand corner of the image
Geo --- --- --- ---
Code and primary document families are handled using COMPUTE statements.
If applicable super codes can turn into non-dichotomous variables.
The SPSS syntax output created with ATLAS.ti is plain ASCII and can be edited before storing it as a file for further
processing with SPSS. Below you see an example syntax file:
TITLE 'Mixed Data for SPSS'.
* SPSS Syntax file generated by ATLAS.ti 8.2.0.

* SPSS Generator Version 1.0
* Date: 2018-04-12T14:48:05.
DATA LIST RECORDS=2

/1 CASENO (F6.0) D (F6.0) QU (F6.0) AUTHOR (A16) SY (F8.0) SX (F8.0)
EY (F8.0) EX (F8.0) TI (F10.0)
/2 C1 to C8 1-8
VARIABLE LABELS D 'Document'.

VARIABLE LABELS QU 'Q-Index'.

VARIABLE LABELS SY 'Start y-Pos'.
VARIABLE LABELS SX 'Start x-Pos'.
VARIABLE LABELS EY 'End y-Pos'.
VARIABLE LABELS EX 'End x-Pos'.
VARIABLE LABELS TI 'Creation Date'.
VARIABLE LABELS C1 'Audio'.
VARIABLE LABELS C2 'just a name'.
VARIABLE LABELS C3 'Evaluation'.
VARIABLE LABELS C4 'Buddha'.
VARIABLE LABELS C5 'Code name with more than 40 characters'.
VARIABLE LABELS C6 'Fish'.
VARIABLE LABELS C7 'Geo Code'.
VARIABLE LABELS C8 'Octopus'.
VALUE LABELS C1 to C2 1 'YES' 0 'NO'.

VALUE LABELS C3 0 'NO' 1 'bad' 2 'good' 3 'not so good'.
VALUE LABELS C4 to C8 1 'YES' 0 'NO'.
VARIABLE LEVEL C3 (ORDINAL).
* Represent code groups as computed variables.
COMPUTE CG1 = C7 + C6.
FORMATS CG1 (F1) .
VARIABLE LABELS CG1 'CG_Code family name with more than 40 characters'.
* Represent document groups as IF variables.

* Using ALL document groups.
* DG1 Document group name.

COMPUTE DG1 = 0.
IF (D = 5 or D = 4) DG1 = 1.
FORMAT DG1 (F1).
VARIABLE LABELS DG1 'DG_Document group name'.
* Document type declaration.
IF (D = 5) MediaType = 1.
STRING Media (A8).

RECODE MediaType (4="audio") (6="geo") (5="video") (2="pdf") (1="text") (3="graphic")
into Media.
VARIABLE LABELS MediaType 'Media Type (Numeric)'.

VALUE LABELS MediaType 1 'text' 2 'PDF' 3 'graphic' 4 'audio' 5 'video' 6 'geo'.
VARIABLE LABELS Media 'Media Type (String)'.
BEGIN DATA.
000001000002000001 username000000000000000000000000000000003668487978
00000010
000002000004000001 username000000000000000000000000000000283668488199
01101000
000003000005000001A name with more000000000000001600000000000000283668488282
00010000
.
.
000027000004000014 username000000010000139900000001000014123668488199
01000000
END DATA.
Trea tment O f Co de Gro ups

Code groups in SPSS jobs simply count the occurrences of assignments of any of its contained codes for the current case
(=quotation) using COMPUTE statements. Below an example for computing a code family variable is provided:
COMPUTE CG1 = C10 + C11 + C12 + C13 + C14 + C15.

VARIABLE LABELS CG1 'CG_Investigation'.
Scaled codes are ignored in the computation of code groups variables.

Trea tment O f Do cument Gro ups

Each case (= quotation) has its primary document index automatically generated by the SPSS export function. The value of a
quotation that is part of a primary document that is a member of a primary document family will be computed as a "1" or "0."
In the SPSS syntax file the PD family variable is computed as follows:
* DG1 Description of Victims.

COMPUTE DG1 = 0.
IF (D = 5 or D = 6 or D = 8 or D = 9 or D = 10) DG1 = 1.
VARIABLE LABELS DG1 'DG_Description of Victims'.
Crea ti ng SPSS O utput
Figure 417: Property window for SPSS job
From the Import & Export tab select SPSS JOB .
The SPSS Job Generation Window opens:

Use separate file: When checked, the data matrix is written to a separate file. This is mandatory if the size of the matrix
exceeds a certain size. SPSS cannot handle large data sets within a syntax file. For regular size projects, leave this option
unchecked.
Specify the name of the data set. This name is used as the file name and as the FILE reference from the DATA LIST
section. You only need to enter a name here if you generate separate data files.
"Create a fresh data file during next run" can be unchecked if the data has not changed since it was last created. This may
save some processing time.
Include quotation's author. Check if you want to export an additional variable that indicates the author for each quotation.
This is for example useful if you want to use SPSS to calculate inter-coder reliability.
The value separator is % by default, but can be changed to something else. See "Naming Convention For Scaled Codes."
Create task section. Enable this option if you want templates for procedures included at the end of the syntax file.
Create SAVE OUTFILE instruction. Enable this option if you want SPSS to save the data as *.sav file after running the
syntax file.
Specify all desired properties and click CREATE .

You can now run the file in SPSS, or make some changes to the syntax file before you run it.
Generic Export For Further Statistical Analysis

If you are using other statistical software or do not want to run a syntax file in SPSS, you can create a generic export that can
be read by other statistical packages like R, STAT, SAS as well as SPSS. The generic format needs to be imported using the
Excel import option of the software you are using.
To prepare a generic export, select the Import & Export tab and from there S TATISTICAL DATA .

Figure 418: Generic export for further statistical analysis
The exported file contains the following data:

CASENO: each quotation is a case
D: document number
Document name: name of the document
Media type: type of document
quote_start: start postion of a text quotation
quote_end: end postion of a text quotation
start_time: start postion of
end_time: end postion of an audio- or video quotation
SY / SX / EY / EX: coordinates of an image quotation
DG_name: quotation occuring in a document of the document group
code: assigned / not assigned to the code
CG_name: assigned / not assigned to a code of the code group
Below you see an example how the exported data are shown in Excel:
Figure 419: Example of the generic data export in Excel
To import the data for instance to Rstudio, select FILE / IMPORT DATSET.

Figure 420: Data imported to RStudio
QDPX – Universal Data Exchange

The QDPX data format allows for full project exchange with other CAQDAS packages. This is a major step toward a new
degree of freedom in research and opens new dimensions for all practioners of qualitative data analysis.
“We are very excited to see that–after fifteen years of ATLAS.ti being the only manufacturer to steadfastly champion universal
data exchange–other software makers are now coming around to seeing the benefit of not holding users’ data hostage any
longer.
ATLAS.ti responded to the wishes of researchers early on by offering an open, application-independent export format for
universal use. This long-standing commitment to academic openness and the free flow of ideas is now being recognized as an
important value in itself.
I am convinced that being able to move projects seamlessly between different applications will be of great benefit to the
research community. We are extremely proud to have been pioneers of this movement, and we are looking forward to the many
advancements it will bring!” (Thomas Muhr, March 18th 2019).
More information on the ATLAS.ti web site
What is QDPX
ATLAS.ti is a founding member of the Rotterdam Exchange Format Initiative (REFI), the consortium that designs and
governs the interoperability standard QDPX. At the heart of the matter, QDPX is an XML-based structured data format that
permits not only long-term product storage and product-independent archival of qualitative research projects, but also aims
at the exchange of projects between different software products.
ATLAS.ti has long championed the idea of universal exchangeability of qualitative research data between different
applications and was the first manufacturer to introduce a full XML project export in their software as early as 2004. The idea
of a universal data export was always a very obvious feature for us, considering the immense value that is added to data that
have been processed, analyzed, and structured in the qualitative analysis process.
In the past fifteen years, we have demonstrated through many exemplary applications (many embedded in older versions of
ATLAS.ti) what kinds of additional value lies in this data and in how many different and powerful ways it be used and re-
purposed–from direct transformation into visually oriented presentations formats (web pages, printable reports, ebooks) to

QDPX – UNIVERSAL DATA EXCHANGE 232
transformation into a huge variety of data formats (e.g, .rtf, csv, sql). And despite the wide spectrum of these sample
applications, they barely scratch the surface of what further powerful uses will still be possible in the future.
The most immediate benefit of QDPX quite obviously lies in the fact that it enables users of various QDA software products
to migrate their research projects between different packages. As more manufacturer join the initiative and implement the
new standard, its usefulness to researchers will doubtlessly grow exponentially.
Why is QDPX Great for You?

Find below some general arguments for QDPX and descriptions of some of its practical benefits:
• Because I don’t like to be locked in a specific QDAS solution, particularly if there are problems with it; I don’t want my data
to be held hostage. Interoperability nudges me through the point of sale because I’m less worried that I’ll be stuck in
something I don’t like.
• Now I can move to another software for reasons beyond my control (e.g., funding, new employer, new mandates).
• The data and coding may be the same, but I want to use different types of output/representation/visualisation that are
available in one program but not another.
• I’m working on my dissertation and I want to use program X but my committee members are more familiar with program
Y. No problem. I’ll just transfer my data over at a few key phases so they can understand and comment on the database
or the output/reports. I might even be able to convince them why I want to use program X.
• As a researcher who has become familiar with a particular CAQDAS package as a result of the product that is available to
me through a site license at my institution, I need to be able to continue working with my research data in a different
product if I move to an institution that has a different site license.
• Funding bodies increasingly look favorably on proposals that involve multiple research partners. This poses issues for
users working in different institutions, who are familiar with or have access to different products. As a researcher I
therefore need to be able to exchange my analysis between my product and those of my co-researchers. This will
significantly facilitate collaborative research. For example I want to collaborate with teams in three different countries
but they are all experts in a different program. In my grant proposal I want to be able to say that this is no problem and
part of the reason I should be funded.
• Each QDAS package has its own particular strengths. Users often need to be able to undertake an analytic task which is
not supported by their chosen product, or is enabled in a more appropriate way for their needs in another product. As a
researcher being able to move to an alternative product in order to undertake a specific task would facilitate higher
quality research
Find further information on the standard here.
Exporting A Project In QDPX Format

Select FILE / EXPORT and select the QDPX option.
Figure 421: Exporting a project in QDPX format

QDPX – UNIVERSAL DATA EXCHANGE 233
Miscellaneous Goodies
You can copy the content of every entity, be it a document name, a group name, a code, memo or quotation name, or a node
in a network and paste it into an editor or a network.
If you copy an entity name from a list into an editor, the name is pasted.
If you copy a node and paste it into an editor, the name of the node is pasted.
If you copy the name of an entity and paste it into a network, it is pasted as node. If links already exist, they will be shown
immediately.
Appendix
Language Settings
In ATLAS.ti 8, explicit language settings are no longer required. It offers full Unicode support.
Unicode is a computing industry standard for the consistent encoding, representation, and handling of text expressed in
most of the world's writing systems. The latest version of Unicode contains a repertoire of 128,237 characters covering
135 modern and historic scripts, as well as multiple symbol sets.
Useful Resources
The ATLAS.ti Web s i te
https://atlasti.com/
The ATLAS.ti website should be a regular place to visit. Here you will find important information such as video tutorials,
additional documentation of various software features, workshop announcements, special service providers, and
announcements of recent service packs and patches.
Qui ck To ur
https://quicktour.atlasti.com
To get started, we recommend to work your way through the Quick Tour. In about two hours you get an overview of the main
functions and an idea on how to conduct an analysis with ATLAS.ti. When you are ready to start your own project, use the
"Short Manual"(see below) as your continuing guide.
ATLAS.ti 8 – Wha t's N ew
What's New in ATLAS.ti 8
This document is intended specifically for users who already have experience using the previous version, ATLAS.ti 6, and who
are making the switch to the latest generation, in this case v.7.
Ma nua l s and Do cuments
https://manual.atlasti.com
Find the Quick Tour, How To Documents like installation instruction, information on project exchange, and team work, the
sample projects, our research blog and the library on this page.

APPENDIX 234
Vi deo Tuto ria ls
https://tutorials.atlasti.com
If you like to learn via video tutorials, we offer a range of short videos on the following topics: Features and Interface, Getting
started on a project, Coding, Visualizing – Working with networks and Hyperlinks. Under the following link you find a playlist
that contain video tutorials about how to work with ATLAS.ti 8 Windows including how to create a project, how to add
documents, how to add codes, how to create groups, etc.: Quick Tour ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - English
Res ea rch Blo g
https://blog.atlasti.com/
The ATLAS.ti Research Blog plays a very important role in the development and consolidation of the international
community of users. Consultants, academics, and researchers publish short and practical articles highlighting functions and
procedures with the software, and recommending strategies to successfully incorporate ATLAS.ti into a qualitative data
analysis process. We invite you to submit short articles explaining interesting ways of making the best use of ATLAS.ti, as
well as describing how you are using it in your own research. To do so, please contact us.
So cia l M edia
Y OUTUBE
https://youtube.atlasti.com
You find a growing number of video tutorials on the ATLAS.ti YouTube channel. So far videos are available in English and
Spanish.
F ACEBOOK
https://facebook.atlasti.com
Stay updated with the latest news on product updates, special offers, new training materials, etc. by joining us on Facebook.
We are also happy to hear from users via facebook. Stop by and let us know about your projects and experience with
ATLAS.ti!
TWITTER
https://twitter.atlasti.com
Follow us on Twitter for the most essential bits of information and announcements (version and service pack releases,
special offers, training opportunities, etc.).
N ews ro o m
https://newsroom.atlasti.com
The newsroom aggregates all pertinent company news conveniently on a single platform. Press releases, articles and
comments from the various ATLAS.ti profiles on social networking sites are agglomerated in real time. In addition, the
newsroom lets you subscribe to available content via RSS so you're always up-to-date on what's going on with ATLAS.ti.
Us er Co nf erence
https://conference.atlasti.com
The biannual international ATLAS.ti User Conference is a fantastic opportunity for users to meet developers, trainers,
experts, and other users from all over the world to learn from one another.
Pub l i ca ti o ns
• Friese, Susanne (2014, 2ed). Qualitative Data Analysis with ATLAS.ti. London: Sage.
• Susanne Friese & Thomas Ringmayr, eds., ATLAS.ti User Conference 2015: Qualitative Data Analysis and Beyond.
Conference Proceedings. Universitätsverlag TU Berlin. August 2016. Online

APPENDIX 235
Getti ng Suppo rt
https://support.atlasti.com
The easiest way to contact the Support Center is via the main menu option H ELP / MORE RESOURCES / CONTACT S UPPORT. Or
access the Support Center directly via the above URL.
Freq uentl y As ked Q ues ti o ns
https://kb.atlasti.com
Frequently asked questions are collected in our knowledge base on our website.
To access the site directly from ATLAS.ti, select H ELP / M ORE R ESOURCES / VISIT FAQ from the HU editor's main menu. An
active Internet connection is required to access this web page.
Get In Touch
Under the Tools & Support tab you find an option to report a problem and to send suggestions. We invite you to make use
of these options.
Figure 422: Contact us
Figure 423: Reporting a problem
Repo rti ng A Pro b l em

The problem report goes straight to our technical team. Please use this option to report technical issues.
Be sure to include a description of the problem that allows our technicians to reproduce the issue, and do not forget to
enter a valid email address.
Sendi ng Sugges ti o ns
We are interested in reading about your ideas and suggestions you may have. Please feel free to use this as a wish list. While
we cannot grant all wishes, knowing about what you need will help us to continuously improve the program to fit your needs.

APPENDIX 236
Figure 424: Sending a suggestion
Service Packs & Patches – Live Update

Program updates (patches and service packs) are regularly available to update your installation. The program downloads and
installs these service packs automatically.
Provided you have administrative rights to your computer (note: under VISTA and Windows 7, you need to explicitly run
ATLAS.ti as administrator in addition to being logged in with full administrator rights in Windows), ATLAS.ti checks for new
service packs upon start up (this requires an Internet connection). If a new service pack is found, you will be informed and
asked to install it.
To update ATLAS.ti manually, go to To update ATLAS.ti manually, go to File > Options > ATLAS.ti > Check for Updates.
– Alternatively, can also update via *Windows Start* > Scientific Software > Check for ATLAS.ti 8 Updates.

ATLAS - Ti 8 Windows User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

ATLAS - Ti 8 Windows User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ATLAS - Ti 8 Windows User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ATLAS.

Author: Dr. Susanne Friese (QuaRC)

ATLAS.ti – The Knowledge Workbench................................................................................................................................................. 11

Main Concepts and Features.................................................................................................................................................................. 12

Main Steps in Working with ATLAS.ti.................................................................................................................................................. 20

The ATLAS.ti Interface.......................................................................................................................................................................... 23

ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

Supported File Formats......................................................................................................................................................................... 45

Where Does ATLAS.ti Store Project Data?.......................................................................................................................................... 53

Working With Groups............................................................................................................................................................................. 56

Setting Up A Team Project.................................................................................................................................................................... 64

What You Need To Know When Merging Projects............................................................................................................................... 71

Exploring Data ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 73

ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

Creating Word Clouds And Word Lists........................................................................................................................................ 73

Working With Quotations .................................................................................................................................................................... 80

The Margin Area.................................................................................................................................................................................... 101

Auto Coding........................................................................................................................................................................................... 103

Focus Group Coding.............................................................................................................................................................................. 108

Finding Redundant Codings ................................................................................................................................................................. 112

Inter-Coder Agreement (ICA)................................................................................................................................................................ 114

Working With Multimedia Data ......................................................................................................................................................... 128

Working With Geo Docs....................................................................................................................................................................... 138

ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

Coding Geo Quotations............................................................................................................................................................... 139

Working With Survey Data................................................................................................................................................................... 141

Working With Reference Manager Data............................................................................................................................................ 144

Working With Twitter Data.................................................................................................................................................................. 147

Working With Hyperlinks..................................................................................................................................................................... 150

Working With Comments And Memos............................................................................................................................................... 159

Querying Data........................................................................................................................................................................................ 167

Applying Global Filters For Data Analysis........................................................................................................................................... 199

Working With Networks...................................................................................................................................................................... 206

Creating Reports.................................................................................................................................................................................. 228

ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

Info Sheet for Excel Reports...................................................................................................................................................... 232

Data Export For Further Statistical Analysis..................................................................................................................................... 233

QDPX – Universal Data Exchange....................................................................................................................................................... 238

ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

About this Manual

How to Use This Manual

ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

This paragraph offers info on additional resources on- and offline.

Useful Resources For Getting Started

The VISE Principle

ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

ATLAS.ti – The Knowledge Workbench

Software for Creative Analysis

Some Basic Terms

General Steps when Working with ATLAS.ti

Organize your documents. See "Working With Groups".

ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

Figure 1: Coded document with margin area

Main Concepts and Features

ATLAS.ti 8 Windows - User Manual

Figure 2: Possible linkages between ATLAS.ti entities